or  THE 
OF 


SIAMENE 


Home  Treatment 


A  guide  for  those  uho  seek 
HEALTH 


By 
M.  D.  L.  ALLEN,  M.  D, 


OAKLAND,  CALIFORNIA 
SIAMENE  HOME  TREATMENT  COMPANY 

1904 


Entered  According  to  Act  of  Congress  in  the  Year  190^,  by 
{'jT'^V  M.  D.  L.  AIvLEN,  M.  D. 

In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


Contents, 


IXTRODUCTIOX      7 

Mv  Convictions  and  Siamkne  System  of  Home  Treatment.  .      9 

Chapter  I. — Siamone  Pliilosophy  of  Disease  and  Its  Cure 11 

Reference  Column    16 

Chapter  II. — Description  of  Siamene  Treatini;-  Chart  Xo.  I 19 

Chapter  III. — Description  of  Siamene  Treating-  Chart  Xo.  II..    25 

Chapter  I\". — Xotes    Kxphunin<^r    Charts  Xos.  I  and  II 31 

Chapter  \'. — Description  of  Siamene  Treating  Chart  X^o.  III.  .  .    45 
Chapter  \'I. — Description  of  Siamene  Treating  Chart  Xo.  IV.  .    46 

Chapter  \"II. — ^Method  of  Making  an  Examination 49 

Chapter  AT  11. — Temperaments  and   Manipulations 55 

Chapter  IX. — Siamene    Xerve   Food 69 

Chapter  X. — General  Treatment   71 

Chapter  XI. — Plates  and  X^otes  on  ]Vlovements 76 

Chapter  XII. — Mental    Medicine 127 

Chapter  XIII. — Relation  of  Mental  and  Physical  Culture 134 

Chapter  XIV. — Hydrotherapy    186 

Chapter  XV. — Siamene   Remedies    J98 

Chapter  X\I. — Diseases:  Their  Symptoms  and  Treatment ....  204 

Chapter  XVII. — Dietetics  in  a  Nutshell 247 

Chapter  X\TII. — Poisons    250 

Chapter  XIX. — Emergencies    259 

Chapter  XX. — Caring  for  the  Sick-room '.  .  265 

3 


List  of  Illustrations. 


Fortrait    of    Authnr Frontispiece 

Siamene  Treating  Chart  No.  I   ^7 

Siamene  Treating  Chart  No.  II    24 

Siamene  Treating  Cliart   No.   Ill    44 

Siamene  Treating  Chart  No.  IV   47 

Plate  No.  I.     General  Treatment  of  Neck   77 

Plate  No.  2.     General   Treatment  of  Neck    (Continued ) 7° 

Plate   No.   3.     General   Treatment   of   Neck    (Continued)    81 

Plate  No.  4.     General  Treatment  of  Neck   (Continued)    82 

Plate  No.  5.     Treatment  for  the  Ear   85 

Plate  No.  '6.\.     Vibration  of  Temple.';  and  Forehead    86 

Plate  No.  6b.     Petrassaging  Temples  and   luirehead    89 

Plate  No.  7A.     Treatment  of  the  Nose  9° 

Plate  No.  7B.     Treatment  of  the  Nose   ( Continued )    93 

Plate  No.  8.     Treatment  of  Superorbital  Nerve 94 

Plate  No.  9.     Treatment  for  Spreading  and  Stimulating  Nostrils   97 

Plate  No.  10.     Treatment  of  the  Back  Muscles  of  the  Neck  98 

Plate  No.  1 1  A.     Raising  the  Clavicle  ^^^ 

Plate  No.  I  IB.     Rotation  of  the  Shoulder  ^02 

Plate  No.   12.     Expansion  of  the  Chest    ^°5 

Plate  No.  13.     Raising  Front  Ends  of  Ribs  and  Stretching  Diaphragm 106 

Plate  No.  14.     Expansion  of  Upper  Chest ^09 

Plate  No.  15.    General  Treatment  of  All  the  Spinal  Sympalhetics no 

Plate  No.   16.     Adjustment   of  the   Ribs    ^^3 

Plate  No.  17.     Treatment  of  the  Throat   "4 

Plate   No.   18.     Kidney   Treatment    ^ ^7 

Plate  No.  19.    Treatment  of  Rectum  ^^8 

Plate  No.  20.     Treatment  of  the  Back  Bones    I2I 

Plate  No.  21.     Treatment  for  Diarrhea  and  Flux   122 

Plate  No.  22.     Stretching  the   Sciatic   Nerve    125 

Plate  B  I.     Standing  M3 

Plate   B   2.      Sitting    ^44 

Plate   B   3-     Lying    ^^7 

Plate   B  4.     Kneeling    M» 

Plate  B  5.     Active  Rotation  of  Feet  in  Sitting  Position   151 

Plate  B  6.     Active  Rotation  of  Feet  in  Standing  Position   152 

Plate  B  7.     Active  Rotation  of  the  Knees   I5^ 

Plate  B  8.     Active  Rotation  of  the  Thigh   156 

Plate  B  9.     Active  Rotation  of  the  Bodv  on  Thigh-joint   I59 

Plate  B  10.     Active  Rotation  of  the  Body  on  the  Hips   160 

Plate  B  1 1.     Active  Rotation  Near  the  Middle  of  the  Back   163 

Plate  B  12.     Active  Rotation  of  Shoulder-blade   164 

Plate  B  13.    Active  Rotation  of  the  Hands 167 

Plate  B  14.    Active  Rotation  of  the  Elbow  168 

Plate  B  15.    Active  Rotation  of  the  Whole  Arm  17^ 

Plate  B  16.    Active  Rotation  of  Neck  on  Shoulder  172 

Plate  B  17.    Active  Rotation  of  Head  on  Neck  I7S 

Plate  B  i8a.     Standing  Position  176 

Plate  B  i8b.     Standing  Position    (Continued)    I79 

Plate  B  i8c.     Standing  Position    (Continued)    180 

Plate  B  19A.    Liver,  Spleen  and  Bowels     183 

Plate  B  19B.     Liver,  Spleen  and  Bowels   (Continued)    184 

5 


Human  Life 

ITS  IMPORTANCE  AND  PRESERVATION. 

In  presenting  this  volume  of  home  treatment,  the  writer 
is  overwhehiied  with  the  vast  importance  of  human  hfe. 

From  the  depths  of  the  secret  chamhers  of  the  subhminal 
mind  to  the  pinnacles  of  the  objective  reason,  we  hear  re- 
sounding that  humanity  is  the  focusing  center  of  the  universe, 
and  that  thinking  people  are  the  mediums  through  which  the 
mighty  message  of  life  is  flashed  from  continent  to  continent. 

We  learn  from  the  observatory  of  objective  reason  that 
the  growth  and  power  of  the  nation  depend  upon  the  propa- 
gation, perfection,  and  preservation  of  human  life. 

We  realize  that  human  life  and  unfoldment,  from  its 
minimum  in  the  cradle  to  its  maximum  in  the  perfections  in 
human  character,  depends  upon  the  influences  of  a  w^ell-ordered 
home,  directed  and  guided  by  the  intelligent  mother. 

The  home  is  the  garden  in  which  this  little  human  plant 
is  to  be  studied  and  reared  to  its  highest  state  of  perfection. 
This  little  life,  tender,  flexible,  and  endowed  with  the  powder 
and  the  spirit  of  growth,  is  too  often  in  unskilled  hands,  that 
know  not  how  to  cherish,  cultivate,  and  keep  it  in  a  healthy 
state  of  growth  and  unfoldment.  The  mother  has  the  care 
of  the  tender  plants  in  their  infancy,  and  through  her  knowl- 
edge of  the  interdependence  of  their  mental  laws  and  physical 
structure,  she  is  enabled  to  give  them  the  proper  setting,  tem- 
pering them  to  the  sunshine  of  love  and  patience,  and  to 
assist  in  their  grow^th  physically,  mentally,  morally  and  spir- 
itually. 

At  all  times  the  mother  is  in  need  of  a  perfected  knowl- 
edge of  the  foundation  work  of  child  care  and  human  unfold- 
ment. This  consciousness  will  bring  to  the  mind  of  the 
reader  vivid  experiences  in  his  life,  in  which  the  heart  bled 
for  the  want  of  the  knowledge  and  means  at  hand  to  relieve 

7 


8  SIAMEXE    HOME    TREATMENT. 

a  meml)er  of  the  family  from  sickness,  pain,  or  impending 
death,  in  tlie  ahsence  of  the  family  physician. 

With  the  writer's  experience,  working  along  the  various 
avenues  and  by-ways  of  this  human  garden,  hand  in  hand 
with  the  good  husbandmen  of  these  fields  of  toil,  sipping 
alike  with  them  the  sorrows  and  pleasures  from  its  vintage, 
we  feel  keenly  the  demands  of  their  daily  life. 

We  realize  that  this  human  plant  contains  the  principles 
of  unfoldment,  growth  and  expansion,  and,  gi\en  the  power 
and  wisdom  of  adai)tation  to  environment  and  phenomenal 
development,  bud,  blossom,  and  fruit  will  result  in  a  life 
blessed   with    abundant    health,    happiness,    and    usefulness. 

Xo  one  can  appreciate  more  keenly  than  we  how  often 
the  parent  is  in  need  of  a  little  specific  knowledge  of  the 
structure  and  the  laws  governing  this  little  human  life, 
likened  unto  the  harp  with  many  thousand  strings. 

At  any  time  of  the  day,  or  in  the  dead  hours  of  flie  night, 
the  parent  may  be  called  to  the  bedside  of  the  infant  or 
child  to  administer  relief  measures  that,  perhaps,  may  be  the 
hinge  upon  which  its  future  health,  or  even  its  life,  may 
depend. 

It  is  the  vivid  life  experience  covering  a  space  of  thirty 
years  that  moves  the  writer  to  prepare  this  volume. 

Each  man  builds  his  own  world,  and  in  that  each  forms 
a  chain  of  sequence.  To  come  into  harmony  with  all  the 
higher  laws  and  forces  controlling  the  mind  and  body,  and 
to  work  in  conjunction  with  them,  is  to  come  into  the  chain  of 
this  sequence.  This  is  the  secret  of  all  health.  Heretofore, 
the  anatomy  of  the  human  body  and  the  functions  of  the 
vital  parts  have  been  concealed  in  Latin  phrases  and  obscure 
sentences.  It  is  the  writer's  aim  to  point  them  out  so  simply 
and  so  clearly  that  even  a  child  can  understand.  It  is  our 
purpose  to  point  them  out  that  all  can  infuse  them  into 
every-day  life,  or  make  use  of  them  at  any  time  or  place, 
to  relieve  the  suffering  and  distressed,   whether  in  a  palace. 


si.\.Mi-:xi-:  iioMK  tri-:at.mi-:.\t.  9 

home,  jniblic  jilace.  or  in  the  most  hiimhle  hovel,  or  where- 
soever sickness  may  he   foinid. 

That  sickness  and  i)ain  can  thus  he  controlled  is  not  a 
niatter  of  si)eculati\"e  theor\-.  hut  a  matter  of  i)ositive  fact; 
and  it  is  the  ohject  of  the  author  of  this  volume  to  guide 
the  reader  and  instruct   him  in  this  great  system. 

My  Convictions 

AND 

SIAMENE  SVSTP:M  OF  HOME  TREATMENT. 

I  believe  in  an  independence  of  thought. 

I  believe  that  every  human  being  is  an  integral  part  of 
the  divine  Creator,  a  free  moral  agent,  and  as  such  should 
think  for  himself  in  all  matters,  more  especially  in  matters 
pertaining  to  his  own  personal  health.  Health  is  the  divine 
function  of  the  inner  self;  health  of  body  and  harmony  of 
niind  is  the  natural  plane  for  all  creatures. 

I  believe  in  freedom  of  thought  and  freedom  of  action 
iii  studying  and  practicing  natural  laws  and  applying  natural 
remedies. 

I  believe  it  is  the  duty  of  every  person  to  attain  sufficient 
knowledge  of  his  physical  structure  and  mental  laws  to  en- 
able him  to  keep  his  body  in  a  state  of  health  and  his  mind 
in  poise. 

I  believe  that  all  the  power  there  is  to  heal  a  man  is 
fr)und  within  him. 

I  believe,  advocate,  and  put  to  practice  the  principles  of 
applying  all  available  measures  of  treating  ourselves  Avhen 
sick,  and  that  all  means  that  have  their  origin  in,  and  are  in 
harmony  with,  the  inner  self  should  first  be  put  to  practice; 
that  objective  means  should  be  the  last  resort. 

I  believe  the  greatest  sin  we  can  commit  against  our- 
selves is  to  permit  our  minds  to  become  unbalanced,  biased, 
and  prejudiced,  thus  destroying  the  physical  eciuilihrium  and 
mental  poise. 


]0  SIAMENE    HOME   TREATMENT. 

I  believe  it  is  the  duty  of  the  head  of  every  family  to 
acquire  sufficient  knowledge  of  the  human  body  and  laws 
governing  the  same  to  enable  him  to  call  into  action  the  sub- 
hminal  powers  within,  and  to  apply  simple  and  eflfective 
objective  remedial  agents  in  the  early  stages  of  all  mental  and 
physical  diseases. 

If  such  were  the  condition,  most  all  of  the  suffering,  loss 
of  health,  lingering  and  chronic  diseases,  and  great  fruitless 
expenditure  of  money  would  be  avoided. 

I  condemn  an  exclusive,   egotistic,   narrow  practice. 

To  all  those  who  are  in  need  of  this  do  I  most  sincerely 
dedicate  these  pages. 

""step  by  step  one  goes  very  far." 

The  Siamene  System  of  Home  Treatment  is  the  combina- 
tion of  the  triune  powers, — mental  laws,  mechanical  manipu- 
lations, and  chemical  action  of  drugs.     It  embraces : — 

First :  Sufficient  underlying  principles  of  anatomy  and 
physiology  of  the  human  constitution,  and  laws  governing 
the  same,  for  practical  use. 

Second :  The  mental  laws,  combined  with  mechanical 
manipulations  of  the  body,  to  give  tone  to  the  nerves,  remove 
pressure,  thereby  stimulating  the  circulation  of  the  blood. 

Third :  The  combination  of  mental  powers,  breathing, 
and  physical  exercise. 

Fourth :  Mental  medicine,  which  gives  power  of  concen- 
tration, strengthens  thought  power,  and  teaches  how^  to  use 
thoughts  to  give  health,   happiness,    friends,   and  wealth. 

Fifth :  We  have  the  hydropathic  system  in  a  condensed, 
but  none  the  less  effective,  form  to  meet  indications  that  can 
not  be  easily  met  by  other  systems  of  treatment. 

Sixth :  We  have  selected  from  the  rare  and  well-tested 
list  of  drugs  the  l)est  bactericides,  prepared  them  under  our 
owm  formulas  in  a  scientific  manner,  to  meet  the  indications 
in  the  various  germ  diseases. 


You  Can  Not  Fail 


that  far  end 

To  which  life  and  change  and  progress 

Shape  your  destiny, 

You   can   not    fail. 

There  is  no  place 

Where  nature  errs ; 

There  arc  no  laws 

That  of  expression  fail ; 
o  elements  mistake  affinities; 
ou  can  not  fail. 

■'Xo  sun  that  with  its  myriad  host 

Illumines  space  is  there  in  vain  ; 

No  atom  under  foot 

But  that   fulfils 

Its  perfect  part. 

Suns  bum  out  and  systems  end. 

But  not  for  naught. 

A  lofty  joy  of  Being  thrills 

Ere  they  depart, 

And  changes  come 

To   light   some  more   supernal   day. 

You  can  not   fail. 

"Time  spreads  its  wrecks 
Across  the  world  ; 
Man  builds  to-day, 
But   ere  his  thought 
Has  reached  completion 
Oblivion's  approaching  night 
Soon  claims  his  work ; 
Yet  not  in  vain. 
Each  thought  and  act 
Was  of  realization   full. 
And  ideals  vanish  only 
At  the  dawn  of  higher  ones. 
You  can   not  fail. 


"Ages  unfold  their  plan 

That  you  may  rise. 

In   ceaseless  toil   and  labor 

Man   has   wrought, 

And   time   and   change 

Have  swept  their  works  away 

But  in  the  heart  and  mind 

Result    remains 

That  lifts  the  soul 

To  higher  planes. 

You   can   not   fail. 


"No  cliange,  no  circumstance. 

Defeats  the  end 

To  which  you  live. 

The   past   and    future  culminate 

In  your  eternal  Now. 

What  you  may  be. 

What  shall  attain. 

Naught  e'er  can  change ; 

For  in   perfection   of  the   whole 

Is  every  part   involved. 

You  can   not   fail." 


Chapter   I. 


THE   SIAMKM-:    PHlLOSOl'llV    OF    DISHASL: 
AND  ITS   CURE. 

1.  Disease  is  the  result  (if  uiihealtliy  thoughts  (Hrected  to     Disc:i>e 
the  physical  organs  of  the  body,  consciously  or  unconsciously. 

2.  Health  is  the  result  of  healthy  thought  directed  to  the     Health 
physical  organs  of  the  body,  consciously  or  unconsciously. 

3.  Thoughts  are  consciously  or  imconsciously  healthy  or     Tiuntgiits 
unhealthy. 

4.  These  thoughts  affect  certain  portions  of  the  brain  that 
bear  a  specific  relation  to  the  thought. 

5.  These  thoughts  send  impulses  through  the  spinal  cord  ruovgut 
and  synipathetics  to  the  spinal  sympathetic  centers  (par.  6i).  impu'^es 
from  whence  they  are  distributed  to  the  different  organs  of 

the  body  by  the  spinal  sympathetic  nerves. 

6.  If  these  thoughts  are  healthy,  they  send  liealthy  im- 
pulses to  the  spinal  sympathetic  nerves,  whose  action  is  thereby 
strengthened. 

7.  If  these  thoughts  are  unhealthy,  they  send  unhealthy 
impulses  to  the  spinal  sympathetic  nerves,  whose  action  is 
thereby  weakened. 

8.  To  illustrate:  If  there  is  a  fear  thought,  it  originates 
in  the  lobe  of  the  brain  that  contains  the  faculty  ( par.  250)  of 
caution.  This  thought  is  transmitted  from  that  part  of  the 
brain  to  the  spinal  sympathetic  centers,  from  whence  it  is 
distributed  to  the  different  organs  of  the  body,  and  a  corres- 
ponding weakness  ensues.     Caution  is  a  depressor. 

In  like  manner,  if  the  thought  is  a  defensive,  alimentive, 
or  any  other  specific  thought,  it  originates  in  the  lobe  of  the 
brain  that  bears  its  specific  relation  to  the  thought,  and  sends 
its  impulses  to  the  spinal  synipathetics,  impressing  the  eell 
grozi'th  of  the  body  according  to  the  thought. 

II 


12  SIAMEXE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

1  lence  the  old  adage,  "Tell  me  what  a  man  thinks,  and  I 
will  tell  you  what  he  is." 
xcrvcs  9.  The  nerves  control  tlie  hlood-vessels  that  circulate  the 

Control  ])ioo(i  'fi^e  blood  contains  red  and  white  blood  corpuscles. 
The  one  contains  the  vital  element  of  life  and  the  other  the 
nutritive  element.  The  red  blood  corpuscles  are  called  eryth- 
rocvtes  and  the  white  blood  coriniscles  are  called  leucocytes. 

10.  It  tolhnvs  tliat  as  the  ner\-e  action  is  strengthened  by 
healthy  thoughts,  the  leucocytes  are  accordingly  strengthened 
ti>  increased  action. 

11.  If  the  nerve  action  is  weakened  by  unhealtliy  thoughts, 
the  leucocytes  are  accordingly  weakened  and  unable  to  do  the 
work  necessary  to  sustain  a  healthy  condition  of  the  body. 

Germs  12.  Innumerable  cjuantities  of  germs  of  different  species 

infest  the  atmosphere  which  we  breathe,  the  food  we  eat,  and 
the  water  we  drink. 

13.  Each  species  of  these  germs  has  a  specific  affinity  to 
some  certain  portion  of  the  body.  If,  upon  reaching  that 
portion,  the  leucocytes  are  in  a  strengthened  condition,  by  vir- 
tue of  a  normal  and  healthy  action  of  tlie  nerves,  the  germs 
are  overpow-ered. 

14.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the  leucocytes  are  weak,  by  vir- 
tue of  not  being  sustained  by  normal  nerve  action,  the  germs 
overpower  the  leucocytes  and  establish  an  independent  colony 
of  their  own. 

15.  Here  the  germs  set  up  a  fermentive  process,  inflaming 
and  swelling  the  tissues,  irritating  the  tine  nerve  textures  that 
ramify  them,  thus  extending  their  territorial  supremacy,  and 
barricading  their  boundary  walls,  thereby  shutting  off  the 
circulation  of  the  blood,  so  that  the  leucocytes  can  not  disturb 
their  colonizing  process. 

This    irritation    extends    along    the    nerve    to    the    spinal 
sympathetic  nerve  center  that  supplies  the  affected  part,  and 
causes  contraction  and  tenderness  of  muscles  and  tissues  ad- 
jacent to  tlie  ner\e  center. 
lefiicinca  16.  Wheu  niediciual   remedies  are  used,   thev  effect  their 


Till-:  si.\.Mi:xi-:  I'liii.osoi'iiN'  oi-   diskasi-:  axd  its  ci'rr.      it, 

cure  tlii"oui;"h  the  circulation  of  the  IjKtoil.  Now,  it  the  cir- 
culation of  the  leuc(K\vtes,  or  scaveng-ers.  in  the  blood  is  shut 
off  from  that  i)ni-tiini  of  the  hody  affected,  it  is  ini])()ssil)le 
to  reach  the  disease  and  effect  an  immediate  ciu-e  by  the 
remedy  alone. 

17.  We  know  that  the  j4erm  is  allowed  to  propagate  be- 
cause the  circtilation  is  poor;  the  circtilation  is  poor  Ijecause 
the  nerves  are  weak;  the  nerves  are  weak  Ijecause  unhealthy 
impulses  are  sent  from  the  brain;  these  unhealthy  impulses 
come    from   unhealthy    thouj^hts. 

18.  Therefore,    in    order    to    eft'ect    an    immediate    relief,      iicnith 
licaUh   t/ioiti^/its   III  list   first  rxist ;  they  in  turn  send   healthy 
impulses  to  the  nerve  centers.    These  nerve  centers  along  the 

s])ine  ( i)ar.  (m  )  have  become  irritated,  and  have  contracted  the 
muscles  into  hard  cord-like  knots;  they  must  be  relaxed  by 
mechanical  manipulations,  and  in  a  normal  condition,  in 
order  that  the  healthv  impulses  from  the  brain  can  strengthen 
tlie  ner\e., 

19-  As  soon  as  the  normal  action  of  the  nerve  is  set  up, 
immediately  the  circulation  is  improved.  Then  the  leucocytes 
are  able  to  break  down  the  barricade  estal)lished  by  the  germs, 
and  restoration  of  lost  function  begins.  Then  the  medicinal 
remedies  used  are  enabled  to  effect  their  result. 

20.  To  illustrate :  Among  the  many  species  of  foreign 
germs  that  infest  the  human  body,  we  have  the  piicuiiio-coccits, 
the  germ  that  has  a  peculiar  affinity  for  the  lung  tissues. 
It  is  a  deadly  germ  that  ])ropagates  and  thrives  in  no  other 
l)ortion  of  the  body.  It  is  the  germ  that  sprouts  the  fungi 
that  produces  inflammation  of  the  lung  tissue,  pneumonia. 

\\  hen  this  germ  finds  lodgment  in  the  circulation,  through 
any  one  of  the  three  avenues  of  ingress. — air,  food,  or  water, — 
and  migrates  to  the  lung  tissues,  where  the  vital  forces  are 
below  the  normal  condition,  by  virtue  of  impaired  nerve 
function,  they  find  fertile  soil  in  which  to  colonize.  They 
set  up  their  process  of  fermentatif)n.  propagating  in  large 
rjuantities,    inflaming  and    swelling   the   tissues,    irritating  the 


14  SIAMEXE     HOME    TREAPMEXT. 

fine  nerve  filaments  that  ramify  the  tissues,  thus  barricading 
against  normal  blood  flow. 

Hence,  by  virtue  of  this  barricaded  condition  of  the  lung 
tissues,  the  medical  profession  from  a  therapeutical  stand- 
point, have  not  been  aljle  to  select  from  the  many  medical 
remedies  one  that  is  able  to  enter  this  infected  region  of  lung 
tissue  and  destroy  the  fungi. 

In  the  Siamene  System  of  Home  Treatment,  we  treat  the 
nerve  centers  that  have  a  specific  influence  over  the  infected 
part  of  the  lung,  taking  off  the  pressure  that  sustains  the 
barricade,  permitting  the  normal  blood  to  flow  through  the 
parts. 

If  the  blood  is  not  otherwise  normal,  it  follows  that  there 
is  pressure  on  other  nerve  cepters  than  the  ones  that  supply 
the  lung.  Through  the  Siamene  System  of  recognizing  dis- 
eases, these  conditions  also  are  recognized,  and  the  pressure 
removed. 

What  is  true  of  the  p)icumo-cocci  is  also  true  of  every 
other  foreign  germ  that  infests  the  human  body. 

THE    AVENUES    OF    IXGRESS    AND    EGRESS. 

Ingress  21.  There  are  but   four  avenues  through  which   diseases 

gain  access  to  the  human  system. 

yientany  22.  First :  Through  the  mental  processes,  fear  and  anger 

(caution    and    combativeness).      These,    combined    with    too 

much  or  too  little  of  other  forces,  constitute  the  primal  causes 

of  all  diseases.     Owing  to  the  interdependence  of  mind,  brain, 

and  nerve,  misdirected  tlwngJiis  n'cakcn  nerves,  li'eak  nerves 

cause   weak    organs,    zveak    organs    tolerate   zvaste    material, 

zi'aste  material   makes  fruitful  soil  for   the  propagation    of 

foreign  germs. 

Mouth  23.  Second:    Through   the   mouth,    mixed    with   the   food 

stuffs,   enter   many   varieties   of   germs   that    migrate   to   the 

various    parts    of   the   body,    which    furnisli    them    congenial 

environment  and  sustenance  (page  224). 

xose  24.  Third :  Through  the  nose,  gaining  access  to  the  blood 


Till-:   SIAMKM-:    rillLOSOlMIV    OF   DISEASE   AND   ITS   CURE.        I5 

ihrous^ii  the  nuijous  surfaces  of  tlie  air  passages  and  cells  of 
tlie  lungs. 

25.  Fourth  :  The  skin,  including  stings,  bites,  bruises,  and     ski,, 
all  forms  of  venerial  diseases. 

26.  There  are   only   five  avenues   through   which   disease     i^srcss 
can  be  eliminated  from  the  human  system. 

27.  iMrst :   Through   mental   ojDeration.     Health    tlioiigJifs     Mcnoiiiy 
first    and     last.       Healthy     thoughts    create    healthy     acts. 
Healthy  acts  always  precede  liealthy  results. 

28.  Second :  The  alimentary  canal  is  the  great  sewerage     so^veis 
system  of  the  body.     The  bulk  of  the  w^aste  material,   in- 
cluding germs,  is  eliminated  through  this  avenue. 

29.  Third :  The  skin  is  the  next  most  important  sewerage,     skw 
eliminating  a  different  substance,  poisonous  to  the  blood. 

30.  Fourth :   The  kidneys,   eliminating  still  another  class     Kidneys 
of  poisonous  material  causing  blood  poison,  gout,  and  rheu- 
matism. 

31.  Fifth :  The  lungs,   eliminating  the  carbon  dioxide,  a     Lungs 
poison  accumulating  in  the  blood  as  an  ash  or  soot,  the  re- 
sult of  combustion  of  a  portion  of  the  various  elements  taken 

as   food. 

If  these  five  sewerage  systems  are  kept  in  a  healthy  con- 
dition, there  is  no  sickness. 


REFERENCE   COLUMN    FOR    CHARTS    NOS.  I  AND    II  AND   THEIR 

NOTES.  ^= 

Cervical  Region 


Base  of  Brain 

Eye 

Ear 

Tongue,  Throat,   Fauces    . 
Circulation,   Fever,   Catarrh 
Diphtheria,  Weak  Voice   . 
Cerebral  Circulation    .    .    . 


Eye  Muscles,  Twitching 
Heart,  Palpitation,  Beat 


Stomach 

Epigastric  Region 

Solar  Plexus 

Lungs     

Heat  and  Chills 

Liver,  Spleen 

Kidneys      

Bladder  and  Urethra  .... 

Upper  Bowels 

Lower  Bowels,   Diarrhea    .    . 

Appendicitis 

Pelvic    Organs 

Sciatic  Ceriter 

Generative  Organs 

Uterus,  Labor 

Vagina,  Testicle,  and  Ovaries 

Rectum 

Anal  Muscles 

*  Refer  to  paragraph  51. 


Note 

Cervical 
I.  2,  3 

I 

2 

I.  3 

3 

2  to  5 

4 

2  to  4 

5 

I  to  5 

6 

I  to  8 

7 

I  to  8 

Dorsal        Lumbar 


Dorsal  Region 

Note 

Cervical 

Dorsal 

Lumbar 

Sacral 

8 

2  to  4 
(  I  to  2 
]  2  to  4 
f  I   to  4 

9 

r      4 

1  4.  5.  6,  7 

10 

<       2,  3 

1  3  to  5 
13  to  8 

II 

4>  5.  6 

12 

b 

13 

I  to  10 

H 

7,  8,  9 

15 

8  to   II 

16 

I  to  3 

6  to  12 

I  to  3 

Lumbar  Region 


Note 

Cervical 

Dorsal 

Lumbar 
2  to  5 

Sacral 

17 

I  to  3 

18 

8  to  12 

19 

8  to  10 

4  to  5 

20 

II,   12 

I  to  5 

21 

2  to  5 

I  to  5 

22 

4  to  5 

Sacral  Region 


Note 

Cervical 

Dorsal 

Lumbar 

Sacral 

23 

4.   5 

I  to  3 

24 

2,   3 

8,    12 

2  to  5 

25 

8  to  12 

I  to  5 

26 

5 

I  to  3 

27 

5 

Siamene 
Treating  Chart 

No.  I. 


Dorsal 


--"  V  **.  »  iM  -  — •  — — Lumbar 


Sacral 


Chapter  II. 


DESCRIPTION  OF  SIAMPZNE  TREATING  CHART  NO.   I. 

32.  The  Sianiene  Treating  Chart  No.  I  is  an  anatomical      rhe  Design  at 
chart  designed  to  assist  the  reader  in  studying  and  under-      ctmrt  no.  i 
standing  his  own  body,  and  to  infuse  liis  mind  with  a  greater 

zeal  in  the  fulfilment  of  that  maxim,  "Know  thyself,"  and 
when  studied  in  connection  with  Charts  Nos.  II  and  III  and 
the  accompanying  notes,  it  enlarges  the  scope  of  knowledge 
of  his  own  physical  structure  and  enables  him  to  apply  this 
knowledge  in  helping  himself  and  his  fellow  men. 

It  is  also  designed  as  a  landmark  and  guide  for  the  loca- 
tion of  all  the  spinal  bones  and  ribs,  as  well  as  all  the  spinal 
sympathetic  nerves  (pars.  58,  59,  and  60),  and  when  studied 
in  connection  with  its  notes  and  Charts  Nos.  II  and  III.  it  is 
an  index  to  the  human  body  for  the  Siamene  Manipulative 
Treatment. 

It  is  further  designed  to  illustrate  a  posterior  view  of  the 
anatomy  of  the  spinal  sympathetic  nerves  and  their  relation 
and  harmony  to  all  adjacent  tissues;  namely,  the  spinal 
column,  ribs,  muscles,  skin,  head  and  face;  and  when  studied 
in  connection  with  Chart  No.  II  it  illustrates  the  simplicity 
of  applying  the  Siamene  Physical  Movements  to  the  nerve 
centers  along  the  spinal  cord  to  control  the  circulation  of  the 
blood  in  the  body  organs  in  health  and  in  disease. 

33.  The  first  and  most  important  feature  of  this  chart  is     sphmi 
the   spinal  column    (back-bone).     It  is  a  column   of  bones,      column 
leading  from  the  head  to  the  base  of  the  body.     If  the  back 

bones  are  large  and  strong  and  in  a  perfectly  healthv  con- 
dition, the  constitution  of  the  patient  is  much  better  sus- 
tained than  it  would  otherwise  be,  because  the  back-bone  is 
the  foundation  of  the  body. 

2  19 


20 


SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 


Cervical 
Region 


The  Dissected 
Flap  of  Skin 


Dorsal 
Kesion 


34.  There  are  thirty-one  bones  in  the  spinal  column,  di- 
vided into  four  sections,  as  follows : — 

35.  The  first  section,  the  cervical  region,  embraces  the 
first  seven  bones,  the  neck  (i  to  7). 

36.  The  second  section,  the  dorsal  region,  embraces  the 
next  twelve  bones  and  all  the  ribs  (i  to  12). 

37.  The  third  section,  the  lumbar  region,  embraces  the 
next  five  bones,  the  small  of  the  back  (i  to  5). 

38.  The  fourth  section,  the  sacral  region,  embraces  the 
sacrum,  the  great  wedge-bone,  five  sections  in  number  ( i  to 
5),  and  the  coccyx,  the  tail-bone,  two  in  number. 

39.  The  spines  (F,  F)  in  the  back  of  the  neck,  the  cer- 
\ical  region,  are  represented  as  being  twisted,  since  the  face 
is  turned  to  the  left,  bringing  into  view  the  left  side  of  the 
first,  second,  third  and  fourth  vertebrae.  The  spines  of  the 
fifth,  sixth,  and  seventh  are  represented  with  a  posterior  and 
right  lateral  half  view. 

40.  The  head  being  turned  to  the  left  brings  into  view 
the  first,  second,  third,  and  fourth  cervical  nerves  on  the 
left  side,  and  their  connection  with  the  cranial  nerves  (C) 
that  supply  the  eye,  nose,  mouth,  ear,  and  throat.  On  the 
right  side  of  the  second,  third,  fourth,  fifth,  sixth,  and  seventh 
bones  may  be  seen  the  cervical  nerves  as  they  emerge  from 
the  spinal  cord  between  the  bones,  the  last  four,  the  fifth, 
sixth,  seventh  and  eighth,  entering  into  the  brachial  plexus 
(c,  c)  that  supplies  the  arm  and  hand.  Accompanying  the 
nerves,  as  they  emerge  from  the  spinal  cord,  are  seen  the 
arteries  (d)   and  veins  (e). 

41.  In  the  cervical  region  on  the  left  side  there  is  a  flap 
of  skin  dissected  from  the  first  bone  of  the  neck  down  to  the 
first  dorsal  vertebra,  and  across  to  the  shoulder,  forming  a 
flap  (A,  A,  A),  exposing  the  small  arteries  (d),  veins  (e), 
and  fine  filaments  of  nerves  (c),  proving  their  nearness  to 
the  touch  of  the  hand  while  manipulating. 

42.  In  the  dorsal  region  are  shown  the  twelve  posterior 
spines    (F,   F),  and  to  their  right,   adjoining  them,  are  the 


DESCRIPTIOX    OF    SIAMENE    TREATING    CHART    NO.     I.       2  1 


twelve    rii;ht    lateral    halves    of   the    vertelir;v,    with    a    short 
section  of  the  ribs   (G,  G)   attached  thereto. 

Emerging  from  the  spinal  column  between  the  vertebrae  and 
the  ribs  are  seen  the  spinal  sympathetic  nerves  (intercostal) 
(c),  arteries  (d),  and  veins  (e),  passing  out  around  the 
body. 

43.  In  the  luml)ar  region  are  the  spines  (F,  F)  and  right 
lateral  halves  of  all  the  vertebrae  and  left  lateral  halves  of 
the  fourth  and  fifth  vertebrae  (2  and  i). 

Emerging  from  the  spinal  column  between  the  vertebrae  and 
are  the  nerves    (c),  arteries   (d),  and  veins    (e). 

44.  In  the  sacral  region  are  the  right  lateral  halves  of  the 
sacral  and  coccygeal  bones. 

Emerging  from  the  sacrum  are  seen  the  sacral  nerves  (c), 
arteries  (d),  and  veins  (e). 

45.  It  also  shows  where  a  section  of  the  skin  on  the  left 
side  has  been  dissected  from  the  seventh  dorsal  vertebra  to  the 
lower  end  of  the  spine,  leaving  the  superficial  layer  of  muscles 
(B),  the  fine  filaments  of  sympathetic  nerves  (c),  small 
arteries  (d)  and  veins  (e)  of  that  side  exposed  to  view. 

46.  A  muscle  is  an  organ  of  motion,  consisting  of  red 
fibers,  or  bundles  of  red  fibers,  inclosed  in  a  thin  grayish  cel- 
lular membrane. 

A  tendon  is  an  aggregation  of  bundles  of  fibers  of  thin 
cellular  membrane,  which  invests  muscles  and  forms  a  fibrous 
cord,  by  which  a  muscle  is  attached  to  a  bone. 

In  this  illustration  is  shown  the  attachment  of  the  muscles 
and  tendons  (B)  to  the  spines  of  the  back  bones. 

47.  There  are  eight  pairs  of  nerves  in  the  cervical  region. 

48.  In  the  dorsal  region  there  are  twelve  pairs  of  nerves, 
corresponding  to  the  twelve  ribs  and  vertebrae. 

49.  In  the  lumbar  region  there  are  five  pairs  of  nerves. 

50.  In  the  sacral  region  there  are  six  pairs  of  nerves,  five 
sacral  and  one  coccygeal. 

These  nerves  are  illustrated  on  the  right  side  of  this  chart; 
also  in  Chart  No.  11. 


Liimhar 
Region 


SacrnI 
Region 


Dissected 
Portion 
of  Skin 


Museles 

and 

Tendons 


22  SIAMENE    HOME    TREATMENT. 

K'cicrencc  51.  Oil   tlic   pagc   oppositc   Treating   Chart   No.    I   is   an 

Column  index  (Reference  Column),  divided  into  five  columns.  The 
numbers  in  the  first  column  headed  "Notes"  refer  to  the  num- 
bers of  the  notes  in  chapter  "Notes  Explaining  Charts  Nos.  I 
and  II."  The  numbers  in  the  second  column  refer  to  the 
nerves  in  the  cervical  region,  and  are  explained  in  the  accom- 
panying note.  The  numbers  in  the  dorsal,  lumbar  and  sacral 
columns  refer  in  like  manner  as  the  cervical  column.  The 
nerves  under  each  of  these  heads  refer  to  the  nerves  of  that 
region  and  combine  to  influence  the  special  portion  of  the 
body  that  is  explained  in  the  note  of  reference. 


b\ 


Ccrvhitl 


^--1 


Siamene 

Treating   Chart 

No.  II. 


Note. — The  Sth  nerve  in  cervical  region  is  omitted. 


Chapter  III. 


DESCRIPTION    OF    SIAMENE    TREATING    CHART 

NO.    II. 

52.  The  Siamene  Treating  Chart  No.  II  is  an  anatomical 
cliart  desig-ned  to  ilhistrate  a  side  view  of  the  spinal  sympa- 
thetic nerves  and  all  of  their  ganglia  (nerve  centers),  the  full 
length  of  the  spinal  column  and  their  relation  to  all  the  in- 
ternal  organs. 

Before  we  proceed  farther,  it  would  be  well  to  define  the 
nervous  system,  that  the  reader  may  have  a  clearer  under- 
standing of  the  chart  and  the  following  chapters. 

53.  Nerves  are  organs  of  thread-like  structures,  extend-     .verves 
ing   from   the  brain   and   spinal   cord   throughout  the  body, 
stimulating   action   and    conveying   sensations    to   the   brain. 
(Also  see  par.  65.) 

54.  For   our   purpose   in   this   text,    in   order   to   make   it     xervous 
clear  and  comprehensive,  we  avoid  the  more  minute  and  com-     system 
plicated  structure  of  the  nervous  system,  describing  only  that 

which  will  be  of  use  to  the  reader  in  this  work ;  hence,  we 
divide  the  nervous  system  into  two  divisions,  the  central 
system  and  the  general  system. 

55.  The  central  nervous  system  embraces  the  brain  and  centmi 
spinal  cord,  and  constitutes  the  centers  that  receive  all  sensa-  •''>ste//i 
tion  and  give  off  all  motion. 

56.  The  general  nervous  system  embraces  all  the  nerves  <ienerai 
of  the  body.  This  system  is  divided  into  cranial  nerves,  System 
spinal  nerves,  and  sympathetic  nerves. 

57.  The  cranial  nerves  are  given  off  directly  from  the  crauiai 
brain,  and  are  divided  into  twelve  pairs.  The  facial  nerve 
(par.  40,  Chart  I,  C),  the  great  pneumogastric  nerve  (par. 
71,  Chart  II,  x),  and  the  superorbital  nerve  (par.  221),  are 
the  three  principal  nerves  of  this  division  which  enter  into 
this  text. 

25 


Serves 


26 


SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 


Spinal 
\erves 


Synij>atlivtic 
Nerves 


Spinal  Sympa- 
thetic Nerves 


58.  There  are  thirty-one  pairs  of  spinal  (motor)  nerves, 
correspondini^  to  the  thirty-one  bones  of  the  vertebral  column. 
They  have  their  origin  in  the  spinal  cord,  and  emerge  from  it 
on  either  side  from  between  the  bones  of  the  vertebral  column. 

59.  The  sympathetic  (sensory)  nerves  are  a  pair  of  gan- 
glionic (knots  or  centers)  nerves,  consisting  of  a  series  of 
ganglia  connected  by  intervening  cords,  having  their  origin 
in  the  brain,  passing  out  of  the  skull  in  front  of  and  on 
the  lateral  sides  of  the  back-bone,  and  running  its  full  length. 
There  are  thirty-one  pairs  of  ganglia,  each  giving  off  a  branch 
which  unites  with  the  spinal  nerve  soon  after  it  emerges  from 
the  bone. 

60.  The  union  of  the  spinal  nerves  and  sympathetic  nerves 
uito  one  sheath  forms  the  spinal  sympathetic  nerves   (s,  s). 

61.  The  spinal  sympathetic  centers  are  divided  into  four 
sections,  eight  cervicals  corresponding  to  the  seven  cervical 
vertebrcT,  the  first  vertebra  having  two  nerves,  one  above  and 
cue  below  it  (i  to  8)  ;  twelve  dorsals,  corresponding  to  the 
twelve  dorsal  vertebr?e  and  ribs  (i  to  12)  ;  five  lumbars,  corre- 
sponding to  the  five  lumbar  vertebrae  (i  to  5)  ;  six  sacrals, 
corresponding  to  the  seven  sacral  bones  ( i  to  5,  the  last  num- 
ber omitted).  The  union  of  the  spinal  and  sympathetic  nerves 
is  seen  in  the  cervical  region  on  the  side  of  the  neck,  in  the 
dorsal  region  between  the  ribs,  in  the  lumbar  and  sacral  re- 
gions, on  the  sides  of  the  vertebral  column. 

62.  The  spinal  sympathetic  nerves  have  two  functions. — 
of  Spinal     ir.otion  from  the  spinal  nerve,  and  sensation  from  the  sympa- 

sympathetics     ^]^Q^\^.  ncrvc,  aud  are  distributed  to  the  entire  body  as  such 
motion   and   sensation. 

63.  The  impulse  of  the  power  of  the  operator  enters  the 
organs  and  tissues  of  the  body  through  the  sympathetic 
fibers,  penetrating  the  skin  and  muscles,  while  the  motor 
fibers  execute  the  orders  of  the  mental  forces. 

64.  From  each  spinal  sympathetic  center  there  is  an 
external  and  internal  branch,  the  external  branch  running 
backward  and  outward  controls  the  sensations  and  functions 


l-'uiiction 


DESCKII'TIOX    OF   SIAMENE   TREATING    CHART    NO.    II.         2/ 

of  the  spines  of  the  vertebrie  and  the  muscles  of  the  back 
(see  second,  third,  and  fourth  huubars),  and  the  skin,  where 
they  form  a  fine  network  of  spinal  sympathetic  vasso-motor 
dilators  and  restrictors.  The  internal  branch  leads  to  a 
corresponding  internal  organ,  spreading  over  and  through 
it.      (See  "Internal  Branches.") 

65.  Nerves  are  transmitters  on  which  the  influences  are 
sent  from  the  brain  to  govern  the  functions  of  those  parts  to 
which  they  extend. 

66.  Part  of  the  first  to  fourth  cervical  nerves  extend  to     cervtcni 
the   scalp   of  the   back   of   the   head,    ear,    face,    and   throat.     J<e^ion 
Branches  from  the  third  to  eighth,  inclusive,  supply  the  mus- 
cles of  the  lower  neck  and  shoulders  with  functional  power, 

and  form  the  brachial  plexus  (C  i)  that  supplies  the  arms 
and  hands. 

67.  The  first  to  fourth  dorsal  nerves  govern  in  part  the  oorsai 
action  of  the  heart  (i)  and  the  upper  part  of  the  lungs;  the  -^'<^^''o" 
fourth   to   sixth   controls   in   part   the   action   of  the   lungs; 

the  fourth  to  seventh  supplying  that  of  the  stomach  (3)  ;  the 
seventh  to  eleventh  on  the  right  controls  the  liver  (2)  and 
on  the  left  the  spleen;  the  tenth  to  twelfth  control  the  bowels 
(4)  and  kidneys  (7).  In  this  region  there  is  a  branch  from 
the  spinal  sympathetic  nerves,  running  out  between  the  ribs, 
called  the  intercostal  nerves  (par.  42). 

68.  The  nerves  in  this  region,  as  well  as  supplying  nerve     Lumbar 
power  to  the  muscles  and  skin  of  the  back,  send  branches  into     i^egion 
the  kidneys  (7),  lower  bowels  (8),  and  all  the  pelvic  organs, 

and  form  the  great  sciatic  nerve  (10),  and  its  companion, 
the  crural  nerve,  that  supplies  the  legs. 

69.  The  external  branches  of  the  nerves  of  the  sacral  sacrai 
region  control  the  heavy  muscles  of  the  hips  and  skin  over  Kegion 
that  region,   and   send  branches   into  the  pelvic  plexus  and 

the  external  genitals,  uterus  (5),  vagina  (12),  ovaries  (15), 
bladder  (6),  lower  bowels  (8),  rectum,  and  all  adjacent 
tissues  superintending  their  functions. 


28 


SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 


Desceridhifi 
Aorta 


\'en!i   C!l^:l 


The  Piwti- 
mosrasiric 


Solar  Plexus 


Pelvic  Plexus 


Orif^in  ami 

Tcrminits 

of  a  Xerve 


Ivfiuence 
of  a  Xerve 


70.  The  descending  aorta  (13),  passing  down  in  front 
of  the  spinal  column,  gives  off  small  arteries  that  accompany 
the  external  branches  of  the  spinal  sympathetic  nerves,  sup- 
plying the  muscles  and  skin  of  the  back  with  blood,  also 
branches  that  accompany  the  internal  nerves  supplying  the 
internal  organs. 

The  ascending  vena  cava  (14)  passes  upward  along  the 
front  of  the  spine  on  the  right  side  of  the  aorta,  extending  up 
to  the  heart,  where  it  terminates  in  the  lower  and  back  part  of 
the  auricle  of  the  heart.  It  returns  the  blood  from  all  the 
lower  part  of  the  body. 

The  superior  vena  cava  (not  illustrated  in  chart)  returns 
the  blood  from  the  upper  extremities. 

71.  The  pneumogastric  (x),  the  great  cranial  nerve,  sup- 
plying motive  power  to  the  heart,  lungs,  and  stomach,  and 
forming  a  part  of  the  solar  plexus,  is  seen  emerging  from 
the  skull  and  passing  down  in  front  of  the  spinal  column 
and  the  chain  of  sympathetic  nerves. 

72.  The  solar  plexus  (9)  is  the  culmination  of  the 
pneumogastric  and  the  spinal  sympathetic  nerves  (par.  104). 

73.  The  pelvic  plexus  (11),  the  bundle  of  nerves  that  sup- 
plies the  pelvic  organs  with  vital  power  to  perform  their 
functional,  is  formed  of  branches  from  the  solar  plexus 
and  all  the  lumbar  and  sacral  nerves. 

The  arch  of  the  aorta    (16). 
The  trachea  or  windpipe  (18). 

74.  Knowing  the  origin  of  a  nerve  to  be  in  the  spinal 
cord  and  the  sympathetic  ganglia,  that  it  has  an  external 
and  an  internal  branch,  and  that  the  external  fibers  of  the 
external  branch  are  in  the  skin,  and  that  the  terminal  fibers 
of  its  companion  (the  internal  branch)  are  in  an  internal 
organ,  our  knowledge  of  conditions  in  the  parts  thereby  sup- 
plied becomes  clear. 

75.  Nerves  passing  through  a  muscle  have  no  influence 
on  the  muscle,  but  the  influence  is  exerted  by  the  nerves 
ending  in  a  muscle  (par.  171). 


Power  of  the 
Xcrvous  Svsteni 


DESCRirXIOX    OK   SIAMENE   TREATING    CHART    NO.    II.         29 

76.  The   nervous    system   controls    the    circulation   of   all     controiihm 
the  fluids  of  the  body,  and  should  there  be  any  interference 
in  the  normal  action  of  the  nerves  distributed  to  a  certain 
locality,  there  is  disease. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 

77.  If  a  cold*  draft  should  strike  the  skin  over  the  first 
four  nerves  of  the  neck,  as  cold  causes  contraction,  that  con- 
traction Avould  close  the  blood-vessels,  and  so  influence  the 
circulation  of  the  blood  in  the  parts  those  nerves  supply  as  to 
produce  sore  throat,  eyes,  or  mouth,  as  the  case  might  be. 

Again,  if  a  draft  contracts  the  fibers  of  a  muscle  in  the 
neck  and  makes  pressure  on  a  nerve  passing  through  it,  as 
this  nerve  influences  some  vital  organ,  you  will  find  a  disturb- 
ance of  the  function  in  the  organ  thereby  supplied. 

Suppose  you  have  a  pain  in  the  large  muscle  extending 
from  the  side  of  the  chest  to  the  front  of  the  arm  at  the 
shoulder,  a  fan-shaped  muscle,  you  will  not  manipulate  that 
muscle,  but  go  to  the  spines  at  the  lower  part  of  the  neck, 
and  there  you  will  find  a  tender  or  contracted  muscle;  at 
this  point  you  will  influence  the  nerve  center  that  controls 
the  chest  muscle.  ]\Ianipulation  at  this  point  will  relieve  the 
pain  at  the  distant  organ. 

SPINAL    SYMPATHETICS. 

78.  All  muscular  action  and  sensation  are  under  the  con- 
trol of  the  spinal  sympathetic  nervous  system,  and  there  are 
central  points  along  the  spines  corresponding  to  the  nerves 
as  they  emerge  from  the  spines,  that  go  to  influence  the 
sensations  and  actions  of  the  body. 

It  will  go  without  saying  that  the  clearer  conception  one 
has  of  these  centers  and  their  influence  upon  distant  organs, 
the  better  success  they  will  have  in  treating;  but  the  most 
essential  point  is  to  be  able  to  recognize  the  points  of  dis- 
turbance along  the  spine.  (See  "Examination  and  Diagno- 
sis.") 


30  SIAMENE  HOME  TREATMENT. 

Take,  for  instance,  the  first  and  second  dorsal  nerves; 
we  stimulate  these  to  influence  the  heart. 

The  second  and  third  lumbars  influence  the  uterus.  To 
stimulate  the  lower  limbs  we  manipulate  all  of  the  lumbars. 
To  influence  the  neck  of  the  l)ladder,  we  treat  the  fifth  lum- 
bar. For  defecation,  treat  the  fourth  lumbar.  To  influence 
the  walls  of  the  stomach  and  its  secretions,  treat  the  sixth, 
seventh,  and  eighth  dorsals. 

We  influence  the  tcnninal  cuds  of  the  nerves  in  the  in- 
ternal organs  through  the  nerve  centers,  or  central  points 
along  the  spine. 

If  the  reader  will  study  the  central  points  of  the  nerves 
in  the  treating  charts,  and  their  terminal  ends  in  the  internal 
organs,  it  will  be  easy  to  understand  the  philosophy  of  dis- 
ease and  its  cure. 


Chapter  IV. 


NOTES  EXPLAINING  CHARTS  NOS.  I  AND  II. 


NOTE    I. 

79.  An  abnormal  pressure  on  the  first,  second,  and  third 
cervical  nerves  will  affect  the  nerve  centers  in  the  base  of 
the  brain,  and  at  the  end  of  the  spinal  cord,  producing  the 
following  difficulties:  coughing,  sneezing,  vomiting,  saliva- 
tion,  fever,   and  some  kidney  troubles. 

Any  one  or  all  of  the  above  conditions  may  be  relieved 
by  appiying  Siamene  Nerve  Food  and  manipulating  the  mus- 
cles in  the  region  of  the  first,  second,  and  third  cervical 
nerves. 

80.  These  vitalizing  and  energizing  centers  are  located 
in  the  base  of  the  brain,  and  generate  all  mental  energy. 
j\iental  deficiency  or  derangement  must  be  traced  to  the  same 
locality,  and  treated  through  these  centers. 

81.  The  medulla  oblongata  is  the  lowest  portion  of  the 
brain,  termed  the  base.  It  is  just  above  the  great  opening 
in  the  base  of  the  skull,  and  forms  the  beginning  of  the  spinal 
cord,  which  passes  down  the  back-bone.  This  organ  is  the 
center  of  all  the  symptoms  mentioned  in  this  note  to  be  treated 
through  the  first,  second,  and  third  cervical  nerves  by  apply- 
ing Siamene  Nerve  Food  and  manipulating  the  contracted 
muscles. 

NOTE  2. 

82.  The  first  and  third  cervical  nerves  are  affected  by 
disturbances  of  the  eye,  the  pharynx,  larynx,  and  tonsils. 
Treatment  of  the  first  and  third  cervicals  by  applying  Siamene 
Nerve  Food  and  manipulating  the  contracted,  hard,  and  ten- 
der muscles  gently,  slowly,  and  firmly,  will  remove  the  pres- 
sure  and   relieve  the   parts   aft'ected.     The   internal   ear   also 

31 


Ahnoniinl 
Presstirc 


Psychic 
Centers 


Medulla 
Ohlotii^ala 


The  Eye 


32  SIAMENE  HOME  TREATMENT. 

derives  nerve  filaments  from  the  first,  second,  and  third  cer- 
vicals,  and  should  be  treated  in  the  same  way. 

NOTE  3. 

The  Kar  83.  Througli  the  second  and  fifth  cervical  nerves  the  ear 

is  reached,  and  may  be  treated  through  the  vasso-motor  cen- 
ters  of   the   upper   cervical   region   by   applying   nerve    food 
and  manipulating  here  and  around  the  ear  (par.  214). 
circvJatiou  84.  The  circulation  of  the  fluids  of  the  body  and  respira- 

-'""'     tion  are  also  controlled  through  the  great  vasso-motor  cen- 
Kespiration     ^^^^  q£  ^j^^  upper  ccrvicals,  and  may  be  treated  by  manipu- 
lating these  centers. 

NOTE   4. 

Tongue,  Back  85.  The   sccoud   and   third   and   a  branch   of   the    fourth 

Part  oi  Throat,  ccrvical  ucrvcs  control,  in  part,  the  upper  ends  of  the  mus- 
auces  ^i^g  ^£  ^1^^  back  of  the  neck  near  the  head,  the  tongue  and 
its  muscles,  the  back  part  of  the  throat,  and  the  fauces;  they 
also  send  some  fibers  to  the  pneumogastric,  the  great  cranial 
nerve  that  leads  to  the  lungs,  heart,  and  stomach.  Indica- 
tions of  disease  in  this  region  are  swelling,  pains,  stiffness 
of  the  muscles,  inability  to  turn  the  head  on  its  axis,  dull- 
ness of  hearing,  enlarged  and  sore  tonsils,  some  forms  of 
headache,  catarrh  of  the  nose  and  throat,  falling  hair,  and 
some  forms  of  muscular  derangements  of  the  eyes.  Apply 
Siamene  Nerve  Food  freely,  and  manipulate  gently  and 
thoroughly  until  all  tense  muscles  are  relaxed,  and  all  the 
forces  in  this  region  are  sfiinulafed  to  a  renewed  action. 
Headache  86.  Treat  first,  second,  third,   and   fourth  cervical  nerves 

for  headache,  also  gently  massage  and  vibrate  about  an  inch 
back  of  the  outer  corner  of  the  eye  and  over  the  inner  cor- 
ner and  the  superorbital  nerve  (par.  221),  first  applying 
Siamene   Nerve   Food. 

NOTE     5. 

Circulation  87.  Tlic    Sympathetic    vasso-motor    centers    control     the 

general  circulation  of  the  fluids  of  the  body.     Apply  Siamene 


NOTES    EXPLAINING    CHARTS     XOS.     I     AND    11.  33 

Nerve  Food,  and  treat  the  second,  third,  and  fourth,  and 
sometimes  as  low  as  the  seventh,  cervical  nerve  to  improve, 
not  only  the  circulation  of  the  head,  neck,  congestion  of  the 
brain  and  upper  extremities,  but  the  circulation  of  the  entire 
body. 

88.  Fever  of  any  kind,  especially  if  the  cause  is  found  in     p^^^'- 
the  upper  portion  of  the  body,  may  be  treated  at  the  second, 
third,  fourth,  and  fifth  cervicals.     If  the  fever  is  in  the  lower 

half  of  the  body,  apply  Siamene  Nerve  Food,  and  inhibit 
(see  "Inhibit,"  par.  148)  any  hard  and  contracted  muscles 
found  at  the  seventh,  eighth,  ninth,  and  tenth  dorsal,  as  well 
as  the  second,  third,  fourth  and  fifth  cervical  vertebrae. 

89.  Catarrh  of  the  head  and  falling  hair  may  be  treated      c.-ttarri, 
by  applying  Siamene  Nerve  Food  to  and  manipulating  from 

the  first  to  fifth  cervical  nerve,  also  manipulating  over  the 
lock  of  the  lower  jaw,  over  the  upper  and  inner  corners  of 
the  eye  (par.  221),  over  the  tear  duct  in  the  lower  and 
inner  corner  of  the  eye  (par.  220),  and  the  lower  portion 
of  the  prominence  of  the  cheek  bone  (par.  218).  Also  press 
firmly  on  the  bridge  of  the  nose  (par.  219).  Use  Siamene 
Catarrh    Cure. 

NOTE  6. 

90.  Diphtheria,  weak  voice,  and  all  other  throat  and  neck     Dipinhcrm 
diseases   may  be  treated  by  manipulating   from   the  first  to 

eighth  cervical  nerves,  giving  special  attention  to  any  tender, 
contracted  or  hard  muscle.  (See  "General  Treatment  of 
Neck,"  pars.  210,  211,  212,  213.) 

A  hard  and  contracted  muscle  pressing  upon  the  third, 
fourth,  and  fifth  cervical  nerves,  or  an  injured  or  misplaced 
bone  in  this  region,  may  produce  a  difficulty  in  deep  breath- 
ing, manifested  by  sighing  or  a  distressed  sensation,  as  though 
the  stomach  was  distended.  Treat  the  third,  fourth,  and 
fifth  cervical  nerves,  by  applying  Siamene  Nerve  Food  thor- 
oughly, and  manipulate  until  all  the  tender,  contracted,  hard, 
cord-like  muscles  are  relaxed,  and  relief  will  be  obtained. 


34  SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

91.  By  applying  Siamene  Xerve  Food  and  inhibiting 
(par.  148)  the  vasso-motor  centers,  second,  third,  fourth, 
and  fifth  cervical  nerves,  you  will  relieve  internal  congestion, 
permitting  the  blood  to  flow  freely  to  all  parts  of  the  body. 

NOTE  7. 

Cerebral  92.  To  iucrcase  the  cerebral  circulation,   first  apply  Sia- 

circuiatioii  nicue  Ncrve  Food  to  all  the  muscles  of  the  back  and  sides 
of  the  neck ;  place  the  patient  on  a  table  or  bed  on  the  back, 
letting  the  head  hang  over  the  edge;  place  the  fingers  of 
each  hand  over  the  jugular  vein  and  large  artery  at  the  sides 
of  the  windpipe  near  the  collar  bone,  pressing  gently  and 
firmly,  drawing  the  fingers  with  gentle  pressure  and  rapid 
motion  toward  the  angle  of  the  lower  jaw  the  full  length  of 
the  neck;  repeat  from  eight  to  ten  times. 

This  movement  forces  the  pure  blood  into  the  brain  and 
the  impure  blood  from  the  brain,  thereby  increasing  the 
cerebral  activity. 

This  treatment  is  required  when  the  cerebral  circulation 
is  weak,  memory  poor,  heart  action  feeble,  in  all  forms  of 
mental  trouble,  anemia  and  insomnia. 

In  all  case  of  this  kind  the  Siamene  Medicated  Sweat 
Bath  No.  I,  followed  by  cold  sitz  and  salt  glow,  must  be 
given  two  or  three  times  a  week  to  assist  in  equalizing  the 
circulation  and  carrying  off  the  impurities. 

NOTE  8. 

Muscles  of  93.  Through  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  dorsal  nerves 

the  Eye     wc  coutrol  the  musclcs  of  the  eye,   muscular  twitching,   in- 
flammations, and  contractions. 

At  the  second  dorsal  we  dilate  the  pupil  of  the  eye; 
at  the  third  dorsal  we  contract  the  pupil. 

Through  the  second,  sixth  and  seventh  cervical,  and  the 
first,  second,  third  and  fourth  dorsal,  nerves  we  treat  for 
impaired  vision  and  weak  eyes.  Besides  the  treatment  of 
these  nerves,  treat  back  of  the  outer  corners  of  the  eye,  and 


NOTES    EXPLAINING    CHARTS    NOS.     I    AND    II. 


35 


over  the  inner  corners,  the  terminal  nerves  of  that  section. 
Apply  Siamene  Movement  to  the  lids  (par.  185),  and  give 
general  treatment  of  the  neck. 


Heart 
Centers 


Palpitation 


NOTE   9. 

94.  Between  the  first  and  second  dorsal  vertebrae  is  the 
spinal  sympathetic  nerve  center  of  the  heart.  The  brain  cen- 
ter is  immediately  back  of  and  on  a  level  with  the  upper  part 
of  the  lower  third  of  the  lobe  of  the  ear.  This  part  of  the 
brain  constitutes  the  dynamo  that  runs  the  heart.  The  in- 
herent strength  of  the  heart,  in  its  normal  condition,  is  in- 
dicated by  the  size  and  convexity  of  the  brain  and  skull  in  this 
locality. 

You  may  measure  the  strength  of  the  heart  also  on 
the  face  by  the  prominence  of  the  chin.  A  projecting  chin 
indicates  a  strong  heart.  If  there  is  any  heart  trouble  in  a 
subject  with  a  projecting  chin,  you  may  expect  to  find  a 
tension  in  the  spinal  centers. 

95.  The  valves  of  the  heart  are  controlled  by  the  second 
and  fourth  dorsal  nerves.  In  heart  flutter,  or  palpitation, 
apply  Siamene  Xerve  Food,  and  treat  all  the  muscles  along 
the  upper  part  of  the  spine  from  the  first  to  sixth  dorsal ; 
you  may  find  muscular  contraction  sufficient  to  throw  a  rib 
out  of  its  normal  condition,  and  you  will  also  find  these 
muscles  tender  to  the  touch. 

96.  The  first  to  fourth  dorsal  nerves,  inclusive,  control 
the  regularity  and  the  strength  of  the  heart  beat  (par.  138). 
When  there  are  deep-seated  muscular  fibers  contracting  and 
making  pressure  on  one  or  more  of  these  nerves  influencing 
the  heart,  apply  Siamene  Nerve  Food  and  manipulate  to  relax 
the  tension, 

NOTE  10. 

97.  At  the  fourth  dorsal  vertebra  we  find  the  nerve  that     stomach 
controls  the  lower  end  (right  end)  of  the  stomach.     To  open 

it,  when  there  is  indigestion,  gases  or  colic,  apply  Siamene 


Heart 
Beat 


36 


SIAMEXE     HOME    TREATMENT. 


Nerve  Food  over  the  part  to  be  treated,  and  press  on  the 
fourth  dorsal  nerve,  or  any  contracted  muscle  near  by  that 
influences  the  nerves  that  supply  that  part,  and  let  the  undi- 
gested mass  pass  down.  When  the  stomach  is  weak  and 
digestion  poor,  you  will  find  contracted  muscles  on  one  or 
both  sides  of  the  spine,  from  the  fourth  to  eighth  dorsal  ver- 
tebrae ;  in  such  conditions,  relax  the  muscles  by  inhibiting,  and 
stimulate  these  nerve  centers  by  vibration  (par.  148),  to 
increase  the  digestive  powers  and  relieve  pain.  Inhibiting 
the  fourth  dorsal  opens  the  lower  opening  of  the  stomach ; 
stimulation  closes  it.  Inhibiting  here  will  sometimes  relieve 
sick  stomach. 

98.  We  control  the  upper  end   (left  end)   of  the  stomach 
through  the  fourth,  fifth,  sixth  and  seventh  dorsal  nerves  on 
the  left  side. 
Vomiting  99.  The  second  and  third  dorsals  are  the  centers  through 

which  we  control  vomiting. 

100.  To  inhibit,  make  pressure  on  the  contracted  muscles; 
to  stimulate,  vibrate  those  that  are  soft  and  relaxed  (par.  148). 

101.  For  speciiic  treatment  of  the  lower  end  of  the  stomach, 
apply  Siamene  Nerve  Food  and  manipulate  third  to  fifth 
dorsals  on  the  right  side. 

102.  For  general  treatment  of  the  stomach,  apply  Siamene 
Nerve  Food  from  the  third  to  the  eighth  dorsals  on  the  right 
and  left  sides,  and  manipulate. 

NOTE    II. 

Epigastric  ^^^-  ^^'hen  there  is  soreness,  contraction  or  hardness  of 

Region  the  skin  and  muscles  of  this  region  (over  the  stomach), 
apply  Siamene  Nerve  Food,  and  treat  the  fourth,  fifth  and 
sixth  dorsal  nerves,  and  give  general  treatment  (Chapter  X). 
These  nerves  carry  vasso-inhibitory  and  secretory  fibers  to 
the  stomach  and  small  intestines. 

NOTE   12. 
Solar  104.  The  solar  plexus,  called  the  abdominal  brain,  a  net- 

p/f.Yus     work  of  nerves  back  of  the  stomach  (Chart  No.  II,  No.  9), 


NOTES    EXPLAINIXG    CHARTS    NOS.    I    AND    II.  3/ 

controls  all  nutritive  processes,  and  presides  over  the  entire 
abdominal  region ;  its  center  is  the  sixth  dorsal.  It  is  made 
up  of  hbers  from  the  twelve  dorsals  and  the  great  cranial  or 
pneumogastric  nerve.  The  pnenmogastric  nerve  has  its  origin 
in  the  base  of  the  brain,  passing  down  the  neck  and  sending 
branches  into  the  plexus  that  supplies  the  heart,  lungs,  stom- 
ach, liver,  and  all  the  other  nutritive  organs.  At  the  fifth, 
sixth,  seventh  and  eighth  dorsals  we  control  the  large  artery 
of  the  lower  half  of  the  body. 

In  all  cases  of  trouble  in  any  of  the  abdominal  organs  it 
is  well  to  look  to  the  dorsal  nerves,  as  they  all  send  branches 
into  the  solar  plexus,  note  where  the  pressure  is,  and  re- 
move it. 

Disturbances  in  any  or  all  of  the  above-named  regions 
are  indicated  by  poor  circulation,  cold  spots,  pain,  soreness, 
and  tired  feeling  along  the  spine,  cold  around  the  stomach 
and  navel,  nervous  dyspepsia  and  constipation. 

NOTE  13. 

105.  The  nerve  centers  for  controlling  the  lungs  are  the     tiw  Lungs 
first  to   fourth  dorsals.     They  are  a.lso  influenced   from  the 

first  to  tenth,  inclusive.  Look  for  tender  and  contracted  mus- 
cles, and  disarranged  ribs,  which  may  produce  pressure  on 
any  of  the  intercostal  nerves.  The  lungs  may  be  affected  by 
depression  of  the  collar-bones  on  the  first  rib  (par.  225).  To 
treat  the  lungs,  apply  Siamene  Nerve  Food  to  the  dorsal  region 
and  inhibit  the  contracted  muscles  and  expand  the  chest  (par. 
227). 

NOTE    14. 

106.  At  the  seventh,  eighth  and  ninth  dorsals  (the  eighth     ncnt 
being  the  center)    we  control  chills,   congestions    (especially     «"^ 
from  the  liver)   and  abnormal  heat  of  the  body. 

Place  the  patient  on  the  face  and  press  hard  on  the  eighth 
dorsal.  If  desired  results  are  not  obtained,  use  Siamene  Pain 
Liniment  freely  and  vibrate  (slow,  circular  vibration). 

The  seventh,  eighth  and  ninth  dorsals  are  the  abdominal 
3 


Chills 


38 


SIAMENE    HOME    TREATMENT. 


Liver 

mi  (I 

Spleen 


centers.  Three-fourths  of  all  derangements  in  this  region 
arise  from  disturbances  of  these  nerves. 

NOTE   15. 

107.  For  the  liver,  treat  from  the  eighth  to  eleventh  dor- 
sal, on  the  right  side  of  the  spine.  Treat  the  same  nerves  on 
the  left  side  for  derangements  of  the  spleen.  Before  giving 
special  treatment  for  the  liver  and  spleen,  give  general  spinal 
treatment  (par.  230)  to  free  the  general  circulation.  Have 
the  patient  lie  on  the  back  with  feet  drawn  up  until  the  knees 
are  at  right  angles  with  the  body,  abdominal  muscles  relaxed. 
While  the  patient  takes  a  deep  inhalation,  lift  the  ribs  and 
remove  pressure  from  liver  and  spleen  (par.  228).  Then 
pinch,  squeeze  and  massage  the  liver  five  or  six  times. 

NOTE    16. 

Kidneys  108.  The  kiducys  are  influenced  at  the  sixth,  eleventh  and 

twelfth  dorsals,  the  first  and  second  lumbars,  also  the  first, 
second  and  third  cervicals,  and  over  the  lower  end  of  breast- 
bone (sternum).  Examine  these  points  and  treat  any  con- 
traction or  tenderness. 

NOTE   17. 

Bladder  109.  The  ucck  of  the  bladder  and  urethra  are  controlled 

from  the  second  lumbar  to  the  third  sacral,  inclusive.  For 
incontinence  of  urine  (bed-wetting),  see  par.  235. 


Vpper 
Bo  welys 


Lower 
Bowels 


NOTE     18. 

110.  To  tone  the  bowels  and  increase  their  action,  apply 
Siamene  Nerve  Food  and  treat  from  the  eighth  to  twelfth  dor- 
sal, inclusive.  Also,  treat  full  length  of  the  spine,  to  improve 
the  general  circulation  (par.  230). 

NOTE  19, 

111.  To  stimulate  the  lower  bowels,  apply  Siamene  Nerve 
Food  and  treat  the  fourth  and  fifth  lumbars,  inJiibiting  all 
contracted  muscles.  If  the  bowels  are  weak  and  prolapsed, 
with  an  inelastic  muscle  over  the  lumbar  region,  stimulate  by 


NOTES    EXPLAIXIXG    CHARTS    XOS.     I    AND    II.  39 

vibration.  This  treatment  is  appropriate  for  i)iles,  weak  bow- 
els, or  prolapsus.  Centers  for  diarrhoea,  eighth  to  tenth  dor- 
sal, third  and  fourth  lunil)ars  (treatment,  see  par,  238). 

NOTE    20. 

112.  For  appendicitis,  apply  Xerve  Food  and  treat  all  the     Appendicitis 
nerves  in  the  small  of  the  back,  on  both  sides  of  the  spine, 

giving  special  attention  to  the  eleventh  and  twelfth  dorsals 
and  first  and  second  lumbars  on  the  right  side. 

Manipulate  and  vibrate  (circular  vibration)  the  bowels 
gently,  yet  deeply,  on  the  right  side,  well  in,  and  along  the 
side  of  the  right  hip-bone.  Give  special  attention  to  the  re- 
laxation of  all  the  contracted  muscles  of  the  small  of  the  back. 

For  full,  detailed  instructions  of  how  to  treat  appendicitis, 
see  par.  361. 

113.  In  treatment  of  the  abdominal  viscera,  it  is  always 
beneficial  to  give  direct  treatment  to  the  abdomen,  in  addition 
to  specific  treatment,  paying  particular  attention  to  the  solar 
plexus.  This  has  the  effect  of  increasing  the  circulation  of 
the  blood,  and,  in  case  of  sluggishness  of  any  organ,  to  stim- 
ulate its  motion  and  secretion.  It  may  also  break  up  masses 
of  fecal  matter  lying  within  the  alimentary  canal. 

NOTE  21. 

114.  The  pelvic  cavity  is  the  space  within  the  boundary     p^iyic 
of  the  hip  bones;  it  constitutes  the  floor  of  the  abdominal     organs 
cavity  and  contains  all  of  the  internal  generative  organs,  a 
Cjuantity  of  loose  cellular  tissues,   the  rectum,   a  portion  of 

the  bowels,  the  pelvic  plexus  of  nerves,  and  blood-vessels.  All 
of  these  organs  and  tissues  are  reached  by  treating  the  sec- 
ond, third,  fourth  and  fifth  lumbar  nerves,  and  all  the 
sacral  nerves;  the  most  important,  however,  are  the  second 
and  third  lumbars. 

NOTE  22. 


Sciatic 


115.  The   fourth   and   fifth   lumbar   nerves   constitute   the 
great  sciatic  nerve  center  of  the  body.     Apply  vSiamene  Nerve     centers 


40 


SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 


Food  and  manipulate  all  the  contracted  muscles  until  the  ten- 
sion is  relaxed,  then  apply  Siamene  Rheumatic  Oil  once  in 
twelve  hours,  as  directed  on  the  bottle. 

NOTE  23. 

Generative  116.  All   di^eases   of  thcsc   organs   may  be  treated    from 

■orgMus     ^j^g  fourth  and  fifth  lumbars,  and  first,  second  and  third  sacrals. 


NOTE  24. 


Vterus 


Labor 


Testicles 

and 

Ovaries 


117.  Treat  the  second  and  third  cervicals,  eighth  and 
twelfth  dorsals,  and  from  second  to  fifth  lumbar,  relieving 
all  contracted  and  tender  muscles;  vibrate  (circular  vibration) 
abdomen  over  the  uterus  from  three  to  five  minutes. 

118.  We  control  labor  pains  on  the  sides  of  the  clitoris, 
at  the  second  and  third  lumbars  and  eighth  dorsal.  Do  not 
permit  the  patient  to  lie  down  until  the  pains  become  some- 
what severe;  when  the  operator  should  seat  himself  by  the 
bed,  place  the  hand  just  above  the  puhcs,  pressing  the  muscles 
gently  downward,  letting  the  first  and  second  fingers  rest  on 
either  side  and  over  the  clitoris,  making  a  gentle  and  steady 
pressure.  This  will  cause  the  circular  fibers  of  the  neck  of 
the  uterus  to  relax  and  stretch  with  but  little  pain.  This 
pressure  should  be  continued  until  the  neck  of  the  uterus  is 
fully  dilated.  Now  move  the  fingers  from  the  clitoris  and 
apply  a  strong  pressure  upon  either  side  of  the  spinous  proc- 
esses of  the  three  lower  lumbar  vertebrae.  Labor  w^ill  now 
proceed  rapidly,  and  with  but  little  pain,  until  the  uterus  is 
fully  dilated,  w^hen  tw^o  or  three  strong  pains  will  complete 
the  labor.  Do  not  use  Siamene  Nerve  Food  unless  the  patient 
is  very  thin  and  nervous  and  the  labor  unusually  painful  and 
tedious. 

NOTE  25. 

119.  Testicles,  spermatic  cord,  ovaries  and  fallopian  tubes 
are  influenced  by  applying  Siamene  Nerve  Food  and  treating 
the  eighth,  ninth,  tenth,  eleventh  and  twelfth  dorsals  and  all 


NOTES    EXPLAINING    CHARTS    NOS.     I    AND    II.  4I 

the  Innibars.  The  vagina  is  intUienced  by  the  fourth  sacral; 
inhibiting  relaxes,  stimulating  contracts    (par.    148). 

NOTE    26. 

120.  The  lifth  lumbar  and  the  first,  second  and  third  sac-     Rectum 
rals  control  the  rectum.     For  all  tissues  that  are  hard  and 

tense,  apply  Siamene  Nerve  Food,  and  manipulate.  When 
they  are  lax  and  soft,  they  should  be  stimulated  by  vibration. 
It  piles,  prolapsus  or  ulceration  exists,  oil  the  fingers  with 
carbolized  oil  and  introduce  first  finger  into  rectum,  grasp 
walls  of  rectum  with  finger  inside,  thumb  outside,  pressing  and 
manipulating  thoroughly  on  all  sides  to  excite  the  circulation. 
Following  this,  introduce  a  Siamene  Rectal  Suppository,  Al- 
ways take  a  large  warm-water  enema  before  treating.  Take 
these  treatments  at  night,  just  before  retiring  (pars.  236  and 
362). 

NOTE    27. 

121.  The   fifth    sacral   controls   the   levator   anal    muscles.      Anai 
It  also  controls  the  external  sphincter  muscles.     If  constipation     ^luscies 
exists,  with  a  difficulty  of  stooling,  there  is  a  contraction  of 

these  muscles  binding  the  walls  of  the  rectum  and  sphincter 
muscles.  Always  apply  Siamene  Nerve  Food  freely  and 
inhibit  all  tense  muscles  over  the  sacral  nerves,  once  a  day 
or  oftener. 

In  the  foregoing  we  have  endeavored  to  place  before  the 
niind  of  the  reader  a  "description  of  the  principal  nerve  centers 
that  influence  the  vital  organs  of  the  body,  and  to  tell  how 
to  treat  them  to  restore  their  normal  functions  when  there 
is  disease  of  any  kind  in  the  system. 

We  have  arranged  a  Reference  Column  which  is  in  har- 
mony with  the  several  divisions  of  the  back  bones  and  spinal 
sympathetic  nerves.  This  Reference  Column  has  all  the  fea- 
tures of  an  index,  and  serves  to  connect  Treating  Charts  Nos. 
I  and  II  and  the  notes  of  reference.  The  chapter  on  notes, 
and   the   Reference   Column,    truly   constitute   a   "inultiim   in 


42  SIAMEXE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

parvo,"  and  should  be  studied  and  mastered  by  every  one 
who  desires  to  apply  the  Siamene  Home  Treatment  in  the 
cure  of  disease. 

In  fact,  it  is  absolutely  essential  to  become  familiar  with 
the  information  set  forth  in  this  chapter  and  the  Reference 
Column,  in  order  to  know  what  organ  is  diseased  when  there 
is  an  abnormal  condition  of  a  nerve  center. 

We  have  learned  elsewhere  that  all  diseases  originate  in 
the  mind,  that  this  power  is  generated  in  the  brain,  and  is 
given  off  from  this  organ  through  the  spinal  cord  and  nerves ; 
that  there  are  governing  nerve  centers  along  the  spine  which 
give  off  small  branches  of  nerves  that  supply  all  the  organs 
and  tissues  of  the  body.  \\>  have  also  learned  that  diseased 
conditions  are  indicated  in  these  nerve  centers,  and  that,  by 
applying  mechanical  manipulations  to  them,  we  can  influence 
every  organ  of  the  body. 

To  make  the  Siamene  System  of  Home  Treatment  prac- 
tical and  useful,  these  lessons  must  be  mastered.  "Procrasti- 
nation is  the  thief  of  time."  Do  not  put  off  till  to-morrow 
what  should  be  done  to-day.  Do  not  wait  until  there  is  sick- 
ness in  the  house  to  begin  treatments.  Commence  the  studv 
of  the  Reference  Column  and  the  chapter  on  notes  immedi- 
ately, and  daily  practice  the  instructions  contained  therein, 
so  that,  when  called  upon,  or  occasion  requires,  you  are  pre- 
pared to  relieve  a  member  of  the  family  from  sickness  or  pain. 


Siamene  Treating  Chart  No.  111. 


Chapter  V. 

SIAMENE   TREATING   CHART   NO.    III. 

122.  This  chart  is  a  photographic  view  of  the  human  form, 
designed  to  illustrate  the  position  of  the  vertebra  of  the  human 
body  and  its  sectional  divisions  as  referred  to  in  Charts  Nos.  I 
and  II,  and  to  assist  the  reader  to  locate  them  on  the  body. 


45 


Chapter  VI. 


DESCRIPTION   OF   CHART   No.    IV.— ARM    AND    LEG. 

123.  This  chart  represents  the  arm  on  the  left  and  the  leg 
on  the  right  side,  with  the  skin  of  each  dissected,  leaving  the 
muscles  (B,  B),  nerves  (c)  and  arteries  (D)  exposed  to  view. 

124.  Tlic  Ann. — In  the  upper  portion  of  the  arm  is  rep- 
resented the  brachial  plexus  of  nerves  and  arteries  as  they 
pass  from  the  neck  and  chest  to  the  arm,  extending  downward. 

125.  The  Leg. — In  the  leg  is  represented  the  great  sciatic 
nerve  (C,  C)  and  the  accompanying  arteries  (D,  D),  running 
the  full  length  of  the  leg. 

This  nerve  supplies  nearly  the  whole  of  the  integument 
or  skin,  the  muscles  of  the  back  of  the  thigh,  and  those  of 
the  leg  and  foot.  It  is  the  largest  nervous  cord  in  the  body, 
and  is  the  continuation  of  the  lower  part  of  the  pelvic  plexus 
(par.  73).  It  descends  along  the  back  part  of  the  thigh  to 
about  its  lower  third,  where  it  divides  into  two  large  branches, 
the  internal  and  external,  and  they  pass  down  on  either  side 
of  the  calf  of  the  leg  to  the  foot.  This  is  the  nerve  that  is 
affected  in  sciatic  neuralgia. 


46 


Siamene 

Treating  Chart 

No.  IV. 


.K;^  r 


c».jf055« 


Chapter  VII. 

METHOD   OF    MAKING   AN   EXAMINATION. 

126.  As  we  deal,  in  the  main,  with  the  diseased  parts  of 
the  body,  and  not  so  much  with  the  names  of  diseases,  in  this 
system  of  Jionic  treat iiiciit,  a  thorough  examination  is  desir- 
able, in  all  cases,  to  ascertain  where,  in  the  body,  a  lesion 
may  be  found  that  will  obstruct  the  normal  blood  flow  and 
nerve  action. 

We  have  shown  you  elsewhere  that  the  normal  function 
of  all  the  body  organs  is  dependent  upon  the  perfect  action 
of  the  spinal  sympathetic  nerves  (pars.  lo,  ii,  17,  64,  76, 
127).  We  have  also  shown  where  the  central  stations  are, 
traced  them  to  their  terminals  (Reference  Column,  page  16), 
and  given  instructions  how  they  may  be  stimulated  to  increase 
activity,  or  inhibited  and  made  quiet  when  they  are  overactive 
(par.  148).  We  have  also  shown  that,  where  body  organs — 
for  instance,  the  stomach,  liver,  spleen,  bowels,  heart,  uterus, 
ovaries,  or  any  other  part  of  the  body — are  affected  from  any 
cause,  there  is  a  sympathetic  action  upon  the  spinal  sympa- 
thetic centers  along  the  spine,  and  that  this  condition  is  made 
manifest  by  soreness,  heat,  swelling,  pain  or  hardness  (par. 
129). 

It  is  presumed  that  the  reader  has  become  familiar  with 
Treating  Charts  Nos.  I,  II,  III  and  IV  before  he  makes  an 
examination,  for  a  knowledge  of  them  is  necessary  in  order 
to  become  familiar  with  the  body. 

That  the  mind  may  be  clear  in  every  step  taken  in  an 
examination,  it  would  be  well  to  review  the  treating  chart, 
or  at  least  some  of  its  leading  features  that  must  be  held  in 
mind. 

By  reference  to  Treating  Chart  No.  I  there  may  readily 
be  observed  the  relation  of  the  spines  of  the  back-bone   (F) 

49 


50  SIAMENE    HOME    TREATMENT. 

to  the  ribs  (G),  nerves  (c),  arteries  (d)  and  veins  (e)  on 
the  right  side;  also,  the  superficial  muscles  (B)  and  the  fine 
filaments  of  nerves,  arteries  and  veins  on  the  left  side.  These 
relations  should  be  frequently  referred  to,  until  the  image  of 
them  is  fixed  in  the  mind. 

There  should  be  a  perfect  familiarity  with  the  appearance 
of  Treating  Chart  No.  Ill,  in  order  to  have  an  understanding 
of  the  numbers  and  locations  of  the  spinal  bones  and  their 
corresponding  nerves  in  each  division  of  the  spinal  column; 
for,  by  having  this  familiarity,  you  can  more  easily  locate 
the  bones  and  nerves  on  the  back  of  a  person.  This  lesson 
once  learned,  the  hardest  task  is  accomplished  in  making  an 
examination  and  diagnosis. 

The  Reference  Column  may  always  be  referred  to  as  an 
assistant  in  making  a  diagnosis. 

Any  one  who  can  make  a  diagnosis  can  have  marvelous 
results  in  treating'. 
Serves  127.  The  spiual  sympatlietic  nerve  centers   (as  illustrated 

Control  in  Chart  No.  II,  s,  s)  control  directly  or  indirectly  every  organ 
and  tissue;  these  centers  along  the  spine  serve  as  an  index  to 
the  conditions  of  the  body ;  and,  as  the  body  and  mind  seem  to 
be  inseparable  in  life,  they  also  serve  as  a  part  of  the  index 
of  the  mind. 

128.  If  the  body  and  mind  are  in  a  harmonious  condition, 
there  is  always  health.  If  they  are  out  of  harmon}^,  they  are 
out  of  health. 

129.  In  making  an  examination,  it  should  be  made  with 
the  view  of  finding  the  contracted  and  hardened  muscles,  sore 
spots,  disarranged  bones,  heat  and  tenderness.  Some  one  or 
more  of  these  conditions  exist  in  every  case  where  there  is 
disease,  and,  as  a  result,  we  have  a  pressure  on  the  spinal 
sympathetic  centers  (Chart  No.  II)  and  a  corresponding  dis- 
turbance in  the  normal  blood  flow  to  a  part. 

Practice  Practicc  examining  healthy  and  unhealthy  backs,  in  com- 

parison with    Chart   No.    Ill,    to   become   familiar  with   the 
spinal  bones  and  their  corresponding  nerve  centers ;  also,  com- 


METHOD   OF    MAKIXG   AX    EXAMINATIOX.  5I 

pare  normal  u'ith  abiioniial  ct^iulitions.  so  that  you  can  more 
readily  recognize  the  one  from  the  other. 

Rememher.  here  is  your  index;  the  finger-board  to  guide 
you  in  diag)iosis. 

130.  In  all  instances  where  the  case  does  not  render  the 
cause  apparent,   the  spine  is  examined. 

First,  bare  the  back,  place  the  patient  on  the  face,  body  spinc 
straight,  arms  hanging  loosely  over  the  sides  of  the  table  or 
cot,  or  hands  resting  under  the  chin,  head  and  neck  perfectly 
straight  (see  Plate  No.  15).  In  this  position,  the  normal 
spine  should  be  perfectly  straight,  and  any  deviation  from 
a  straight  line  can  be  detected. 

With  the  patient  in  this  position,  examine  first  the  spine. 
Stand  at  the  head,  reach  down  to  the  wedge-bone  with  one 
hand,  and  place  the  first  and  third  fingers  on  either  side  of 
the  spine,  and,  the  second  finger  resting  thereon,  bring  the 
liand  to  the  first  bone  of  the  neck,  next  to  the  head ;  make 
sufficient  pressure  to  be  sure  if  there  is  a  curvature,  a  bone 
too  high,  too  low,  or  out  of  line.  The  spines  should  be  of 
equal  distance  apart,  and  the  same  height. 

Rarely  will  this  rule  fail,  unless  something  is  Avrong. 
When  there  is  a  deviation  caused  from  disease,  there  is 
tenderness. 

131.  INIake  a  note  of  all  abnormal  conditions.  If  there  is 
a  hard,  tense  muscle  bound  down  on  a  nerve  leading  to  a 
vital,  or  any  other,  organ,  the  function  of  that  organ  is  im- 
paired. Relieve  the  tension,  and  the  organ  will  set  up  re- 
newed activity. 

These  spinal  sympathetic  nerves  begin  with  the  first  bones 
of  the  neck  and  extend  the  full  length  of  the  spinal  column 
(pars.  60-61,  Chart  No.  II). 

132.  \Miile  the  patient  is  reclining  on  the  face,  begin  at     spine 
the  first  cervicals,  with  the  first  and  second  fingers  of  one 
hand  on  one  side  of  the  spines;  move  the  hand  downw^ard, 
slowly  and  studiously,  the  whole  length  of  the  spinal  column, 
observino-  all   the   hard   and   contracted   muscles   and   tender 


52  SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

places.  Be  careful  to  examine  between  the  spinal  bones,  as 
far  out  on  either  side  of  them  as  from  two  to  three  inches; 
make  note  of  all  abnormal  conditions. 

Hack  133.  Observe  the  temperature  of  the  entire  skin  of  the  back. 

See  if  there  are  hot  and  cold  spots,  in  which  case  you  will 
iind  contracted  muscles  somewhere  that  obstruct  the  circula- 
tion. Make  a  note  of  all  the  conditions  you  find  that  seem 
out  of  the  ordinary,  whether  on  the  skin,  under  the  skin,  on 
the  muscles  or  bones. 

Spine  134.  Examine   the   back   on   the   sides   of   the   spines   the 

second  time,  in  the  same  manner  as  before,  with  this  differ- 
ence :  Make  harder  and  deeper  pressure,  so  as  to  arrive  at 
the  second  and  third  layer  of  muscles.  We  sometimes  have 
a  tension  on  a  very  small  bundle  of  fibers  in  the  deep  layer 
of  muscles  on  the  back,  making-  a  pressure  on  a  small  nerve 
of  great  importance.  When  such  muscles  exist,  they  will 
vibrate  when  pressed  upon,  like  a  tense  cord. 

Kihs  135.  With  the  patient  in  the  same  position,  examine  the 

ribs  (after  the  muscles  and  spines  have  been  examined).  If 
in  a  normal  condition,  they  will  present  a  flat  and  even  sur- 
face to  the  hand,  and  w'ill  be  an  equal  distance  apart.  If  an 
edge  is  discovered  (turned  outward),  or  one  rib  pressing 
under  another,  or  too  much  space  between  them,  it  indicates 
a  pressure  upon  a  nerve  center,  causing  a  contraction  or  re- 
laxation of  the  muscles  supporting  the  ribs;  this,  in  turn, 
obstructs  the  blood  supply  to  some  organ,  wdiose  function  is 
thereby  impaired. 

Illustration:  If  there  is  a  fibroid  tumor,  or  prolapsus  of 
the  uterus,   making  tension   upon   the  broad   ligaments   and 
diaphragm,  the  ribs  will  be  found  too  far  apart. 
Floating  We  often  find  the  floating  ribs  turned  under  and  crowding 

^'6s     upon  the  adjacent  one,  creating  a  disturbance  in  the  circulation 

of  the  blood  to  the  ovaries  or  testicles,  kidneys  or  sciatic  nerves. 

Spine  136.  In   making  an  examination  of  the  spine,   we  often 

find   muscles   tender   to   the  touch,    of  which   the   patient   is 

wholly  unconscious,   and  upon  which  a  slight  pressure  will 


METHOD    OF    MAKING    AN    EXAMINATION.  53 

sometimes  cause  the  patient  great  pain.  Such  a  condition 
may  involve  an  important  nerve  center.  This  pressure  must 
lie  removed  before  the  patient  can  recover. 

137.  Place  the  patient  on  the  back,  have  the  body,  neck     -V''-''- 
and  limbs  perfectly  straight  and  thoroughly   relaxed ;  place 

the  fingers  of  each  hand  on  either  side  of  the  first  spine  of 
the  neck  next  to  the  head  (par.  210)  ;  examine  all  the  muscles 
and  bones  down  to  the  first  rib;  move  the  head  from  side  to 
side  on  the  shoulders,  to  see  if  the  joints  or  muscles  are  hard 
or  tender.  ]\Iake  a  note  of  all  abnormal  conditions.  An  ex- 
amination in  this  position  will  reveal  that  which  can  not  easily 
be  detected  with  the  face  down. 

In  all  diseases  of  the  head,  neck,  nose,  eyes,  mouth  and 
ears,  the  examination  should  be  made  in  this  position,  as 
well  as  the  opposite  one. 

138.  Examine  the  ribs  once  more,   front  side,  to  find,  if     ^''^^ 
possible,  any  abnormal  condition.     Examine  the  ribs  below 

the  end  of  the  breast-bone,  to  see  if  they  are  depressed,  or 
turned  in  on  the  stomach,  liver  or  spleen.  Sometimes  a  de- 
pression here  will  cause  liver,  spleen  and  stomach  trouble. 

The  pulse  should  always  be  examined  to  see  if  it  is  too  ^'"/••^' 
fast,  too  slow,  or  irregular  in  its  beat.  The  normal  beat  in 
a  man  is  full,  regular,  and  about  seventy-two  to  the  minute; 
in  a  woman,  if  she  is  thin  and  wiry,  it  is  from  four  to  six 
beats  faster.  When  there  is  irregularity  in  the  pulse  in  any 
way,  refer  to  the  treating  chart  and  notes,  to  find  the  location 
on  the  body  for  the  disturbances  that  produce  the  pressure 
(par.  96).  In  making  an  examination,  it  is  well  to  bear  in 
mind  one  thought,  and  that  is,  that  the  spinal  sympathetic 
nerves  along  the  spine  serve  as  our  index  to  the  zvhole  body. 

By  holding  this  thought  in  mind,  as  well  as  the  image 
of  the  treating  charts  of  the  nerves  and  blood-vessels,  we 
liave  a  perfect  guide  to  aid  us  in  treating  diseases. 

It  matters  not  whether  it  is  the  brain,  eye,  ear,  nose, 
throat,  heart,  lung,  stomach,  liver,  bowels,  or  any  other  part 


54  SIAMEXE     HOME     TREATMENT. 

of  the  body;  they  are  all  under  the  influence,  either  directly 
or  indirectly,  of  the  spinal  sympathetic  nerves. 

The  treating  charts    and  their  notes,  connected  with  the 
following  chapters,   direct  you   in   the   steps  to  be  taken   in 
treating  any  organ  of  the  body  after  the  examination  and 
diagnosis  are  made. 
xeck  139.  In  the  examination  always  give  very  careful  attention 

to  the  neck,  not  only  for  what  you  may  find  that  affects  the 
head,  face,  eyes,  nose,  mouth,  throat,  ears,  and  other  local 
points  of  this  region,  but  also  for  contracted  muscles  of  the 
neck  that  may  make  pressure  upon  some  of  the  important 
nerves  that  influence  the  stomach,  heart,  lungs,  arms,  or  some 
other  part  of  the  body.  Considerable  trouble  may  arise  from 
contracted  and  hard  muscles  of  the  neck. 
Diphtheria  l^O.  In    diphtheria,    the   greatest    fatality   comes    from    a 

swelling  of  the  glands  and  muscles  of  the  neck  making  pres- 
sure on  the  pneumogastric  and  the  cervical  spinal  sympathetics 
that  supply  the  vital  organs  of  the  body.  If  the  circulation 
of  the  blood  in  the  neck  is  kept  free  by  removing  the  pressure 
from  these  great  nerves,  there  will  be  many  more  lives  saved 
from  this  dreaded  disease. 


Chapter  VIII. 

temim:rami:nts  and  manipulations. 

141.  I'etore  the  student  can  intelligently  begin  mechanical 
manipulations  upon  the  living  tissue,  he  must,  to  some  extent, 
grasp  the  relation  of  the  faculties  of  the  mind  to  the  ana- 
tomical structure  and  physiological  functions  of  the  body, 
together  with  the  effects  of  the  disarrangements  caused  by 
the  violation  of  the  laws  of  life,  both  upon  mind  and  body. 

Life  is  maintained  by  a  constant  balance  between  the 
internal  and  external  forces,  and  repair  must  be  identical  with 
waste,  if  perfect  equilibrium  is  maintained.  It  is  because  of 
the  ignorance  of  this  vital  law  that  disease  and  death  prevail. 

The  power  to  heal  is  in  iMother  Nature  herself;  it  resides 
in  each  microscopic  cell  through  all  the  tissues  of  the  living 
body. 

\\'hen  any  part  of  the  body  is  diseased,  the  zvill,  also,  is  me  wni 
debilitated,  because  of  the  close  -interdependence  of  mind  and 
body,  and  the  little  cell  lacks  the  necessary  assistance  to  aid 
it  in  its  work  of  repair.  It  is  at  this  point  that  the  intelligent 
manipulator  can  unite  his  forces  to  the  inherent  forces  of  the 
patient  and  form  a  new  and  stronger  battery. 

142.  In  a  normal  condition  of  the  muscular  tissue  of  the     ,A/wsc/e,- 
body,  the  molecules  are  equidistant  from  each  other,  and  in 

active  life  they  are  in  constant,  harmonious,  rhythmical  motion; 
but,  through  the  violation  of  some  mental  or  physical  law, 
the  body  becomes  devitalized  and  negative,  the  nerve  centers 
become  demoralized,  and  there  is  a  tendency  to  cohesion  of 
the  molecules,  while  the  muscles  become  tense  and  contracted, 
producing  pressure  upon  the  nerves  and  general  prostration 
through  the  system. 

Through  the  medium  of  the  finger-tips  of  the  manipulator, 
mental  power  is  transmitted  to  the  patient. 

The  nerves  are  capable  of  transmitting  currents  of  elec-     \erves 
tricity.     This  electrical  force,  nerve  force,  radiates  from  the 

55 


56 


SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 


.brain  to  and  from  every  cell  in  the  body,  and  the  combined 
force  emanating  from  these  cells  has  a  sphere  of  influence, 
the  extent  of  which  corresponds  to  that  of  the  strength  of 
the  individual's  personal  character. 

Each  organ  of  sense  contains  a  nervous  mechanism 
adapted  to  receive  vibrations ;  hence  the  sense  of  touch  receives 
the  vibrations  of  the  mind  of  the  operator,  and,  quick  as 
thought,  it  is  carried  along  the  nerve-fibers  to  the  mind  of 
the  patient,  and  the  battery  so  formed  completes  its  work  of 
repair. 

When  the  patient,  in  his  weak,  devitalized  state,  seeks 
help,  the  manipulator  must  be  able  to  place  his  hand  upon 
the  contracted  muscles  and  so  apply  the  different  movements 
that  harmony  may  be  restored,  causing  the  obstructed  chan- 
nels to  open  and  permit  the  natural  flow  of  the  liquids,  gases, 
etc.,  to  the  insurance  of  perfect  health. 

143.  There  are  all  degrees  of  pressure  merging  into  one 
another;  hence,  in  the  manipulation  of  the  parts  affected,  there 
must  be  taken  into  consideration  the  lazv  of  pressure,  and  its 
area  of  distribution,  as  well  as  the  intensity  of  the  force 
applied.  One  law  of  pressure  is  heat.  Some  metals  can  be 
brought  to  a  white  heat  by  pressure.  So  the  contracted  mus- 
cles can,  by  proper  pressure,  distribute  a  heat  and  magnetism 
sufficient  to  soften  and  heal.  It  must,  however,  be  borne  in 
mind  that  the  muscles  of  different  individuals  require  different 
manipulations,  otherwise  the  molecular  power  may  be  changed 
and  the  equilibrium  of  the  body  so  disturbed  as  to  produce 
inflammation  and  destruction  of  the  part.  This  difTferentiation 
brings  us  to  the  next  important  point,  w4iich  must  be  thor- 
oughly understood  to  admit  of  intelligent  manipulation — /.  e., 
the  various  temperaments  of  different  people. 

TEMPERAMENTS. 


Leading  ^^^"  The  leading  temperaments   are   the   ^Motive.    ]\Iental 

Temperaments     and  Vital.     The  teuiperameuts  control  the  language  of  the 

muscle,   which  we  must  be  able  to  interpret  to  produce  the 


To  Inhibit 


Ti:.Mri:KAM i:\TS   and   .manipulations.  ^y 

(lesiretl  result.  Kvery  tissue  of  the  system  has  its  own  iuher- 
eut  capacity  and   ability  of  resistance. 

145.  The  lani^uaoe  of  the  nmscle,  as  before  im])lied,  is 
larg-ely  dependent  upon  the  temperament,  whether  tense,  soft, 
flexible  or  vibratory,  and  this  condition  must  be  carefully 
studied,  so  as  to  know  when  a  response  to  manipulation  is 
obtained. 

146.  A  healthy  muscle,  in  a  normal  condition,  is  neither 
too  hard  nor  too  soft.  ■  It  must  be  lirm,  elastic,  yieldino-,  and 
rebounding  when  pressure  is  applied. 

147.  \\'hen  a  muscle  is  hard,  tense,  cord-like  and  tender, 
it  is  in  an  abnormal  condition  and  will  make  ])ressure  on 
some  important  nerve,  obstructing  tlie  avenue  of  circulation. 
In  this  condition  it  should  be  inhibited  or  relaxed.  If  a 
muscle  is  too  soft  and  relaxed,  it.  also,  is  in  an  abnormal  con- 
dition, and  should  be  stimulated  by  vibration  (par.  148). 

148.  To  vibrate  a  muscle    (par.    179)    is  to  stimulate  it.. 
To  inhibit  a  muscle  is  to  relax  it,   by  making  pressure  on     cmri  to  vibrate 
the  muscle  to  influence  the  nerves  that  cause  the  contraction     -''  ^i»scie 

of  the  muscular  libers.  A'ibrating  and  inhibiting  are  accom- 
plished by  some  form  of  manipulation. 

To  vibrate  a  muscle,  give  rapid,  gentle,  rebounding  move- 
ments. The  more  rapid  the  manipulations,  the  higher  the 
degree  of  stimulation.  This  must  be  administered  according 
to  the  condition  of  the  muscle. 

To  inhibit  a  muscle,  give  a  slow*,  gentle,  yet  firm,  pressure, 
bearing  in  mind  that  the  pressure  is  not  made  steady  and 
continuously,  but  with  a  rhythm,  like  lireathing',  pressing  three- 
fifths  of  the  time  and  relaxing  two-fifths,  first  as  near  the 
1)elly  (middle)  of  the  muscle  as  you  can.  then  follow  up 
and  down  the  cord-like  contraction  until  the  origin  and  inser- 
tion is  reached,  and  make  firm  pressure.  When  a  muscle  is 
hard  and  tense,  it  will  yield,  and  become  soft  and  flexible, 
after  a  few  minutes'  gentle,  but  firm,  pressure  is  made  upon  it. 

149.  The   yielding  of  the   muscle   will   be   recognized   by     Avs-po/jse  to 
your   fingers   in   a   gradual   softening  and   relaxation   of  tne      rtcntment 

4 


SIAMEXE     HOME    TREATMENT. 


Influence  of 

l-'aculties 

over  Muscles 


Governing' 
Faculties 


Attitude 
of  Operator 


Method 
of  Touch 


tension.     \\'hen  a  muscle  relaxes,  cease  to  work  upon  it;  it 
has  responded  to  your  desire, 

150.  It  is  the  nature  of  some  faculties  to  furnish  resisting 
power  to  muscles.  For  instance,  the  faculty  of  combativeness 
presents  great  energy  and  power.  It  follows  that,  as  this  fac- 
ulty is  large  or  small,  so  will  the  different  muscles  correspond 
in  their  resisting  power.  In  the  same  ratio  must  the  power 
of  the  operator  be  put  forth,  both  mentally  and  physically,  to 
overcome  this  resistance;  and  it  is  at  this  point  that  you  wall 
perceive  the  temperament  of  your  patient,  and  learn  the  reason 
why  all  patients  can  not  be  treated  with  the  same  intensity  of 
power, 

THE    MOTIVE    TEMPERAMENT. 

151.  In  the  ]\Iotive  Temperament  the  bones  are  large  and 
broad,  the  muscles  full,  dense  and  strong,  the  cheek-bones 
high,  shoulders  broad,  chest  full  hair  strong,  coarse  and 
abundant,  expression  harsh  and  rigid,  voice  loud,  and  disposi- 
tion stubborn. 

This  temperament  is  governed  by  the  faculties  of  firmness, 
combativeness  and  destructiven^ss,  and  the  muscular  tissue 
of  the  body  corresponds  to  the  temperament  of  governing 
faculties. 

When  the  operator  approaches  a  patient  of  marked  Motive 
Temperament,  it  must  be  with  a  realization  of  the  power  nec- 
essary to  overcome  the  conditions  that  predominate,  not  only 
physically,  but  mentally.  A  person  of  the  Motive  Tempera- 
ment has  a  contempt  for  weakness,  and  profound  respect  for 
one  who  can  assert  his  superiority  over  him ;  hence,  the  opera- 
tor must  approach  with  a  conscious  dignity  and  self-assertion, 
entering  at  once  en  rapport  with  the  strong  physique  and  char- 
acter of  his  patient,  thereby  inspiring  him  with  confidence  in 
the  treatment  through  his  recognition  of  the  operator's  power 
to  overcome. 

The  treatment  of  the  ]\Iotive  Temperament  must  be  vig- 
orous and  forceful,  given  with  a  gentle,  rebounding  pressure 


TEMl'KUAMKXTS    AND    .M  A  X  IPL'LATIOXS. 


59 


and  positi\e  confKlence,  and  a  declaration  of  the  same  to  the 
mind  of  the  patient. 


THE    MKXTAT.   TEMPERAMENT. 

152.  In  the  Mental  Teni])eranient  the  frame  is  slio-ht,  the 
head  relatively  large,  the  forehead  high,  face  inclined  to  pale- 
ness, eyes  light  and  expressive,  features  delicate,  neck  slender, 
hair  soft  and  fine,  and  moral  emotions  keen. 

The  Mental  Tem])erament  is  governed  by  the  faculties  of 
causality,  ideality  and  spirituality. 

The  muscles  in  the  Mental  Temperament  are  wiry  and 
rebounding,  requiring  more  time  and  less  intensity  to  cause 
them  to  respond  to  treatment.  There  must  always  be  passiv- 
ity (pars.   158,  253)  on  the  part  of  the  patient. 

A  person  of  the  Mental  Temperament  will  demand,  by 
virtue  of  his  inherent  mental  poise,  a  gentle  touch,  careful 
and  respectful  manipulations,  while  the  thought  must  be  car- 
ried to  the  domain  of  mentality. 


(iovcrtiitif^ 
Facilities 

Nntiire  of  the 

Mental 

Te  111  pern  merit 


Attitude 
of  Operntor 


THE  VITAL   TEMPERAMENT. 

153.  The  Vital  Temperament  is  marked  by  breadth  and 
roundness  of  body.  The  chest  is  large,  abdomen  full,  neck 
short  and  thick,  features  smooth,  expression  mirthful,  active 
both  mentally  and  physically,  loves  amusement,  genial  in  dis- 
position, hopeful,  impulsive  and  versatile. 

The  Vital  Temperament  is  governed  by  the  faculties  of 
amativeness,  alimentiveness  and  vitativeness. 

The  functions  of  these  faculties  are  to  create  from  Nature's 
storehouse  the  nutritive  element,  the  life-principle  of  the  blood, 
from  which  to  build  the  body.  They  have  a  tendency  to  make 
a  soft,  flexible  muscle,  yielding  readily  to  treatment,  and  are 
quick  to  recover  eciuilibrium. 

The  same  law  of  rapport  holds  as  in  the  other  tempera- 
ments, but  the  method  of  approach  may  be  witli  more  freedom 
and  confidence. 


Governing 
Faculties 

Functions 
of  (governing 
Faculties 


Method 

of  Approach 


60  SIAMEXE     HOME    TREATMEXT. 

Silent  154.   When  you  are  treating,  do  not  allow  the  patient,  or 

Triittincnt  .',,-,y  Q,-,e  q]^q^  ^q  converse  with  you,  nor  should  you  converse 
willi  them.  Cause  the  patient's  mind  to  be  directed  to  what 
}^()U  are  doing,  and  do  not  permit  your  own  mind  to  dwell 
upon  any  subject  except  the  condition  of  the  patient  and  the 
results  you  desire  to  obtain  from  the  treatment. 

It  goes  without  saying  that  these  treatments,  to  achieve  the 
highest  degree  of  success,  should  be  given  in  silent  concen- 
tration and  perfect  passivity  (par,  253),  and,  in  severe  cases, 
with  deep  diaphragmatic  respirations;  and,  when  it  is  possible, 
breathe  in  correspondence  with  the  patient,  that  a  perfect  one- 
ness of  purpose  may  prevail. 
Mixed  155.  While  the  Motive,   ^Mental  and  \"ital  Temperaments 

Types  cover  a  large  majority  of  cases,  they  typify  the  extremes,  and 
there  are  innumerable  comljinations  with  a  vast  variety  of 
conditions  shading  into  and  out  of  the  leading  types,  all  of 
N\]iich  must  be  closely  observed  to  determine  the  proper  mode 
of  procedure. 
Pressure  156.  Wliatcvcr    thc    couclitious,    temperament    or    disease. 

Most  Important  ]g|  [^  jjg  home  in  miud  that  the  manner  of  pressure  (par.  143) 
has  an  important  influence  upon  the  part  to  be  treated,  as 
will  l)e  seen  in  the  description  of  the  following  movements. 

MAXIPULATIONS. 

157.  The  mechanical  luauipulafious  for  the  relief  of  physi- 
cal and  mental  derangements  are  produced  by  the  hands  for 
the  express  purpose  of  relieving  pressure  upon  the  nerves  and 
vessels,  thus  controlling  the  circulation  of  the  fluids  of  the 
body  (arteries,  veins  and  lymphatics).  These  various  manip- 
ulations are  not  only  for  the  relief  of  the  bound  and  fettered 
system,  unhappy  victims  of  misapplied  pathology,  misdirected 
thoughts  and  actions,  but  they  are  also  calculated  to  harmonize 
tlie  mind. 

It  is  perfectly  natural  that  there  should  be  a  means  of 
approaching  the  centers  of  life,  through  its  own  avenues,  with- 
out the  improper  use  of  drugs  as  is  usually  practiced. 


Factor 


TE.M  I'KKA  M  I-:.\  I'S    A  X  I )    .M  A  .\  1 1'l   LA  TK  )  XS. 


6 1 


Tlie  amount  of  life  is  measured  by  the  degree  of  the  vari- 
ety of  its  powers,  and  these  powers  are  augmented  by  the 
environments  and   advanced  thoughts  of  higher  civiHzation. 

Life  is  enlarged  and  enriched  by  its  ability  to  command. 
and  its  receptivity  to  the  most  advanced  means  of  cultivation. 

The  person  whose  only  resource  in  times  of  weakness  is 
drugs,  should  be  relegated  to  the  age  of  the  mail-coach,  when 
a  letter  was  weeks,  months,  and  even  a  year,  in  crossing  the 
continent ;  whereas  the  "twentieth  century  message"  flics  upon 
the  wings  of  the  subtle  ethers,  corresponding  to  the  instantane- 
ous relief  which  speeds  along  the  delicate  nerve  fibers  in  re- 
sponse to  the  cultured  touch  of  a  kind  and  loving  hand. 

There  are  thousands  of  these  sensitive,  delicate  fibers  per- 
meating the  skin,  a  cry  for  help,  pleading  consciously  or 
unconsciously. 

Reader,  is  there  a  symi)athetic  response  in  your  brain 
to  this  cry  for  help?  If  so,  you  have  the  power,  through  the 
fine  filaments  of  the  sensitive  nerves  of  the  pulpy  ends  of  your 
fingers  (m  which,  scientists  tell  us,  brain  matter  is  stored),  to 
relie\-e  both  mental  and  physical  suffering. 

158.  We  must  not  only  become  familiar  with  mechanical 
pressure,  but.  we  must  study  the  influence  of  the  mind  on  the 
body. 

\\'hen  the  mechanical  manipulations  are  made,  it  i^  highly 
important  that  there  should  be  harmonious  conditions  of 
mind  existing  between  operator  and  patient,  if  the  highest 
degree  of  success  is  obtained.  There  should  be  confident  ex- 
pectation of  relief  on  both  sides  simultaneously.  The  mind 
of  the  operator  should  be  divested  of  all  thoughts  except  those 
concerning  that  which  he  is  doing :  the  eradication  of  un- 
healthy states,  habits,  dispositions,  or  character,  and  the  l)ring- 
ing  about  of  such  healthy  conditions  as  will  build  up  the  lost 
function  of  the  parts  being  treated. 

159.  If  there  is  undue  tension  of  a  muscle  anywhere  in 
tlie  body,  it  may  make  pressure  on  an  important  nerve  Or 
tissue,  and  produce  an  obstruction  of  the  normal  blood  flow. 


Tlic  Alaisurc 
<>/    Lite 


l.ilc  liiilurucil 


Cfinipunuivc 
lirtjwtli 


A  venues 
of  Sense 

Inherent   Power 
in   the 
Finder  Tips 


Reciprocity 
between  Patient 
unci  Operator 


Obstruction 
to  the 
Blood  Flow 


62 


SIAMEXE     HOME    TREATMENT. 


Remove 
Pressure 


To  Free  the  To  free  tlic  circiilatioii  is  to  remove  the  pressure  on  nerves 

Circulation      [Jiat  coiitrol  the  blood-vessels  through  which  the  blood  is  cir- 
culated.    This  ]M-essure  may  be  from  a  contracted  and  hard 
muscle,    a   misplaced   bone,    a    misplaced   organ,    or    foreign 
growths. 
Control  of  160.  Furthermore,  it  must  be  remembered  that  the  blood- 

Biood-vesseis  yesscls  are  controlled  to  contract  or  relax,  to  work  hard  and 
fast,  or  slow  and  easy,  by  the  spinal  sympathetic  nerves,  whicli 
are  described  in  paragraphs  60  to  64  and  illustrated  in  Chart 
No.   II. 

161.  A  pressure  on  the  nerve  centers  or  nerve  filaments, 
whether  it  be  in  an  organ,  muscle  or  the  skin,  whether  due  to 
mechanical  disarrangements  of  the  bones,  or  gases  accumu- 
lating from  undue  activity  of  any  organ,  it  matters  not  what 
the  cause  may  be,  it  must  be  removed. 

Treat  the  governing  centers  on  either  side  of  the  spine 
and  relieve  the  pressure. 
Connecting  162.  ;\s  bcforc  Stated,  the  connecting  links  between  these 

Links  centers  and  the  internal  organs  are  the  fine  filaments  of  nerves 
permeating  the  skin  and  muscles.  These  avenues  enable  us 
to  come  in  direct  contact  with  the  centers  and  reach  all  the 
body  organs  by  mechanical  manipulations,  heat,  cold  and 
medicinal  agents. 
Fhysioiogicfti  163.  Experiments  have  been  made  by  many  of  our  leading 

Experiments  physiologists.  from  time  to  time,  of  the  effects  of  massage 
and  mechanical  manipulations  upon  the  muscular  tissue,  and 
the  following  results  have  been  obtained  : — 

First :  To  increase  the  flow  of  blood  to  muscles  and  vital 
organs,  thereby  increasing  the  circulation  and  removing  the 
accumulations  or  waste  tissue,  the  pressure  of  which  produces 
fermentation,  swelling  and  tenderness,  and  other  disturbances. 
Second :  To  strengthen  muscular  fiber  when  weak,  relaxed 
ov  impoverished. 

Third :  To  set  up  muscular  vibrations,  thereby  producing 
niolecular  changes  and  renewed  conditions  in  the  nerve  fibers 
and  vital  orQ-ans. 


TEMPERAMENTS    AND    M AXIPULATIOXS.  63 

Fourth :  To  cause  an  elimination  of  accumulated  matter 
in  the  liver,  spleen,  lungs,  glands,  muscles,  joints  and  cellular 
tissue,  breaking  up  adhesions  caused  by  inflammatory  proc- 
esses, such  as  gout,  rheumatism,  etc. 

Fifth :  To  increase  the  strength  of  blood,  giving  it  more 
building  power  by  hastening  the  action  of  the  heart. 

Sixth :  To  relieve  congestions,  inflammation  and  accumu- 
lations in  the  brain,  spinal  cord  and  internal  organs. 

Seventh :  To  stimulate  the  spinal  sympathetic  centers, 
thereby  promoting  a  general  tonic  action  upon  the  entire  phys- 
ical economy,  giving  relief  to  the  psychic  powers  that  have 
been  bound  and  fettered  by  unnatural  incumbrances. 

With  this  vast  array  of  observation  from  scientists,  the 
amateur  may  confidently  proceed  with  assurance  of  success. 

164.  The  patient  should  be  placed  in  a  comfortable  position     position  for 
for  examination,  and  treated  in  the  same  position,  carefully     Treatment 
screened  from  exposure.     The  hands  of  the  operator  should 

be  cleaned  and  well  manicured,  to  prevent  scratching  and  irri- 
tation. 

165.  In  manipulating  the  spinal  muscles,  you  should  bear     M,,nipuiation  of 
in  mind  that  the  delicate  skin  of  the  back  is  supplied  with  a     spinni  Muscles 
complex  system  of  fine,  spinal  sympathetic  nerves  that  consti- 
tute an  avenue  to  all  internal  organs,  and  very  heavy  manipu- 
lations are  npt  essential  in  all  cases. 

In  the  treatment  of  the  upper  portion  of  the  back  or  neck,      ^^^^^^^  M„scies 
a  combination  of  rolling  and  kneading  motion  is  made. 

In  the  dorsal  and  lumbar  regions,  there  may  be  a  squeez-     ^^^.^^  m„>cIcs 
ing  motion,  with  the  thumb  pressing  next  to  the  spine,  and 
the  fingers  two  or  three  inches  to  the  side,  bringing  thumb 
and  fingers  together  (see  Plate  No.  15). 

166.  The  pulpy  ball  of  the  thumb,  between  the  last  two     „,-,„ 
joints  next  to  the  wrist,  is  an  excellent  part  of  the  hand  to 
apply  to  the  surface  of  the  large  muscles  of  the  hips  when 
contracted  and  sensitive. 


64  SIAMKXE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

MECHANO-TIIERAPY. 

167.  Let  us  now  consider  the  classification  of  the  different 
mechanical  manipulations,  as  each  kind  has  its  own  function. 

CLASSIFICATION    OF    MANIPULATIONS. 

Most  of  the  terms  selected  to  descrihe  the  different  modes 
of  operation  are  old.  hut  useful.  The  Siamene  Movement, 
however,  is  a  discovery  of  the  writer. 

Pctrassagc.  Tapotiuent.  Effluragc.  Vibration.  Simncne 
Movement. 

PETRASSAGE. 

168.  Petrassage  is  expressed  by  pinching,  squeezing,  knead- 
ing or  pressing,  and  is  used  to  inhibit,  or  soften  and  relax, 
hard  and  contracted  muscles,  to  work  into  deep  structures  by 
massing  them  together.  All  Petrassage  movements  consist 
of  pressure  in  varying  degrees,  according  to  the  resistance 
to  be  overcome. 

Application  169.  Pctrassagc  can  be  applied  to  any  or  all  of  the  extrem- 

ities, or  trunk  of  the  body.  Its  primary  use  is  to  treat  the 
■  m_uscles  and  nerves  of  the  back.  The  pressure  must  be  diffu- 
sive in  its  motion,  rolling  slowly  and  steadily,  either  with  the 
ball  or  heel  of  the  thumb,  or  the  balls  of  the  fingers  (that  is, 
the  soft  part  just  below  the  first  joint).  Place  both  the  ball 
and  heel  of  the  thumb  close  to  the  spine,  and,  with  a  rolling 
pressure  of  the  thumb,  move  upward  and  outward,  meeting 
the  resisting  fingers,  and  so  on  the  entire  length  of  the  spine. 
Do  not  lift  the  hand  from  the  muscle,  but  move  it  over  the 
required  surface,  about  two  inches  at  a  time,  with  a  slow,  roll- 
ing motion ;  do  not  move  from  place  to  place  in  a  nervous 
manner. 
Various  Method-^  170.   Petrassagc  may  be  applied  variously — with  the  l)all 

of  Application  of  the  thumb,  the  ball  and  heel  of  the  thumb  combined,  the 
balls  of  the  fingers  and  heel  of  the  hand  combined,  or  the 
entire  hand  mav  be  thrown  into  action. 


TK.MI'ICUAMKXTS    AND    M  A  M  IT  I. A  1H  >.\S.  65 

171.  Let   tlie   movenients   and   pressure   in    Petrassaj^e  l)e     Kiiyuun 
rliythniical,  in  harmony  with  a  slow  respiration   (breathing),      '"  '''■'■"•'"''■ 
pressing-  three-fifths  and  relaxing  two-lifths  of  the  time.    This 

rest  gives  time  for  the  capillaries  acted  upon  to  till  with  new 
1)lood.  Always  be  careful  to  graduate  the  pressure  so  as 
not  to  give  pain  or  discomfort. 

In  treating  an   inflamed  muscle,   ner\e  or  joint,   let   the     .s-o.-t///;)- 
movement  be  soothing  and  calming.     (  Efflurage  ^lovement.)      Movcnuut 

If  you  have  a  contracted  muscle  that  is  not  inflamed, 
tiiough  tender,  pressure  \\ill  be  soothing. 

By  pressure  on  a  muscle  covering  a  given  nerve  you  in-     control  of 
fiuence  the  organ  to  which  the  trouble  may  be  traced  (par.  75).      the  orgim 

172.  Petrassage  is  made  more  use  of  than  all  otlier  move-     Especial 
ments  combined.     It  is  especially  applicable  when  the  muscles,     Application 
being  sore  and  contracted,  press  upon  the  nerves  that  supply 

them  or  that  pass  through  them  toward  some  vital  organ. 
There  are,  how'ever,  other  movements  from  which  better  re- 
sults are  derived  in  some  cases. 

TAPOTMENT. 

173.  Tapotment  consists  of  a  tap  or  stroke,  including  all 
concussion  movements.  It  is  applied  with  the  ends  of  the 
fingers,  with  the  heel  of  the  hand  while  tlie  hand  is  closed,  or 
with  the  heel  of  the  hand  and  the  little  finger  while  the  hand 
is  open. 

174.  The  heel  of  the  hand,  hard  closed,  is  used  for  heavy      vet/jod  ot 
muscles,  hips,  back  and  chest,  and  should  be  applied  with  a     AppUanion 
limber  w-rist,  light  and  rapid  strokes.     The  heel  of  the  hand 

and  little  finger,  hand  open,  wrist  limber,  and  rapid  strokes 
oi  a  hacking  nature,  is  well  suited  for  the  back,  liver,  abdo- 
men and  deep  muscles  and  nerves  of  the  hips  and  lower  limbs. 
When  this  is  applied  to  the  back,  it  should  be  used  up  and 
down  either  side  of  the  spines,  but  never  on  the  bones. 

In   giving   Tapotment   treatment,    always    hold   the   arms     posinou 
close  to  the  side  of  the  chest  and  work  from  the  elbows  and      of  Arms 


66  SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

wrists  down,  gi\ing  rapid,  short  strokes,  raising  the  hands 
not  more  than  two  or  three  inches  from  the  body. 

EFFLURAGE. 

175.  Efflurag-e,  or  surface  manipulation,  is  the  bringing 
of  the  epidermis,  or  thin  outside  skin,  of  the  pahn  of  the  hand 
and  fingers,  or  the  fingers,  in  contact  with  the  body,  with  the 
lightest  possible  touch — a  gentle,  light  and  brushing  move- 
ment, as  if  smoothing  the  fine,  downy  hair  of  the  skin.  The 
moment  there  is  pressure,  it  becomes  Petrassage. 
Appiicntian  176.  EfflurEgc  is  bcst  suited  for  treating  nervous,  irritable 

l)cople;  especially,  for  treating  the  scalp,  forehead,  face,  tem- 
ples, and  behind  the  ears.  Some  persons  are  more  hypnotic 
than  others,  hence  have  a  more  soothing  effect.  This  manipu- 
lation is  the  best  to  use  in  applying  mental  medicine  where 
manipulations  are  required  (par.  256). 

VIBRATION. 

177.  By  Mbration  we  change  the  condition  of  the  tissues 
so  as  to  increase  or  diminish  the  nerve  action  and  effect  the 
circulation  of  the  blood  to  a  part. 

All  forms  of  mechanical  manipulations  are.  in  a  sense, 
vibrative  in  nature.  Under  this  head,  however,  we  allude 
more  particularly  to  a  circular  motion  produced  by  one  or 
more  fingers  or  the  entire  hand. 

178.  There  are  two  wavs  of  making  circular  vibrations — 
fast  and  slow. 

s/ou-  vihrntion  The  slow  vibratious  are  made  by  placing  the  palm  of  the 

hand,  or  the  fingers,  over  the  part  to  be  treated.  ]\Iake  a  gentle 
and  firm  pressure,  with  a  rotary,  squeezing  motion;  make  a 
pressure  that  is  increasing  in  intensity,  going  over  the  entire 
part  to  be  treated.  If  you  are  treating  the  stomach  and  bow- 
els, ha^•e  the  patient  on  the  back,  knees  flexed  to  relax  the 
abdominal  muscles;  place  one  hand  over  the  navel  region, 
make  a  firm,  slow,  rotary  pressure.  Go  over  the  entire  abdo- 
men  in   this   manner,   working   from   the   center   outward   to 


TE.Ml'EKAM  ll.NTS    AND    M  A  N  I  ITLATIoXS. 


07 


Unpiil   \'it>r.'itif>n 


the  boundary  lines  of  the  abdomen.  If  it  is  the  back,  chest, 
hips,  legs,  or  any  other  portion  of  the  body,  vibrate  in  the 
same  general  way.  The  slow  vibrations  are  the  most  effective 
v\  here  there  are  sore,  stiff  and  contracted  muscles,  constipation, 
indigestion,  neuralgia,  rheumatism,  etc. 

179.  The  rapid  vibrations  are  used  to  stimulate  the  organs 
to  be  treated,  and  are  performed  in  the  following  manner : 
To  vibrate  with  the  entire  hand,  place  palm  of  the  hand  lightly 
upon  the  j^art  of  the  body  you  desire  to  stimulate.  IMaking 
no  pressure,  throw  the  hand  into  a  short,  fast,  circular  motion, 
using  only  the  forearm  and  hand.  Vibrate  with  a  loose  wrist 
and  elbow ;  let  there  be  no  straining  of  muscles  or  joints,  or 
results  will  not  be  obtained. 

\\'hen  this  movement  is  given  correctly,  the  part  of  the     Effects 
body  treated  is  thrown  into  a  gentle,  circular,  vibratory  ino- 
iioii,  extending  from  the  surface  down  into  the  deeper  struc- 
tures farther  than  any  other  form  of  manipulation. 

The  motion  must  be  circular,  not  to  and  fro,  to  send  the     r©  Reach  Deep. 
heat  vibrations    (which  are  always  of  a  warming,   soothing     'tented  organs 
sensation)  down  into  the  deep-seated  organs,  such  as  the  liver, 
stomach,  spleen,  uterus,  ovaries  and  lungs. 

180.  \'ibration  may  be  made  with  either  one  or  two  fingers. 
Place  the  ball  of  the  fingers  on  the  part  to  be  influenced,  let- 
ting the  hand  rest  on  th.e  third  and  fourth  fingers,  as  though 
writing;  let  the  hand  swing  on  these  fingers,  and  make  a 
short  and  rapid  circle  with  the  wrist  and  elbow. 

181.  To  give  this  manipulation  properly,  there  must  be  a 
fixed  purpose  in  the  mind,  a  concentration  of  ivill  on  the 
purpose,  and  an  absolutely  relaxed  condition  of  the  muscles 
of  the  arm  and  hand.  It  should  be  given  while  holding  a 
deep,  full,  abdominal  breath,  letting  the  thought  proceed  from 
the  solar  plexus,  carrying  the  breath  with  it  (par.  271),  to 
the  ends  of  the  fingers  or  the  palm  of  the  hand  that  is  in  use 
in  vibration. 


I'inger 
Vibrntion 


Coucetitratioti 


Petrassage 


68  SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

comhininjf  Will  182.  Too  iiuicli  slress  can  not  be  placed  upon  the  impor- 

an<i  lircntu     tancc  of  Combining"  the  passive  willing  and  breathing  with  the 

physical  vibration. 
Following  183.  \\'lien  this  movement  is  given,  it  should  follow  Pet- 

rassage  when  treating  the  spine,  lungs,  liver,  stomach,  uterus 
and  ovaries.  It  should  always  give  a  sense  of  relief  and 
warmth. 

SIAMENE   MOVEMENT. 

184,  Place  the  palms  of  the  hands  upon  the  surface  to  be 
treated,  allowing  the  points  of  the  ihumbs  to  touch  and  the 
points  of  the  first  two  fingers  to  touch  each  other;  grasp  the 
skin  in  a  fold  between  the  thumbs  and  fingers,  holding  the 
thumbs  firmly  against  the  fold  of  the  skin,  with  the  fingers 
as  the  resisting  power;  press  the  thumbs  forward,  making 
a  stepping  motion  alternately  with  the  first  and  second  fingers, 
in  the  meantime  holding  the  fold  up  as  first  grasped,  going- 
over  the  surface  with  a  thumb-sliding,  finger-creeping  motion. 
Siamene  Movement  may  be  given  with  one  hand  in  same  man- 
ner as  with  both  hands,  to  the  eyelids,  temples,  etc. 

185.  The  Siamene  Movement  is  one  of  the  best  manipula- 
tive movements  to  stimulate  the  vasso-motors  of  the  deep- 
seated  organs  of  the  body,  and  is  indicated  in  all  cases  where 
there  is  a  pale,  sallow  and  anemic  skin,  sluggish  bowels,  sof- 
tening of  the  muscles  and  weak  heart.  It  is  contra-indicated 
in  fevers  where  there  is  a  red  and  inflamed  skin,  fast  and 
hard  pulse. 

It  is  a  heart  tonic  as  well  as  a  stimulant. 


Chapter  IX. 

HOW  TO  Ari'Lv  si.\Mi:xi<:  xj<:r\'e  food. 

186.  Bare  the  back  and  take  the  same  position  as  for  ex-  //„>,  t,. 
amination  (par.  130).  Commence  at  the  neck  and  apply  appIv  n 
Xerve  Food  the  full  length  of  the  spine,  and  from  two  to 

three  inches  on  each  side,  rubbing  it  into  the  skin  and  muscles 
thoroughly,  tirst  with  a  downward  stroke,  then  laterally  from 
tlie  spine,  both  to  the  right  and  left. 

Manipulate  deeply,  slowly  and  firmly,  noting  all  the  tense,      M.-nuimuuum 
contracted  and  tender  muscles. 

If  any  are  found.  a]ii)ly  an  extra  amount  of  Nerve  Food 
and  press  quite  hard  on  them  with  the  heel  of  thumb  and  pulpy 
ends  of  the  fingers,  working",  pulling  and  squeezing  the  mus- 
cles gently  and  slowly,  exciting  the  skin  to  absorb  the  food, 
thereby  increasing  the  circulation  of  the  blood  to  the  part. 

Manipulate  as  in  "General  Treatment"   (par.   196). 

187.  The  food  should  be  applied  to  the  abdomen,  over  the     .\rr>iicntir>n  ta 
ovaries,   stomach,   liver,   bowels  and  uterus,   then  pinch,   pull      tiiv  Ahiumicn 
and   rub  the   skin   to   excite  the   circulation   to   absorb   more 

Xerve  Food  and  to  bring  new  life  and  A'igor  into  all  the  ab- 
dominal and  pelvic  organs. 

188.  Application  to  other  parts  of  the  body  is  made  in      wimt  As- 
like  manner.     Remember  that  when  you  thus  excite  the  cir-     Accom/.usiufi 
culation  of  the  skin,   you  accomplish  two  important  things; 

first,  you  give  vigor  to  the  nerves  and  stimulate  the  .organs 
to  a  renewed  activity ;  second,  you  promote  absorption  of 
Xerve  Food,  thereby  feeding  the'  starved  and  weakened  nerves. 

189.  Applying  Xerve  Food  in  this  way  to  the  vital  cen-     x.;ii,r.-ii  i-nnc 
ters  will  positively  work  its  way  into  the  diseased  parts  and 
give  themi  strength  to  perform  their  natural  functions. 

69 


tioiis  <>l   OrLr.ins 


70  SIAMENE    HOME    TREATMENT. 

Every  disease  the  human  body  is  heir  to  will  yield  to  the 
application  of  Siamene  Nerve  Food  and  mechanical  manipu- 
lations, if  applied  in  this  way  and  persevered  in. 

For,  as  has  been  stated  in  former  chapters,  all  diseases, 
directly  or  indirectly,  have  a  nervous  origin.  Mechanical 
manipulation  and  Siamene  Nerve  Food  strike  immediately  at 
tiie  nerve  centers,  liberating  the  obstructed  circulation  of  the 
blood  and  opening  all  the  channels  at  once. 


Chapter  X. 


GENERAL  TRE.ATMENT. 


190.  This  treatment  is  given  in  all  cases  where  there  is 
poor  circulation  of  the  blood,  nervousness,  insomnia,  general 
lassitude,  and  where  the  entire  system  has  become  involved 
in  disease.  A  nerve  center  may  have  a  contracted  and  hard- 
ened muscle,  or  a  misplaced  bone,  pressing  upon  it;  or  a 
muscle  may  have  lost  its  normal  tension  and  become  too  loose 
and  inelastic  from  pressure  at  some  distant  point.  One  or 
more  of  these  conditions  may  produce  a  general  stagnation 
of  the  fluids  of  the  body;  then  a  general  treatment  would  be 
necessary  to  equalize  the  circulation  of  the  blood. 

191.  First :  Prepare  a  suitable  place  upon  which  to  give 
the  treatment.  The  best  is  a  table  six  feet  long,  two  feet 
wide,  two  feet  two  inches  high  at  the  head  and  two  feet  at 
the  foot.  Boards  of  equal  proportion  as  the  table,  or  cot,  or 
bed,  if  solid,  will  answ'er. 

192.  Second  :  The  patient  should  be  divested  of  all  clothing 
and  wear  a  loose  robe.  Treatment  can  be  given  through  thin 
clothing,  but  not  satisfactorily. 

193.  Third :  The  patient  should  not  be  exposed  to  draught 
or  cold  during  or  after  treatment.  A  sheet,  or  some  light 
covering  should  be  spread  over  the  patient,  exposing  and  treat- 
ing one  part  of  the  body  at  a  time. 

194.  Fourth  :  All  treatment  should  be  given  in  a  slow,  gen- 
tle, thorough  and  careful  manner,  thus  giving  the  manipulated 
muscles  time  to  relax  (par.  171). 

A  little  experience  will  teach  you  the  nature  or  language 
of  the  muscles.     Experience  is  the  best  guide. 

195.  Fifth :  Place  the  patient  on  the  table  in  the  same  posi- 
tion as  in  making  an  examination,  face  down,  arms  hanging 
loosely  over  the  sides  of  the  table  or  at  right  angles  to  the 

71 


T  renting 
Table 


Preparation 
ot   Patient 


Exposure 


Careful 
Treatment 


Experience 


Position  for 
Treatment 


72  SIAMEXE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

body  with  the  hands  resting  under  the  chin,  and  the  body 
thoroughly  relaxed. 

Some  operators  like  the  patient  to  be  on  one  side,  which 
has  its  good  points;  but,  for  general  purposes,  the  position 
with  the  face  down  is  the  best. 

Treatment  may  be  given  in  a  sitting  posture. 
Treatwent  196.  Sixth  I  Apply  Siauieue  Nerve  Food  tlie  full  length  of 

oi  Spine  the  spine  and  from  two  to  three  inches  on  either  side.  Com- 
mence manipulating  on  one  side  of  the  upper  cervicals,  inhib- 
iting all  the  contracted  and  hard  muscles  by  deep,  slow  and 
gentle  manipulations  (Petrassage),  working  the  fingers  down 
between  the  spines  of  the  \ertebrc'e  and  close  up  to  them. 
Manipulate  the  muscles  as  though  you  were  working  them 
from  the  bones  outward  and  upward.  Move  the  hand  down 
one  or  two  inches  and  manipulate  as  before,  treating  the  en- 
tire spme  in  the  same  manner.  Apply  Siamene  Movement 
from  the  lower  sacrals  to  the  upper  cervicals  and  laterally  on 
both  sides  of  the  spine.  In  this  way  you  not  only  stimulate 
the  spinal  cord,  but  all  the  spinal  nerves  wdiich  send  branches 
to  every  part  of  the  body. 
Treatment  of  ^^'^ '  Se\enth  :  Commcuce    at    the    hands.    Petrassage    the 

Hands.  Arms      amis  to  the  shouldcr.     Roll  the  muscles  of  the  arm   in  the 
and  Shoulders     liauds,    commcucing   at    the   fingers,    and   work   toward   the 
shoulder. 

Grasp  wrist  with  one  hand,  each  finger  separately  with 
the  other,  flexing  all  the  joints  of  the  fingers  rapidly  eight  or 
ten  times. 

Grasp  the  arm  above  the  wrist  with  one  hand,  fingers  with 
the  other,  and  rotate  hand  on  wrist  five  or  six  times  and 
reverse. 

Grasp  the  arm  above  the  elbow  with  one  hand,  the  hand 
w^ith  the  other,  and  rotate  on  elbow  five  or  six  times  and 
reverse. 

Grasp  the  arm  near  the  shoulder  with  lioth  hands,  rotate 
the  shoulder  five  or  six  times  and  reverse.  Holding  the  arm 
in  this  manner,  raise  the  shoulder  as  high  as  it  will  go,  three 


I 


C.KXHRAL     IKKA  IMKNT 


"3 


TrvHtiutiit   ot 
Idlings,  Stonificli, 
I.iver  HUil  Rowels 


or  four  times.     Treat  the  opposite  shoulder  in  the  same  way. 
Stretcli  and  pull  the  arms  from  the  shoulder. 

198.  Eighth:  (iive  the  lower  extremities  the  same  treat-      rrc/,tment 
luent  as  the  arms.     Flex  the  toes  the  same  as  the  fingers.     Flex      "^  ^'^a's 
the  leg  on  the  thigh,  and  the  thigh  on  the  abdomen.     Bring 
ir  as  far  down  l)y  the  side  of  the  body  as  it  will  bear  without 
pain,  extending  the  limb  again  with  some  force. 

199.  Ninth:  TMace  the  patient  on  the  back,  and  treat  the 
bowels  with  a  mo\ement  similar  to  kneading  bread,  first  apply- 
ing Siamene  Xerve  Food,  (live  the  lungs,  stomach,  liver  and 
bowels  from  tw(^  t<^  three  minutes'  circulatory  vibration. 

200.  Tenth:    Place    one    hand    under    the   chin,    the   other      TrcHtmeiu 
under  the  back  of  the  head,  and  make  gentle  tension  on  the     '^  •^"'''' 
head  and  neck,  sufficient  to  slightly  move  the  body  (see  Plate 

Xo.  3). 

201.  Eleyenth :  Place    the    patient    on    the    back,    body     naishif.'  nnd 
straight;  stand  at  the  head;  grasp  the  wrists,  requesting  the     t^owenn^  the 
patient  to  take  full,  upper  chest  inhalation  (see  par.  273).    As 
he  inhales,   draw   the  arms  tightly  above  the  head,   holding 
them  while  he  holds  the  breath.     As  he  exhales,  lower  the  arms 

until  the  elbows  reach  the  side  of  the  body.     Repeat  this  four 
to  six  times. 

202.  Pressure  upon   any  one  nerve  center  should  not  be     Duration  ot 
prolonged  more  than  one  to  five  minutes  at  a  time.  Pressure 

203.  The  general  treatment,  when  well  given,  will  stimu-      EHect 
late  all   the  nerve  centers,   thereby  improving  the  action  of 

the  heart,  lungs,  stomach,  liver,  bowels,  all  the  generative 
organs,  and  give  renewed  vigor  to  all  the  glands  of  the  !)ody. 
The  treating  of  a  muscle,  an  organ,  or  any  part  of  the 
body,  .has  a  signification  tliat  means  more  than  mechanical 
law.  A  muscle  is  composed  of  a  multiple  of  cells.  These 
cells  are  endowed  with  metabolistic  power,  the  power  of 
growth  and  the  reproducing  of  themselves.  This  power  is 
mind.  Mind.  then,  is  the  life  of  tiie  cell.  The  multiple  life 
of  the  cell  is  the  life  of  the  bodv. 


Arms  with  Kes- 
jjirntioti 


74  SIAMENE     PIOME    TREATMENT. 

To  direct  the  mind  into  healthy  channels  is  to  promote  cell 
life  and  growth.  To  direct  the  mind  into  imhealthy  channels 
is  to  favor  disintegration  of  cell  power.  Therefore,  when  you 
seek  to  cure  a  person  by  manipulative  treatment,  the  act  has 
a  greater  signification  than  the  mere  mechanical  movements 
of  the  finger-tips  upon  the  skin,  muscles  and  nerves  to  be 
influenced.  It  means  that  there  is  a  communication  between 
the  soul  of  the  operator  and  the  subconscious  mind  of  the 
patient.  Therefore,  in  every  instance  where  one  person  is 
treating  another  by  mechanical  movements  and  the  application 
of  external  remedies,  the  operator  should  bear  in  mind  that 
the  proper  state  of  the  subject  should  be  passivity,  and.  in 
turn,  the  operator  should  be  sufficiently  passive  (par.  253)  to 
concentrate  his  mind,  and  gently,  softly  and  firmly  apply  the 
manipulations ;  zvill,  in  unison  with  the  manipulation,  that 
which  is  most  desired  to  take  place — flic  creation  of  cell  poiver 
in  the  pJiysical  body. 

204.  In  the  treatment  of  children  and  ft'e])le  people,  the 
operator  should  always  begin  with  a  gentle  touch,  gradually 
increasing  the  pressure  as  his  judgment  dictates  and  the  sen- 
sation of  the  patient  tolerates. 

Should  the  treatment,  in  any  case,  be  given  too  \-iolently 
at  first,  the  muscles  of  the  patient  are  liable  to  become  sore. 
In  such  cases  the  patient  ma}-  become  discouraged,  but  such 
should  not  be.  On  the  other  hand,  wait  patiently  until  the 
soreness  has  passed  off,  for  the  second  treatment,  and  the 
results  will  be  good. 
Local  ^^^'   ^^  ^^^^  treatment  is  for  any  local  pain,  contraction  or 

Treatment  sorcucss,  locatc  tlic  Icsiou,  apply  Xer\e  Food,  and  inhibit 
the  contraction  thoroughly.  If  there  is  lack  of  contractile 
power — that  is,  if  the  muscles  are  too  soft  and  loose — stimu- 
late the  part  by  rapid  vibration  (see  par.  148)  and  manipulate 
all  the  tissues  in  its  radius  that  are  in  any  way  sensitive,  thus 
removing  all  pressure  and  freeing  the  circulation  to  and  from 
the  part. 


GMMcuAL  tki:atmi:nt.  y-^ 

206.  Acute  cases  should  have  Hght  treatment  once  in  every      u,;<<-  c.-iscs 
lour  to  six  hours,  according-  to  the  case,  and  the  treatment 

should  n()t  be  continued  longer  than  ten  or  hfteen  minutes, 
and  never  li^ng  enough  to  produce  soreness. 

207.  Chri^nic  cases  require  longer  treatment,  usually  from     ciimnic  cnsi-s 
fifteen  lo  thirty  minutes,  especially  if  a  general  treatment  is 

given  as  well  as  a  local.  Chronic  cases  require  treatment 
e\'ery  day.  or  every  other  da)-,  accortling  to  the  sensitiveness 
of  the  skin  and  muscles. 

208.  The  general  application  of  the  principles  herein  set     Heip  tor  the 
forth  will  meet  the  long-felt  want  of  the  general  public,  espe-     -i/ot/iers 
cially   the   mothers   who   are   raising   their    families   of   little 
children. 

209.  The  manipulative  treatment  should  be  given  to  preg-     caution  nuh 
nant  women  with  great  care  and  gentleness,  if  given  at  all;     Regard  to 
and,  under  no  circumstances,  should  any  of  the  movements     Pregnancy 
be  given  her  that  stretch  the  muscles  of  the  l)ack,  chest  and 

arms  above  the  head.  Pregnant  mothers  will  find  good  re- 
sults from  the  hydropathic  department  of  this  system,  and 
also  from  the  breathing  exercises. 

The  reader  will  find  detailed  instruction  on  how  to  apply 
treatment  to  specific  i)arts  in  the  other  chapters. 

It  would  require  many  large  volumes  to  detail  every  treat-      The  people  do 
ment  that  may  be  given  foi*  the  entire  body.     Such  a  work     -^ot  want 
would  not  be  what  the  busy  people  want,  or  could  make  use     lengthy  Details 
of.      So   there  niust  be  a   certain   amount   of  judgment   and 
discretion  exercised  bv  the  reader  in  treating-. 


Chapter  XI. 

PLATES  AND  NOTES  ON  AIO\^EMENTS. 
PLATE  NO.   I. 

GENERAL    TREATMENT    OF    NECK. 

210.  With  the  patient  on  his  back,  on  a  table  or  bed,  with 
neck  freed  from  clothing,  eyes  closed  and  muscles  relaxed, 
say  something  to  him  that  will  establish  his  faith  that  the 
treatment  will  be  easy,  comfortable  and  beneficial.  Place 
the  fingers  of  both  hands  on  either  side  of  the  spine  of  the 
vertebrae,  close  up  to  the  head  and  near  together,  touching 
the  spine.  Make  gentle,  but  deep,  pressure  outward  from 
the  spine,  drawing  the  fingers  toward  the  head.  Move  the 
fingers  down  the  spine  one  inch,  and  proceed  as  before.  ]\Iove 
down  the  entire  length  of  the  neck,  and  as  far  as  the  fourth 
dorsal,  in  like  manner.  The  pressure  must  be  gentle,  thorough 
and  deep.  This  manipulation  is  designed  to  relax  all  con- 
tracted muscles,  stimulate  those  that  are  too  lax  and  start  up 
the  latent  forces  of  the  sympathetic  nerves. 


76 


PLAT]-:  XO.  2. 

GENERAL  TREATMENT  OF  NECK  (CONTINUED). 

211.  First :  Place  the  heel  of  each  hand  above  and  a  little 
back  of  the  ears,  the  thumbs  in  front  of  the  ears,  last  fingers 
resting  on  back  of  neck  near  spinous  processes  of  the  vertebr?e, 
first  finger  extending  down  the  neck  from  the  ear.  Roll  the 
head  from  one  side  to  the  (Uher  five  or  six  times,  make  a 
slight  extension  while  the  movement  is  being  conducted. 

Second :  Move  the  head  from  side  to  side,  letting  the  hand 
from  which  the  head  has  been  passed  touch  the  head  lightly, 
if  at  all.  giving  the  head  a  tossing  motion.  The  object  of 
this  movement  is  to  further  loosen  the  articulation  of  the 
bones  and  start  up  the  circulation  of  the  fluids  from  the  neck 
to  the  head. 


79 


PLATE  NO.  3. 

GENERAL    TKEATMEXT    OF    XHCK     (  COXTIX  L'ED)  . 

212.  T^lace  one  hand  under  tlie  head,  the  first  two  fingers 
on  one  side,  the  last  two  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  spinous 
processes  of  the  vertel^rcC,  close  up  to  the  head ;  the  other 
under  the  chin. 

Pull  easily,  firmly  and  steadil}-.  in  a  direct  line  with  the 
loody,  until  you  can  perceive  the  patient's  body  move  slightly; 
let  slack  about  one-half  that  tension,  draw  the  head  as  far  to 
the  right  as  you  can,  then  to  the  left,  then  to  an  angle  of 
thirty-five  degrees  to  the  left,  the  same  for  the  right,  front 
and  back  muscles. 

Draw  the  patient  toward  you  until  the  head  will  hang 
over  the  end  of  the  table.  Idien  raise  the  head  from  the  back 
and  press  the  chin  on  the  l)reast.  carrying  it  as  far  backwards. 
The  object  of  this  moxement  is  to  stretch  the  ^•ertel)ra?  and 
the  muscles  of  the  neck.  Raise  the  collar-bone  and  the  first 
two  ribs,  thereby  further  freeing  and  stimulating  the  circula- 
tion of  the  fluids  in  the  neck  and  to  the  brain. 

This  treatment  is  one  of  the  best  to  relieve  spinal  and  cere- 
bral congestion,  all  kinds  of  soreness  and  stiffness  in  the  neck, 
rheumatism,  neuralgia,  and  all  forms  of  brain  and  head  troub- 
les. It  relieves  the  tension,  and  opens  the  dams,  and  permits 
the  rivers  of  life  to  flow  f  reel  v. 


80 


d 

"A 

w 

H 
< 


PLATE  XO.  4. 

GENERAL    TREATMEXT    OF    NECK     (  CONTINI-ED)  . 

213.  ^\'ith  tlie  pnlp}'  jxirtion  oi  the  fingers  applied  on 
either  side  of  the  first  si)ines  of  the  cervical  vertebrae,  the 
thumbs  on  the  muscles  on  the  side  of  the  neck,  pull  pinch, 
knead  and  stretch  the  muscles  up  and  down  the  full  length 
of  the  neck,  giving  them  a  gentle  shake  for  several  moments. 


83 


PLATE  NO.  5. 

IREATMEXT    FOR    THE    EAR. 

214.  Grasp  an  ear  with  each  liand,  and  move  them  upward 
and  downward  quite  strongly.  Idien  ])ull  them  out  at  right 
angles  to  the  head,  making  strong  tensioii  for  a  moment ; 
lastly,  place  the  second  and  third  fingers  in  front  of  the  open- 
ings of  the  ear  and  give  circular  vil)ration  for  one  minute. 
If  there  is  tenderness  of  the  nerves  and  skin  around  the  ear, 
efflurage  it.  These  movements  must  not  be  made  strong 
enough  to  give  pain.  This  treatment  s'.iould  be  given  in 
internal  ear  troubles  and  cases  of  hardness  of  hearing,  after 
the  general  treatment  of  the  neck  to  free  the  circulation. 


84 


rLATi:  XU.  6a. 

VIP.KATIOX     OF    Tl'.Ml'I.KS    AXi)    FORK  I  [  RAD. 

215.  l-'irst.  with  the  pulps  of  ihe  ling-ers  over  the  temples, 
thumbs  resting"  on  the  forehead,  xihrate  (par.  177)  tor  two 
or  three  minutes;  seeond.  mo\  e  the  fingers  to  the  forehead, 
and  vibrate  the  same  length  of  time;  third,  give  EHIurage 
movement  over  temples  and  forehead  with  the  palms  of  the 
hands. 

This  treatment  should  be  given  for  weak  vision,  inllam- 
mation  of  the  eyes,  for  d?feeti\e  speech  in  some  forms  of 
paralysis,  for  the  alcoholic  and  tobacco  habits,  as  the  brain 
imderlying"  the  temple  is  the  portion  involved,  inHamcd  and 
congested  in  these  habits.  1die  freeing  of  the  circulation  and 
stimulating  of  the  brain  in  this  region  gives  health  and  resist- 
ing power  to  overcome  the  habit. 

SIAMEXE  MOVEMENT  TO  TEMPLES  AXD  FOREHEAD. 

216.  Applv  Siamene  AIo\ement  (par.  184)  over  temples 
and  foreiiead  until  the  skin  is  pinkish  red, 

This  mo\-ement  should  be  given  in  suj)erorl)ital  neuralgia, 
neuralgia  r)f  the  temples,  to  remove  wrinkles  in  premature 
old  age.  and  where  there  are  yellow  blotches  on  the  forehead 
from  sluo"-ish  Wvev. 


PLATE  NO.  6b. 

PETRASSAGING    TEMPLES    AND    FOREHEAD. 

217.  Gently  manipulate  (par.  i68).  over  the  inner  corners 
of  the  eyes,  the  superorbital  ner\-e,  with  the  pulpy  ends  of 
the  fingers.  This  treatment  is  found  l^eneficial  in  eve  strain, 
defective  vision,  neuralgia  of  the  eyes,  and  all  forms  of  in- 
tlammation  of  the  parts,  and  should  be  preceded  bv  a  thorough 
general  treatment  of  the  neck,  to  equalize  the  circulation  to 
all  the  i)arts. 


88 


PLAT1<:  XO.  7 A. 

TREATMENT    OF    THE    NOSE. 

218.  Place  the  palmer  surface  of  the  thunihs  on  either 
side  of  the  nose  near  the  hridge,  pressing-  with  a  downward 
and  outward  stroke.  I'Aery  alternate  stroke,  bring'  the  thumbs 
around,  outward  and  under  the  projecting  bone  of  the  cheek. 
Every  other  stroke,  end  on  the  sides  of  the  nose  below  tlie 
cartilage  with  a  pressing,   grinding  motion. 

This  treatment  is  recommended  for  nasal  catarrh,  some 
forms  of  headache  and  toothache  involving  the  teeth  of  the 
upper  jaw. 


91 


PLATE  NO.   7B. 

TREATMENT    OF    THE    NOSE     (CONTINUED). 

219.  Place  the  pulpy  part  of  the  thumb  on  the  bridge  of 
the  nose,  press  once  quite  hard ;  that  is,  hard  enough  to  pro- 
duce a  slight  discomfort.  This  treatment  is  given  in  catarrh 
of  the  nose,  acute  inflammations,  etc. 

TREATMENT   FOR  LACHRYMAL   SAC    (tEAR  DUCT). 

220.  Put  the  thumbs  or  index  fingers  of  both  hands  on 
either  side  of  the  nose  over  the  inner  corner  of  the  eve.  They 
Avill  rest  on  the  lachrymal  sac  ( tear  sac ) .  iVIake  gentle  pres- 
sure, then  draw  them  downward  along  the  line  of  the  nose 
adjoining  the  cheek-bone.  Alake  this  movement  five  to  ten 
times,  then  place  the  pulpy  portion  of  the  first  or  second  finger 
on  the  sac  and  give  rotary  vibration,  eight  or  ten  times. 


92 


d 
2; 


PLATE  XO.  8. 

TREATMENT    OF    SLPERORBITAL    XERVE. 

221.  Place  the  palmer  surface  of  the  thumb  ou  either  side 
of  the  bridg-e  of  the  nose,  press  gently  and  jlrmly  u])\vard  and 
outward,  crossing  over  the  eyelids  just  o\-er  a  small  notch  in 
the  bone  which  can  be  felt  under  the  eyebrows ;  bring  them 
up  over  the  forehead,  so  when  the  scalp  is  reached  they  will 
be  al)out  three  inches  apart. 

This  stimulates  and  frees  the  circulation  of  the  superorbi- 
tal  nerve.  This  nerve  sends  liranches  to  the  eye.  forehead 
and  nose.     !Make  this  movement  fi\'e  to  ten  times. 


«J5 


PLATE  NO.  9. 

TREATMENT  FOR  SPREADING  AND  STIMULATING  NOSTRILS. 

222.  Introduce  the  foreting'er  of  each  hand  into  the  nos- 
trils, placing  the  thumbs  on  the  outside  wings  of  the  nose; 
jiress  the  fingers  in  as  far  as  the  size  of  the  nostrils  will  per- 
mit, grasping  the  wings  with  the  thumbs  and  fingers,  pulling 
down,  then  up,  stimulating  thoroughly  all  the  mucous  mem- 
brane of  the  nose  and  stretching  the  openings.  This  is  an 
excellent  treatment  for  catarrh  of  the  nose,  and  shotild  be 
repeated  not  oftener  than  once  in  two  days. 


96 


i 


PLA  TK  XO.   lo. 

TRKAT.MKXr    OF    TlIK    r.ACK    MUSCLES    OF    T 1 1 F    XFCK. 

223.  I'lace  one  hand  on  the  forehead,  the  other  over  the 
neck,  lettinj^-  the  tin^-ers  reach  under  the  liack  of  the  neck, 
ends  of  the  fingers  touching  tlie  spine:  press  gently  and  deeply, 
pulling  the  muscles  from  the  spine  and  upward.  INIove  the 
hand  downward  until  all  the  muscles  are  treated  as  far  down 
as  the  third  dorsal  vertebra. 

^^'hile  pulling  and  jM-essing  the  muscles  away  from  the 
spine,  roll  the  head  to  and  fro  with  the  opposite  hand,  as 
seems  best  to  relieve  the  tension  of  the  mtiscles.  I^reat  the 
other  side  in  like  manner. 

TO    STIMULATE   THE   VASSO-MOTOR    CENTERS    WHERE   GEN- 
ERAL   CIRCULATION    IS    POOR. 

224.  \\ith  the  patient  on  the  back,  stand  at  the  side  of 
the  head,  place  the  fingers  of  one  hand  on  the  muscles  of 
the  back  of  the  neck  close  to  the  spine,  the  other  hand  on 
the  forehead,  to  steady  or  roll  it,  as  desired  ;  relax  all  of  the 
contracted  and  stimulate  all  of  the  relaxed  muscles.  These 
centers  should  be  treated  to  control  fevers  affecting  the  chest, 
neck,  face,  head  and  arms. 


99 


PLATE  NO.   1 1  A. 


RATSIXG    THE    CLAXICLE. 


225.  With  the  patient  on  tlie  side  or  back,  elbow  flexed 
across  the  chest,  grasp  the  arm  at  the  elbow  with  one  hand, 
the  fingers  of  the  other  under  the  collar-bone  with  the  back 
of  the  fingers  to  the  neck ;  press  upon  the  elbow  and  pull 
out  on  the  collar-bone;  pull  gently,  avoid  giving  pain,  as  the 
soft  parts  are  sensitive. 

This  treatment  should  be  gi\en  every  other  day  in  asthma 
and  early  stages  of  consumption,  where  the  front  muscles  of 
the  neck  have  contracted  and  drawn  the  collar-bone  down 
on  the  nerves  and  vessels  of  the  neck  leading  to  and  from 
the  head. 


PLATE  XO.   it: 


ROTATION"    OF    THE    SHOULDER. 


226.  Patient  in  the  saine  position  as  the  preceding,  the 
operator  with  the  left  hand  on  the  point  of  the  shoulder,  the 
right  hand  on  the  elbow;  rotate  the  shoulder  from  1)ack\vard 
to  forward  in  a  circular  motion. 

This  treatment  may  be  given  in  asthma,  consumption, 
mastitis,  cancer  of  the  breast,  and  where  the  muscles  of  the 
chest  and  shoulders  are  diseased. 


103 


PLATI-:  XU.    12. 


EXPANSION    OF     rilK    CHEST. 


227.  Tlie  patient  lyini^-  on  tlie  hack,  <.>-rasp  the  left  wrist, 
\\  hich  is  l)y  the  side,  with  one  h.'ind  ;  place  tiie  lingers  of  the 
other  hand  near  the  spines  of  the  hack-hor.e,  hetween  the  first 
and  second  rihs.  Have  the  patient  take  a  deep  inspiration 
(par.  273)  while  hrinoino"  the  arm  steadily  upward,  outward 
and  hackward  to  a  position  over  tlie  head,  using  the  arm 
as  a  lever  and  the  ends  of  the  hngers  of  the  right  hand  as 
a  fulcrum,  to  raise  the  ribs.  Hold  the  arm  strongly  and 
firmly  abox'e  the  head  a  few  seconds  while  the  patient  is 
holding  his  breath. 

Now  gradually  and  slowly  return  the  arni  to  the  side  by 
bringing  it  around  over  the  face  and  chest  while  the  patient 
is  exhaling.  Wdiile  the  arm  is  being  returned  and  the  pa- 
tient is  exhaling,  press  upward  and  outward  on  the  first  rib 
with  the  fingers  that  are  fixed  on  the  back. 

Move  the  hand  down  one  rib  and  proceed  as  before,  and 
so  on  until  all  the  ribs  are  raised.  Treat  the  other  side  in 
like  manner.  H  there  is  an  assistant,  place  him  on  the  other 
side  of  the  patient  and  treat  both  sides  at  the  same  time. 

This  is  one  of  the  best  mo\ements  for  de\eloping"  the 
l^ust,  strengthening  the  circulation  through  the  lungs  and 
increasing  the  heart  power.  It  removes  pressure  from  be- 
tw-een  the  ribs  and  the  intercostal  nerves  and  muscles  that 
sometimes  causes  asthma,  consumption,  heart  disease,  stomach 
and  li\-er  trouble.  This  movement  stimulates  the  circulation 
in  the  arms,  shoulders  and  muscles  of  the  shoulder  blades. 

It  is  a  g(^od  treatment  to  make  one  well  when  sick,  and 
equallv  as  good  to  keep  one  in  a  ])erfect  state  of  health.  It 
is  ecjualed  onlv  bv  the  physical  culture  mox'ements  for  the 
chest. 


104 


PLATi:  XO.    13. 

RAISlXc;   THE   FRONT   ENDS  OF  RIBS   AND   STRETCHING  THE 
DIAPHRAGM. 

228.  Place  the  patient  on  the  back,  flex  the  knees,  hands 
by  the  sides,  muscles  relaxed;  stand  at  the  patient's  right  side; 
place  the  thumbs  under  the  ends  of  the  ribs  of  left  side,  fingers 
over  them.  Have  the  patient  take  a  deep,  long  abdominal 
mspiration  (par.  274).  As  he  exhales,  press  upward  and  out- 
ward with  the  thumbs,  drawing  the  ribs  up.  Treat  the  oppo- 
site side  in  like  manner.  Raise  the  ribs  two  to  five  times 
at  each  treatment.  This  treatment  should  be  given  in  all 
cases  where  the  front  ends  of  the  ribs  are  turned  in;  this 
condition  is  often  found  in  stomach,  liver  and  spleen  troubles. 

When  there  are  adhesions  of  the  liver  and  stomach  to  the 
diaphragm  caused  by  chronic  inflammation,  this  treatment 
will  be  somewhat  painful,  and  should  be  given  very  carefully 
and  gently  at  first. 


107 


PLATE  NO.    14. 


EXPANSION    OF    UPPER    CHEST. 


229.  Seat  the  patient  on  a  stool,  with  his  hands  locked 
behind  his  neck ;  stand  before  him.  place  your  hands  on 
either  side  of  the  upper  dorsal  A'ertebra,  fingers  close  to  the 
spine;  press  down  firmly  while  the  patient  breathes  deeply 
(par.  273)  ;  as  he  exhales,  draw  upward  and  outward  on  the 
muscles  and  back  ends  of  the  ribs.  Move  the  hands  down  one 
inch  and  repeat  as  before,  and  so  on  until  all  the  spines  and 
muscles  of  the  dorsal  region  are  treated. 

This  treatment  is  given  to  expand  the  upper  chest  and 
stimulate  the  spinal  circulation  where  the  l.eart  and  lungs 
are  weak  and  cough  is  present. 


loS 


PLATE    NO.     14.        EXPANSION    OF     UPPER    CHEST. 


rLATl".   XO.    13. 

GENERAL    Sl'IXAL    TKKAIMKNT    OF    ALE    THE    SPINAL 
SV-MI'ATIIETICS. 

230.  The  patient  on  the  tal)le,  face  down,  all  the  nuiscles 
relaxed;  niassai^e  all  the  nuiscles  from  the  head  to  the  end 
of  the  spine,  commencing"  on  one  side  of  the  upper  part  of 
the  neck,  making-  the  tingers  the  lixed  point,  drawing  the 
muscles  to  this  point  with  the  thumbs,  manipulating  close 
to  the  spine  and  out  between  the  ribs.  I'l'ess  and  s(|ueeze  all 
hard  and  contracted  nuiscles  with  the  heel  of  the  hand,  gently 
l)inching  and  pulling"  them.  Massage  the  opposite  side  in 
like  manner.  After  the  hard  and  cc^ntracted  muscles  are  sof- 
tened and  relaxed,  give  Efflurage  (par.  175)  manipulation 
over  the  entire  spine  and  back,  making  a  downward,  outward 
and  circular  stroke  from  the  si)ines  laterally,  with  an  o])cn, 
"loving"  hand. 

\\'hen  this  treatment  is  given  in  asthma,  tuberculosis,  con- 
tracted chests  and  cold  in  the  chest  and  lungs,  where  the  ribs 
are  depressed,  it  should  be  followed  by  the  treatment  in  par. 
227. 

This  treatment  is  given  before  most  all  local  treatments, 
as  it  tones  up  the  entire  nervous  system  and  frees  the  general 
circulation,  thereby  liberating"  any  contraction  that  may  be 
in  sym]jathy  with  the  diseased  organ.  It  is  a  very  effective 
and  beneficial  treatment  to  give  one  who  's  fatigued  trom  a 
day's  work. 

BROXCHIAL    TUBES. 

231.  When  the  bronchial  tubes  are  affected,  the  general 
si)inal  treatment  (  par.  230)  and  expansion  of  the  chest  treat- 
ment ( i)ar.  227)  should  be  gixen.  after  which,  three  to  five 
minutes'  circuhir  \ibration  should  be  gi\-en  o\-er  the  affected 
tube. 


PLATE  NO.   1 6. 


ADJUSTMENT    OF    THE    RIBS. 


232.  The  patient  on  the  left  side,  the  operator  in  front  of 
the  patient  with  the  right  hand  by  the  sides  of  the  spines 
over  the  last  four  ribs,  the  left  four  fingers  under  the  edge 
of  the  ribs  in  front.  While  the  hands  are  in  this  position, 
have  the  patient  inhale  deeply.  As  he  exhales,  pull  forward 
and  upward  with  the  right  hand,  and  push  backward  and 
upward  with  the  left  hand,  in  such  a  manner  as  to  cause  the 
two  forces  to  oppose  each  other.  While  the  hands  are  still 
in  this  position,  give  sudden  pressures  in  succession  with 
the  right  hand,  bringing  the  force  against  the  left  in  front. 


CN 


> 

a 


PLATI-:   \(). 


TRKATMKXT    (tF     1' 1 1  K     rilROAP. 


233.  riic  ]);iliciU  rccliniiiL;'  mi  a  cot,  or  sittin,!4'  nii  a  chair, 
with  the  head  throw  n  1)ackwai'(l.  the  iiKuith  wide  (i])en.  ()])era- 
ti»r  staiKhn^i^"  at  tlie  head  of  the  patient  with  one  hand  resting' 
iiiuler  the  back  of  the  head,  in  order  to  steady  or  to  raise  it. 
The  first  finger  or  tlninih  of  lite  other  hand  l)eins;"  well  cleansed 
and  manicured,  introduce  it  _ii,"entl_\'  into  the  mouth,  runniuiL;- 
it  arotind  the  roof,  then  o\-er  the  arch  or  soft  ])alate,  makin|L;" 
a  circular,  squeezing-  pressure. 

l.et  the  patient  rest  a  minute,  then  run  the  fino-ers  down 
on  the  t(tnsils:  sfpieeze  and  ])ress  them  to  free  the  circulation. 
Then  turn  the  pulpy  i)art  of  the  finger  or  tlntm!)  to  the  hack 
of  the  throat  and  press  it  in  like  luanner.  Lastly,  run  the 
thumb  or  linger  up  into  the  arch  of  the  roof,  in  the  back  ])art 
of  the  nose,  press  and  scpteeze  quite  hard,  to  stinuilate  the 
circulation  in  all  these  parts.  This  treatment  should  be  gi\en 
after  some  form  of  neck  treatment,  for  jjost-nasal  catarrh, 
enlarg'etl  and  swollen  tonsils,  diphtheria,  ])haryngitis,  (|ninsy, 
etc.     It  is  followed  by  positively  good  results. 

T  hax'e  often  cured  severe  cases  of  (piinsy  in  one  treatment. 
\\'h\-  will  it  cure? — Because  it  frees  the  circttlation  to  the 
parts  and  permits  the  congested  blood  to  flow  from  it  and 
the  inire  blood  to  enter. 


JM.ATi-:  XO.   1 8. 


KIDNEY    TRIvATM  KXT. 


234.  After  gixing-  g-eneral  s])inal  treatment  (  par.  230)  to 
reliexe  all  tension  upon  the  organs  that  may  sympathize  with 
the  kidneys,  and  patient  is  still  reclining  face  downward,  mus- 
cles relaxed,  operator  standing  by  the  side  of  the  table,  place 
one  hand  over  the  eighth,  ninth  and  tenth  dorsal  vertebrre, 
gras])  one  ankle  with  the  other,  making  extension  on  the  leg 
.sufficiently  strong  to  keep  it  straight;  raise  the  leg  as  far  up 
as  the  patient  can  bear  without  pain,  pressing  downward  on 
the  back  with  the  other  hand.  Move  the  hand  down  the  back 
a  hand's  breadth,  and  repeat  the  same  operation  five  or  six 
cimes.  If  the  patient  is  very  large,  the  operator  should  have 
an  assistant  to  raise  the  limb  for  him.  Repeat  the  moxement 
with  the  opposite  limb  in  like  manner. 

BED-WETTING    (NOCTURNAL  INCONTINENCE  OF   URINE). 

235.  I'his  treatment  is  very  much  the  same  as  the  pre- 
ceding. For  incontinence  of  urine,  place  the  resisting  hand 
on  the  wedge-bone,  instead  of  over  the  kidneys,  and  press 
harder  on  the  wedge-bone  than  over  the  kidneys. 

In  treating  inr  bed-wetting,  if  the  patient  is  an  adult, 
])lace  on  the  fioor  and  stand  between  the  feet,  grasp  the  ankles, 
place  one  foot  on  the  wedge-bone  and  raise  the  feet  as  high 
as  the  patient  can  endiux,  pressing  on  the  wedge-bone.  Re- 
peat this  motion  three  or  four  times  every  other  day. 


116 


c> 


'L  WE    XO.    !(;, 


TkKA'rMKNT    OF    Ki:rTrM. 


236.  lla\c  the  i)aticnt  take  a  warm  cncnia.  (iivc  the 
oeneral  spinal  trcaliiKMit  ( i)ar.  J^cM.  t<'  c(|uali/.c  tlic  torccs 
ill  all  the  spinal  centers.  This  will  i.;ive  a  buoyancy  and  in- 
creased force  to  ail  i)arts  of  the  body.  Turn  the  patient  >  mi 
the  left  side,  with  the  limbs  drawn  ni).  senn-t1exed  on  the 
abdomen,  and  all  the  muscles  relaxed.  (  )pL'rator  standini( 
at  the  patient's  hips,  with  hrst  two  tinkers  and  thumb  well 
oiled,  introduce  the  hrst  hnoer  well  nj)  into  the  rectum:  intro- 
duce it  slow  ly  and  ^ently  :  when  well  up.  give  it  a  sweej)  all 
around  the  inside;  give  two  or  three  sweeps  of  this  kind, 
stimulating  the  mucous  surfaces  thoroughly.  At  the  last 
sweep,  let  the  hnger  rest  at  the  l)ack  of  the  rectum,  with  the 
thumb  on  the  tail-bone  (coccyx)  on  the  outside;  ])ress  the 
parts  together  with  the  thuml)  and  finger  in  this  ]){)sition.  and 
vou  will  stimulate  the  nerve  centers  behind  the  rectum:  also, 
the  superficial  nerves,  with  the  thumb.  While  in  this  ])osi- 
tion,  manii^ulate  all  around  on  the  inside  with  the  finger. 
Use  about  the  same  gentle  pressure  with  the  finger  that  is  in 
the  rectum  that  yt^u  would  if  you  were  maifipulating  a  mellow- 
apple,  when  vou  desire  to  make  it  more  mellow  without  break- 
ing the  skin.  If  a  pWe  is  encountered,  which  will  teel  like  a 
tTesh\'  Inm]),  sometimes  smooth  and  semi-soft,  sometimes 
rough  and  gristlv  hard,  get  it  under  the  finger.  ])rcss  and 
knead  it  gently  (the  hard  ])ile  should  b.'  ])ressed  harder  than 
the  soft  pile)  :  this  will  stimulate  the  walls  of  the  ])ile  and 
cause  them  to  contract  and  heal.  Lastly,  turn  the  back  of 
the  finger  to  the  front  of  the  rectum,  press  it  forward,  and 
introduce  the  thumb  by  the  side  of  the  finger;  when  well  in. 
spread  the  thumb  and  finger  and  expand  the  rectum  as  far 
as  vou  can  stretch  it.  This  will  give  some  ])ain,  but  the 
patient  must  endure  it.  as  it  will  cease  as  soon  as  the  fingers 
are    withdrawn.      This    di\nl<ii)n    is    excellent    to    bring    the 

119 


1)1<)0(1  and  stren^ili  tn  these  parts.  These  treatments  to  the 
rectum  should  not  Ije  gi\en  oftener  than  once  in  five  days. 
The  external  treatment  to  the  nerves  over  the  wedge-bone, 
and  genera]  treatment  followed  by  Tapotment  (hacking) 
treatment  over  these  parts,  should  be  given  every  other  dav. 
This  treatment  may  be  g'i\-en  in  all  diseases  of  the  rectum. 
])iles.  etc. 


PLATE  NO.   20. 

TREATMENT   OF   THE   BACK    BONES. 

237.  Straighten  the  spine,  operator  at  the  side  of  the  pa- 
tient, with  one  thumb  on  the  side  of  the  first  spine  of  the 
back  (dorsal),  the  other  thumb  on  the  opposite  side  of  second 
spine,  or  the  one  immediatel}'  below  the  first,  making  pres- 
sure at  the  same  time  on  the  two  spines  in  opposite  directions. 
Move  the  thumbs  down  one  spine,  the  lower  tbumb  to  tlie 
third  spine  and  the  upper  one  to  the  second  spine,  and  press 
as  before.  By  so  doing,  each  spine  is  driven  in  opposite 
directions,  thereby  moving  and  stimulating  the  ligaments 
lietween  the  joints  and  removing  pressure  that  may  be  caused 
by  a  slight  slip  of  the  joint  occasioned  by  any  violence,  or 
steady  and  gentle  contracti(Mi  of  the  spinal  muscles.  This 
i:-  an  excellent  treatment  to  give  to  the  spine  after  general 
treatment,  in  cases  of  spinal  anemia,  poor  circulation,  weak 
heart  and  p.'U'alvsis. 


I'LA  ri':  xo.  21. 

TRKATMKXT     FOR     I  )l  ARK  1 1  l'.  A     AND     IM.I    X. 

238.  l'"irst  :  With  the  patient  on  the  face  or  side,  inliihit 
the  hinihar  and  lower  dorsal  muscles,  which  are  invariably 
contracted  and  tender,  in  cases  of  this  kind,  ttntil  they  are 
thoroui^'hly  relaxed. 

Second:  Press  i^'ently  and  tirnily  on  the  tenth,  elexenth 
and  twelfth  dorsal  verte])r;e.  two  or  three  niinntes,  payini^' 
particular   attention   to   any   tender   s|)ine. 

'Idiird  :  Turn  the  patient  on  the  back  and  sli])  the  fnigers 
imder  the  small  of  the  back  under  the  last  two  ribs;  g'entlv 
raise  this  ])art  of  the  body  until  it  is  (piite  off  the  table  or  l)ed  : 
hold  it   in  this  ])osition  three  to  fix'e  minutes. 

If  the  patient  is  treating  himself,  roll  a  (juilt  to  a  thickness 
of  about  six  or  eight  inches,  or  take  a  large  bottle  or  an\-- 
thing  that  will  make  bulk,  la}-  it  down,  and  lie  with  the  back 
across  it  in  such  a  luanner  as  to  raise  the  l:)ack  and  make 
pressure.  This  will  relieve  any  ordinary  case  of  looseness 
of  the  bowels,  and  if  the  tension  is  kept  off  the  muscles  l)y 
inhibiting,  will  cure  85  per  cent  of  the  cases  treated. 

It  is  well  to  wash  the  l)owels  out  with  an  injection  of 
warm  water  once  in  four  to  six  hours,  until  thev  are  well 
cleansed;  follow  the  exacuation  of  each  enema  with  four  to 
six  ounces,  a  large  cu])ful.  of  cold  water  and  Siamene  Anti- 
septic Wash,  and  retain  it.  In  cases  of  diarrhea  in  teething 
children,  when  irritation  or  inflammation  is  ex])ected  to  keep 
up  for  several  days,  it  is  alwa}'s  good  to  ap]:)ly  sweating  com- 
press to  the  bowels  iiumediately  after  each  cold  enema  and 
at  night.      (See  "Sweating  Compress,''  par.  313.) 


i23 


PLATE  XO.   22. 

STKETCIIIXG    THE    SCIATIC    NERVE. 

239.  First:  Give  general  spinal  treatment  (par.  230). 
Second:    Patient  on  the  l:)ack.   operator  grasps  the  ankle 

^\ith  one  hand;  hend  the  leg  at  the  hij)  and  knee-joint,  hring- 
ing  the  thigh  down  on  the  chest;  with  the  other  hand  on  the 
knee,  draw  the  thigh  down  on  the  abdomen,  rotate  the  leg 
outward  as  far  as  it  will  extend  without  giving  pain,  and 
reverse  the  motion.  With  the  leg  relaxed,  bring  it  straight 
V  ith  a  jerk  sufficient  to  jar  it.  Before  the  leg  and  ner\-e  are 
rtretched  in  this  manner,  relax  all  muscles  over  the  lumbar 
region,  wdiich  will  invariably  be  hard,  or  very  tender ;  some- 
tmies  both.     (See  par.  115.) 

ASTHMA. 

240.  Asthma  can  have  no  specific  rule  for  treatment  except 
"take  off  the  pressure"  that  is  usually  between  the  first  and 
fifth  dorsal  vertebrae ;  more  often  on  the  left  than  on  the  right 
side.  Relieve  all  contracted  muscles,  if  there  are  any  which 
may  draw  the  ribs  out  of  place,  causing  them  to  press  upon 
a  nerve. 

Give  general  spinal  treatment  ( par.  230)  to  improve  the 
cuTulation,  expand  the  chest  (par.  227)  and  adjust  the  ribs 
(par.  232). 

In  cases  of  asthma  the  upper  chest  breathing  exercises 
(par.  2/T,)  are  of  inestimal)le  \"alue,  and  should  not  be  neg- 
lected. 

This  treatment,  persevered  in  daily  from  four  to  six  weeks, 
will  cure  the  average  case.  For  further  information  in  chronic 
and  difficult  cases,  we  refer  the  reader  to  our  Bureau  of  In- 
formation. 


124 


I  26  S I  A  M  1-:  X  !•:     1 1  0  M  F.    TKK  AT  M  KXT. 

Till-:    l"i:.MAI.K    OKC.AXS.    ITKRIS,    OXARIKS,    A.XD    T 1 1  K    MALK 

()K(;AXS. 

241.  [•"irsl  :  With  llie  patient  ini  the  face,  all  the  muscles 
relaxed,  .yive  oeneral  spinal  treatment  (par.  230),  to  see  that 
I'nere  is  no  ])ressnre  mi  the  spinal  sym])athetic  centers  that 
would  s\nipathize  with  the  i^eneratixe  organs. 

Second:  Examine  all  the  lumbar  vertebne.  inhil)it  all  con- 
tracted and  tender  nuiscles.  which  are  usually  found  at  the 
second  and  third  lumbars  in  uterine  and  ovarian  trouble, 
sometimes  as  low  as  the  fifth  lumbar,  and.  in  diseases  of  the 
bladder  and  «"enerati\e  organs,  as  low  as  the  second,  third 
and  fourth  sacral  nerves.  (See  Reference  Column,  page  if).) 
Relax  all  contracted  muscles  in  this  region. 

Third:  Turn  the  patient  on  the  l)ack,  give  circular  vibra- 
tions from  three  to  fi\e  minutes  o\er  the  parts  affected.  In 
all  forms  of  uterine,  oxarian  and  other  diseases  affecting  the 
lower  third  of  trunk  (pelvic  region)  the  cold  friction  baths 
(pars.  316  and  317)  are  \erv  beneficial.  All  tlK^se  affected 
with  chronic  troubles  in  this  region  can  not  aft'ord  to  ignore 
t'lese    water    treatments. 

BLADDER    DISEASE. 

242.  The  same  general  treatment  for  uterus  and  o\aries 
ajjplies  alike  t(t  bladder  diseases.  For  specitic  points  to  reach 
the  bladder,   see  the  Reference  Column,   page    16. 

it  matters  not  what  the  name  of  the  disease  is  that  yoti 
ha\e  to  contend  with,  the  eradication  of  it  must  be  b_\-  re- 
moving' the  cause.  The  cause  is  inxariably  from  pre.-siu'e  (»n 
some  ])art  of  the  vasso-motor  nerxcN.  The  centers  of  this 
system  are  foimd  along  on  the  sides  of  the  spines  of  the 
l)ack-bone. 

The  indications  that  are  manifest  are  hardness,  tenderness 
and  contractions  of  the  muscles,  or  dislocated  l)one'^. 

All  head,  neck,  lung,  heart,  stomach,  li\er.  kidney,  bowel, 
uterine,  bladder,  muscular  and  bone  diseases  are  relieved  in 
the  same  general  wav :  that  is,  to  remove  the  pressure  and 
start   the  ri\'ers  of  life. 


Chapter  XII. 

M1-:X TAL   MI'IDICIXK. 

243.  Mental  medicine  is  the  science  that  treats  of  sugges- 
lii)n  as  it  is  apjjhcd  to  the  attril)utes  of  the  mind  in  the  art 
of  healing. 

244.  Some  of  the  attrihntes  of  the  mind,  when  excited  to      Depres-^ors 
an  excessixe  action  from  external  stimnli.  1)eci~tme  depressors 

of  the  \ital  forces.     Idiey  are  cantion.  ai)i)rol)ation.  \eneration. 
conjugal  loxe.  etc. 

245.  There  are  other  attributes  that  neutralize  the  excess-      ronu 
i\e  action  of  the  dejiressors  by  their  increased  energy,  thereby 
becoming  tonics  to  the  \ital   forces.      They  are  combati\'eness. 
self-esteem,   mirth  fulness,   hope.   etc. 

F(ir  illustration:  If  one  is  exposed  to  great  danger,  cau- 
tion, being  the  guard,  is  o\erstimulated,  throwing-  the  ner\-es 
intii  \iolent  action.  In  such  instances,  the  \ital  forces  are 
rendered  weak  and  de\italized.  This  condition  is  neutralized 
by  the  increased  action  of  combativeness.  which  is  the  de- 
fensive faculty,  acting  in  direct  opposition  to  caution. 

Conjugal  love,  w  hen  stimulated  to  overaction,  is  de\'italiz-      covjugai 
ii\g,  and  is  neutralized  1))-  the  increased  action  of  hope.  ^'°''^ 

These  mental  remedies  are  a])plied  b}'  the  law  of  sugges- 
tion, riiere  are  two  ways  of  administering  mental  medicine — 
b>'  suggestion  and  by  auto-suggestion. 

246.  Suggestion  is  the  transference  of  thought   from  the     suggestion 
operator  to  the  patient. 

247.  Auto-suggestion  is  thought  which  is  made  bv  the  pa-      Autosuggestum 
tient  upon  himself,  and  is  conducted  on  the  same  general  lines 

as  suggestion. 

248.  Health   is  ours  b\-  birthright,  and,   1)\-  li\ing  in  liar-      Health 
m(in_\-  with  natural  laws,  we  are  bound  to  be  healthw 

127 


128 


SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 


Its  Object 


Attributes 


Primary 
Attributes 


249.  riic  (il)iect  i)f  HK'ntal  medicine  is  to  enal)1e  the  reader 
to  know  liiniself  and  liis  mental  attri1)utes,  to  understand 
the  mental  laws  and  how  to  apjjly  them  ti  >  conserve  his  forces, 
Ijuild  up  the  man  and  heal  the  hody. 

In  sttidving-  mental  medicine,  we  will  first  detlne  the  "Self," 
then  dehne  the  attrilmtes  of  the  Self,  that  the  reader  may  more 
clearly  grasp  the  ])urport  of  what  we  term  "Mental  Medicine." 

For  our  purpose,  we  define  man  as  an  "Ego"  or  "A  Self." 
It  is  true  that  there  is  but  one  Self  in  the  fullest  sense:  "God." 
As  ravs  stream  forth  from  the  sun,  so  the  "Selves"  stream 
forth  from  the  "Supreme  Self."  Each  ray  whispers.  "I  am 
He."  Each  Self  has  a  consciousness  of  its  own  self.  This 
consciousness,  for  our  purpose,  we  call  "a  unit."  As  such, 
it  is  divisible,  each  fraction  being  a  part  of  the  whole.  The 
Self  is  this  consciousness  that  ever  exists  as  a  whole.  This 
Self  is  a  "Dual  Self,"  i)artaking  of  the  nature  of  the  spiritual 
and  the  physical.  It  must  be  so,  for  it  proceeds  from  the 
Divine  Self,  projecting  upon  the  physical  plane.  Then  the 
first  part  of  the  Dual  Self,  the  first  great  cause,  we  will  define 
as  the  Unconscious  or  Spiritual  Self,  the  immortal  nnnd,  mak- 
ing itself  manifest  onlv  through  the  nature  of  things.  The 
second  part,  the  Conscious  or  Physical  Self,  the  mortal  mind, 
m.aking  itself  manifest  only  through  the  physical  senses. 

"The  Unconscious  ]Mind  and  the  Conscious  Mind,  immor- 
tal and  mortal." 

We  will  further  define  the  Self  as  a  divisible  wdiole,  ex- 
]:)ressing  itself  upon  two  planes,  the  spiritual  and  the  i)hysical. 

250.  Attributes  (faculties)  may  be  defined  as  i)owers  of 
the  Self,  their  aggregate  comprising  the  mind,  which  is  capa- 
ble of  generating  thought  and  conveying  it  to  the  denser 
body,  the  brain.  Attributes  (faculties)  sustain  the  same  re- 
lation to  the  mind  that  the  organs  sustain  to  the  body. 

f*rimarilv  there  are  three  attributes  through  which  the  Self 
Ijecomes  manifest — causalit\-  (knowing),  firmness  (will- 
ing), destructiveness  (energizing).  Each  of  these  attributes 
has    two    planes,    the    conscious    and    miconscious.      I    uncon- 


.M  i:.\'l"AI.    M  i:i»iciXK. 


129 


sciouslv  kiiiiw,  in"  1  cunscidUsU'  kimw.  I  iinconscinusly  will, 
c»r  1  CDiisciiiusK-  will.  1  unconsciouslx-  ciiergi/.e,  or  1  cmi- 
scioiisly  eners^lze. 

We  unconscimisK-  know  a  truth  thnuij^ii  our  intuition, 
unaided  by  our  conscious  reasoning-. 

We  consciously  know  a  truth  through  our  conscious  rea- 
soning, 1)\-  coni])aring  it   with  similar  truths. 

We  unconsciousl\-  will  a  thing  ihrough  silent,  passix-e, 
IcA-ing  desire. 

W'e  consciously  will  a  thing  through  active,  positive  desire. 

We  unconsciouslv  energize  a  thing  through  silent  passiv- 
ity in  knowing  and   willing. 

We  consciouslv  energize  a  thing-  through  conscious  know- 
ing and  willing-  in  active  desire. 

251.  The  secondary  attributes  collectively  are  all  of  the 
remaining  mental  faculties  which  contribute  one  toward  the 
other  and  to  the  primary  attril)utes  on  both  the  unconscious 
and  the  conscious  plane. 

Lying  within  the  inherent  nature  of  both  the  i)rimarv 
and  secondary  attributes  are  the  laws  of  health  and  disease. 

From  the  foregoing  we  have  learned  what  we  are,  and 
what  our  attrilmtes  are;  the  relation  we  sustain  to  our  attri- 
butes; that  we  are  a  part  of  the  One  Great  Life,  which  is  eter- 
nal, e\'er-active,  and  kiioi^'s  no  failure;  that  all  power  lies 
within  "The  Silence."  and  that,  if  we  gox'ern  (^ur  own  des- 
tinies, our  health  and  comfort,  we  must  learn  to  recognize 
these  truths  and  conform  to  their  immutable  laws. 

252.  Idle  fundamental  ])rincii)les  embraced  in  the  laws 
governing  mental  medicine  are : — 

First:  That  the  mind  is  dual — unconscious  (immortal) 
and  conscious   (mortal). 

Second:  That  the  unconscious  is  the  working  ]xnver,  the 
Visetergo,  that  marxelous  power  that  selects  and  directs  the 
foods  to  the  upbuilding  of  the  l)o(ly,  and  the  conscious,  the 
'^ensitixe  ])late.  recei\ing  and  contributing  all  impressions  from 
th.e  external  world  to  the  unconscious  mind. 


Secondary 
Attributes 


Finidanieiital 
Principles 


130 


SIA.MEXK     HOME     TREATMENT. 


I'hird  :  Tlic  imcdiiscidus  is  constaiUh'  amenable  to  control 
lt\'  the  power  of  stig"g'estion. 

]-'otn-th  :  That  the  unconscious  mind  has  absolute  control 
of  the  conditions,   functions  and  sensations  of  the  body. 

Fifth  :  That  the  unconscious  mind  receives  the  suggestions 
through  the  conscious  mind. 

Sixth:  That  the  conscious  mind  receives  its  suggestions 
tlu-ough  the  hve  senses  from  the  objective  world. 

Seventh  :  That  these  suggestions  may  be  conveyed  in  three 
l>rimary  ways — orally,  mentally,  and  physically  ( pars.  254, 
255-  256). 

Eighth  :  That  in  conveying  a  suggestion  of  health  thought, 
where  there  is  a  disease,  through  the  conscious  to  the  uncon- 
.scions  mind,  there  must  always  be  passivity  (par.  253). 


CONDITIONS    FOR    ADMINISTERING    MENTAL    MEDICINE. 

Condition  2^3'  In  all  cases  there  must  be  perfect  passivity,  or  relaxa- 

of  Patient  tion,  of  all  the  muscles  of  the  body,  on  the  part  of  the  pa- 
tient. This  passivity  must  carry  with  it  no  mental  act  except 
the  passive  thought,  "a  loving  desire  of  life,"  from  two  attri- 
butes, the  faculty  of  love  ( amativeness)  and  the  faculty  of 
desire  of  life  ( vitativeness).  Passing  from  the  active  to  the 
])assive  state,  the  objective  reason  of  all  times,  places  and 
things  is  suspended;  in  consef|uence,  the  unconscious  mind 
rises  in  supremacy  abo\e  the  conscious  or  active  mind,  and 
the  body  at  once  becomes  thoroughly  relaxed.  In  this  con- 
dition, the  patient  is  prepared  to  receive  the  highest  degree 
of  positive  results  from  suggestion  (also,  see  par.  263). 
Condition  The  paticut  in  this  ])assive  state,  the  operator  also  becomes, 

of  Operator  in  a  degree,  passixe.  Concentrate  yoxn  mind  u])on  what 
you  desire  to  take  place,  and  let  your  features  and  soul  drop 
right  straight  out  of  force  and  intellect  and  right  into  smiles, 
gentleness,  softness  and  love,  and  in  that  state  icill  the  thing, 
] lower,  qualit}-.  range,  kind  or  character  yoti  want,  and  it 
shall  be  so.  "S'ou  can  never  achie\'e  the  grandeur  of  this  truth 
unless  vou  obev  this  law.     This  and  this  onlv  is  the  law  of 


Mi-:.\'r.\i.   Mi'Dici  XK.  1:^1 

its  atlaiiinieiU  ;  hence,  n.-xcr  a<lniinistcr  iiK-iital  nic'dicinc  1  ir 
put  \()iir  hand  tn  a  patient  unless  \<iu  (h"<ip  in  the  lloor  of 
]ii>\\cr  whose  tOundatii  ui  is   I.()\  !•'.. 

When  tliis  state  is  atlaineil  l)y  the  ])atient  and  iiperator. 
they  are  at  onee  (•/;  rat^(^t>rl.  The  operator  lorniulates  his  line 
of  siig'g"estion  that  he  wishes  tiie  unconseiou>  mind  ot'  the 
])atient  to  reeei\e.  lie  makes  these  sug'g'estions  on  a  line  of 
action  that  he  has  decided  u])on.  orallw  mentalK'  or  ])h\'>icall\'. 
concent  rat  iui^-  hi'^  mind   u])on  the  object   desired. 

254.  If  the  su<;gestion  is  to  be  made  orally,  the  argument      omiiy 
is  made  in  a  slow,  g-eutle.    forceful,  confidential   way.   leadini^' 

the  patient's  subliminal  mind  to  take  u])  this  ari^ument  as  his 
own.  afhrmiui^-.  steadilw  positixel}-  and  ])ersistently.  that  the 
functions  of  the  body  organs  are  steadil}'  and  surely  grow- 
ing better,  stronger  and  more  health}- :  that  the  blood,  the 
life-giving  element,  in  the  passi\e  state,  is  being  more  surel\- 
and  uniformly  distributed  to  all  parts  of  the  l)od\' ;  that  the 
mental  faculties  are  becoming  clearer  and  stronger,  and  that 
there  will  be  a  harmonious  union  between  the  mental  forces 
and  ])hysical  elements.  The  operator  may.  in  fact,  conduct 
this  line  of  argtiment  in  an\-  (lirectii)n  he  mav  desire. 

255.  If  the  stiggestion  is  to  1)e  made  mentalK".  patient  and      MemaUy 
operator   in   the   foregoing  condition  breathe   at   the   ratio   of 

two.  three  and  one.  The  patient  breathes  into  his  lungs  the 
life-giving  element  of  the  atmosphere,  carrving  \\  ith  the  breath 
the  health  thoughts  suggested  b}-  himself  or  o])erator.  These 
two  elements,  the  life  element  and  the  thotight  element,  unite 
on  a  common  plane  with  a  chemical  aftinitv,  producing  a  new 
comixnmd  that  becomes  at  once  a  \italizing.  restoratixe  agent. 
Min<l  and  breath  ha\e  ])erfect  affinitv:  control  the  one  and 
you  Control  the  other.  The  o])erator  thus  sends  forth  his 
suggestions  mentally  in  full  faith  of  absolute  good  results, 
and  they  will   sureh'  be  obtained. 

256.  If  suggestion  is  to  be  made  'hrougb  ])hvsical  means.      rhysUuUy 
the  same  conditions.   mentalK-  and   ph\->icall\-.   as  in   the  tw-o 
preceding  methods  ])re\ail.       The  operator,  in  the  same  ])()si- 


13-  SIAMKXE     HOME     TREAT.M  EXT. 

linn  mentally,  with  sufticient  will  in  force  to  enable  him  to 
use  his  hands  and  muscles,  or  whatever  other  objective  means 
he  ma_\-  desire  to  use — namel}-,  mani])u.lation  (  ])ar.  lyC))  in 
any  of  its  forms — with  the  declaration  accom])an\-ing'  each 
stroke  of-  the  hand  that  the  tension  upon  the  nerve  centers 
of  the  org-ans  l)eing  treated  will  relax,  therebv  opening  the 
channels  of  the  life  blood  to  and  from  it.  permitting  the  pure 
blood  to  flow  freely  into  that  organ  and  bring  nwdx  the  im- 
l)urities  and  restore  the  normal  functions. 

The  foregoing  suggestions  are  on\y  landmarks  of  the 
many  lines  of  arguments  to  be  ])ro(luced.  'Jdie  success  de- 
pends upon  the  a1)ilit}-  of  the  patient  and  operator  to  assume 
the  proper  states,  and  the  ingenuit}'  <)f  the  o])erator  to  make 
the  i)roper  suggestions. 
Distant  257.  Distant  treatment  is  conducted  in  the  same  general 

Treatment  v  ay  as  mcutal  treatment.  To  insure  the  highest  degree  of 
results,  there  may  be  an  agreement  of  time  for  treatment 
between  operator  and  patient. 

It  is  not.  howe\er,  absolutely  necessar\-  that  there  should 
l)e  an  agreement  in  time  between  ])atient  and  operator  in 
distant  treatment,  for  any  conditi(Mi  that  will  ])lace  the  uncon- 
scious mind  of  the  patient  en  rapport  with  the  operator  will 
produce  equall}-  as  good  results.  For  instance,  if  at  anv  time 
the  operator  is  in  a  passi\-e  state,  the  image  of  the  [jatient 
ccjmes  before  his  mind,  he  can  instantaneouslv  come  cii  raf"- 
port  with  him  and  influence  his  unconscious  mind  by  the 
power  of  suggestion. 
iiai,it  258.   In    treating    habit,    such    as    the    use    of    intoxicating 

drinks,  tobacco  in  all  its  forms,  drugs  or  other  vicious  habits, 
they  are  treated  in  the  same  general  wa}"  as  diseases.  They 
can  Ije  successfully  treated:  in  fact,  more  successfully  treated 
by  suggestion,  than  by  any  other  one  method  of  treatment. 

If  you  desire  to  treat  a  person  for  any  habit,  and  he.  in 
turn,  desires  to  be  cured,  the  suggestion,  with  the  line  of  ar- 
gument. ma\'  be  gi\en  in  anv  one  or  all  of  the  methods  of 
ap])l\ing   mental    medicine. 


M  i':.\iAi.   M  i:i)U  I  x  i:.  133 

On  the  otluT  liand.  if  tlu'  liahitiiant  is  not  dcsirons  of 
o-jvinj;-  np  the  liahil.  the  operator  lias  >lih  other  ex])e(hents. 
lie  ean  treat  liini  in  one  of  two  ways:  l^rst,  by  distant  treat- 
ment (  ])ar.  J':^J),  and  seeond.  l)y  liein^-  with  the  patient  wlien 
];e  is  slee])in5;-:  i;-o  to  his  bedside,  gently  ai)])roaeh  him,  and. 
il'  possil)le,  hi\-  one  hand  npon  the  temple  and  the  other  o\-cr 
th.e  solar  plexns  (  stomaeh  )  ;  silriitly  ])rodnee  a  c7('(//',  /^ustlri'c 
line  of  ai',<;'nment  showing-  n])  the  habit  in  all  its  details,  at 
the  same  time  ^ixin^"  him  sneh  sui^.s^estions  as  will  ra.ise  him 
al)ove  his  eondition. 

259.  This  treatment  will  ap])ly  alike  to  all  habits  of  the 
^•onn_L;■.  It  is  possible  for  the  mother  at  nii^iit-time  to  retire  to 
tlie  bedehamber  of  a  child,  prodneinj^"  these  ars^-umen.ts  in  a 
loving,  expectant  way,  for  the  child  to  grow  out  of  any  habit 
he  may  have.  \\  henexer  she  i)nlls  a  foul  weed  from  the 
mental  garden  she  should  plant  good  thoughts  in  its  place, 
such  as  she  desires  her  child  to  cultixate.  They  will  take  root 
and  grow. 

To  attain  the  highest  degree  of  this  sublime  and  potent 
remedial  agent  for  both  mental  and  physical  derangements, 
the  individuals  who  practice  it  must  learn  to  be  patient,  faitli- 
fiil  and  pcrscz'criiii^  to  the  end,  and  sure  success  will  be  their 
reward. 


Chapter  XIII. 

THE  RELA  riUX  OF  AlEX  TAL  AX!)  I'lnSlCAE 
CL'LTl'KI-:. 


Mechanical 
.Movements 


Faculties 


Concentration 


260.  The  fundamental  law  of  life  expression  is  activity, 
and  this  activity  re(|uires  perfect  reciprocity  between  mind  and 
l)ody.  It  is  because  of  the  absence  of  recijjrocitv  between 
mind  and  Ixxly  that  none  of  tlie  systems  of  mental  and  ])hvsi- 
cal  culture  meet  tlie  re(|uirements  of  the  eager-minded  in  their 
search  for  health  and  harmonious  development. 

Much  stress  is  laid  tipon  the  mechanical  mo\-ements  bv  the 
schools  of  that  order,  wliicli  is  good  so  far  as  it  goes ;  but  it 
must  l)e  ijorne  in  mind  that  the  scliools  which  make  music 
the  basis  of  their  exercises  are  purely  mechanical  and  physical. 
as  it  is  impossible  to  employ  the  mind  in  deep  concentration 
upon  the  development  of  the  body  while  obliged  to  keep  time 
to  the  music. 

Another  class  are  endeavoring  to  bring  matter  under  the 
dominion  of  mind,  which  is  also  good ;  but  perfect  success 
depends  upon  a  knowledge  of  the  true  relation  of  the  two 
forces  and  their  perfect   interdependence. 

261.  Certain  faculties  of  the  mind  can  not  be  exercised, 
unrestrained,  if  corresponding  parts  of  the  body  are  diseased. 
For  example :  The  faculty  of  constructiveness  can  not  be 
exercised  mechanically,  in  certain  directions,  if  the  hands  are 
disabled. 

The  faculties  of  the  mind  and  the  organs  of  the  brain  and 
body  are  insei)aral:)le. 

1  houghts  in  the  ideal  ha\'e  no  creatixe  i)ower  on  the  physi- 
cal plane  without  j)hysical  action  to  bring  them  into  ol)iectiyitv. 
Concentration  u])(»n  gi\en  thoughts  crvstalli/.es  tlicni  and 
l)rings  them  to  concrete   form  when  they  unite  with  ])hvsical 
effort. 

134 


I1II-:  Ki-.i.A  ridx  111-   Mi.Ni'Ai.  .\.\i>  I'lnsiiAi.  cri/rruK.      135 

Space  will  iini  pcniiil  a  sciciuitic  or  pliilt  isopliical  disser- 
ialitui  upi'ii  ilicsc  mucli-stu(lic<l  (|iR'Sii.  nis.  bul  ti>  simply  i^ive 
a  tew  jutints  and  sii^xcstions  to  lielj)  the  student  t<>  a  ha])]))- 
l)alance  between  mind  and  Ixxlv.  is  nuv  aim. 

Sa\-s  one:  ""I  >ee  no  nece,ssit\-  for  ])h)sieal  cnltin-e,  t'nrtlier  rhuunin 
than  the  jjlivsical  lal)or  1  am  ol)lii;ed  to  i)erform;"  hut  this 
is  one  of  the  errors  that  has  throii^-hont  all  time  swejjt  the 
peoj)le  from  the  face  of  the  earth,  because  it  separates  the 
n:ind  and  bo(K-.  /'//  flioiti^/il.  until  a  linal  dissolution  al)s<)rbs 
tlieni  both.  Tliat  which  is  done  in  the  i)hysical  is  first  done 
in  the  mental.  And  in  direct  ])roi)ortion  as  a  man  recog- 
nizes himself  as  a  mental  man.  and  exercises  his  mind  accord- 
inq-lv.  he  is  able  to  make  his  mental  ])o\\ers  manifest  ti])on 
the  physical  organs. 

it  is  the  purpose  of  this  chai)ter  to  demonstrate  that  in- 
telligent ph}'sical  exercise  is  necessary  to  the  health  and  lon- 
gevity of  the  bodv.  and  that  these  exercises  must  l)e  directed 
and   performed   with   a   true   mental   concept. 

The  i)rime  object  of  this  combination  is  to  direct  the 
mental   forces  to  the  physical  organs. 

262.  Before  entering  into  the  combination  of  the  mental 
powers  and  physical  movements,  it  would  l)e  well  to  consider 
each  element  separately,  and  their  separate  necessities. 

The  hndy  is  like  a  machine,  requiring  lubrication  to  pre- 
\ent  friction.  Friction  of  the  body  is  (Hsease,  which  even- 
tually causes  death. 

The  intelligent  action  of  the  mind  upon  the  body,  with 
systematic  exercise,  prevents  friction,  and  produces  harmony 
and   freedom  of  thought. 

If  we  would  intelligently  direct  our  menial  forces  to  the      yrcnuti  i-<»vcs 
I'phiiildiiiL^i  of  the  physical,  we  would  know  what  force  to  rise 
to  attain  a  given  effect,  according  to  the  laws  of  these  forces; 
otherwise,  the  effort  would  be  purely  mechanical,  and  conse- 
(juentl}'  would  embrace  only  one-half  of  a  man's  power. 

S])ecihc  faculties  i)rodncc  s])eciric  thoughts,  subjcci  to  two 
conditions;  \\z..  the  distingtiishing  (|uality  of  mind,   rmd  the 


136  SIAMEXE     HOME    TREAT  M  EXT. 

nature  of  the  stinuili    (  liiL;iit.  heat,  sonnd.  solids.  li(|ui(ls.  etc.) 
that  arouse  tlie   faculties  to  action. 
Passivity  263.    Perfect  control  and  freedom  of  thought  is  necessary 

to   secure  coni])lete   passix-it}'   and    relaxation   of  tlie   muscles 
of  the  body,  without  which,  the  pressure  u])on  the  obstructed 
channels  conveying;-  the   thiids  of  the  body  to  and   from  all 
parts,  can  not  l)e  remo\-ed  (par.  253). 
Firrnvess  264.   Qnc     sliould     arm     himself    first    with     a    pcrsistciif 

tliought.     This  energizing-  thought  springs  from  the  faculty 
of   firmness,    and   gi\es   stamina   both   to   body   and   mind — 
''back-bone." 
sei/-esteem  265.   Self-csteem  gives  power,  calmness.  self-])ossession  and 

self-reliance  to  the  mind,  and  to  the  body  it  gives  limber  joints 
and  a   free-arm  movement,   while  it  builds  and  controls  the 
spinal  cord. 
vitHtiveness  266.    \'itati\'eness,  desire  for  life,  builds  the  heart  and  jjre- 

sides  ON'er  the  circulation  of  the  blood. 
Amativeness  Amativeucss   is   the   reproductive    faculty.      It   builds   the 

lungs,  the  reproductive  organs,  and  presides  ox'er  the  respira- 
tory acts.  It  also  builds  and  presides  over  the  sex  organs. 
In_  breathing,  we  deri\e  all  the  vital  element  (  electricit}" )  that 
is  transformed  into  life  force. 

P'irmness.    self-esteem,    vitati^'eness    and    amativeness    are 
tonic  faculties. 

267.   The  jiower  of  deep  and  intelligent  breathing  (.lepends 
tii)on  the  faculties  of  amatixeness  in  action,  which  is  l^reathing, 
and   continuit}'   in   action,    whicli    is   concentration. 
Breathing  "^  be   lireatli    is    the   life,    and   according   to   our   breathing 

ca])acity  do  we  ol)tain  the  essence  of  continual  existence,  as 
the  atmosj^here  contains  all  that  we  can  appropriate  to  our 
physical  needs.  The  nitrogen  of  the  atmosphere  is  not  con- 
ducive to  life,  but  serx'es  as  a  menstruum  for  the  oxygen, 
which,  passing  o\er  the  cell  walls  of  the  lungs,  unites  with  the 
blood  and  is  carried  through   the  body. 

As  we  exhale,   we  ])our  out   from  the  lungs  the  carbonic 
acid   gas  produced   b\-  the   slow   conibustion   of  the  bodv. 


1111".  Ri:i..\  rioN  oi'  M  i:n  lAi.  and  I'lnsKAi.  cii.riRi:.     ^  ^^J 

In  addilion  {n  these  plusieal  elements,  there  is  a  mure 
attenuated  ether  that  expresses  itself  al-nim'  higher  lines,  a  stih- 
jeet  into  whieli  we  can  not  enter  in  this  brief  treatise,  hut 
which  is  dei)endciit.  in  its  highest  sense,  upnn  the  intelli<;ent 
conihinatinndt  the  triune  powers  n\  l)reathin^-.  thinkin,<;-  atid 
])livsical  exercise,  and  is  the  true  nintixe  power  in  the  phe- 
nomena of  life. 

268.  With    the    movements.    Active,    Active-resistinq-.    and      comhinc    movc- 
Rotary.   we  conihuir  the  caiiscidiis  :icl   of  brcalhiiii^.  coiu-rii-      ""•'"^■•''  ■""/ 
Initiiig  the  //////(/  ti])i>n  the  result  ilrsi'\'ii  to  talcc  ptacc  in  ilic 

body.  Special  attention  mtist  he  paid  to  the  exercise  of  the 
faculty  of  contintiit}",  the  fimctioii  of  which  is  to  hold  the 
mind  onto  the  object  desired;  without  this,  no  s])ecihc  end 
can  be  attained. 

269.  This  perfect  and  healthful  exercise  of  the  1)ody  and 
mind  de])ends  U])on  the  power  of  exercising-  the  faculties  of 
tiie  mind:  hence,  the  creatixe  function  ])r()ceeds  from  the  nerve 
centers  and  gives  cell  power,  for  exery  cell  grows  from  center 
to  circitmference.  and  forms  a  unixersal  1)asis.  established 
upon  the  same  law  for  the  twofold  nature  of  every  faculty 
(  pars.  249.  250.  251  ). 

On  a  conscious  knowledge  of  the  functions  of  the  nerve 
centers,  and  their  relation  to  the  faculties  of  the  mind,  de- 
pends the  a])iHty  to  ]:)roperly  exercise  the  Ijody  and  bring  it 
to  its  highest  state  of  development. 

There  must  be  a  judicious  conserxation  of  all  the  elements  conservntiou  of 
of  the  life  forces  xvhich  proceed  from  the  brain  and  constitute  i''t<^  Forces 
the  "Visetergo,"  that  marvelous  poxver  that  selects  and  directs 
the  foods  to  the  l)uilding  of  the  bod}-,  united  to  the  radiating 
power  xvhich  streams  forth  from  the  solar  ])lexus  xx  ith  a  force 
parallel  (in  the  little  microcosm)  to  the  solar  sun  in  the  great 
unix-erse. 

270.  IJreathing  is  both  a  psx'chic  and  a  ])h}-sical  act.  hav-      BreHthiug 
ing   for  its   function  the  reproduction  of  the  xital  element  as 

fast    as    it   is   expende<l    in    stistaining   life. 

In  breathing  xve  receive  a  xitalixing  life  element,  designated 


rtrcitthitiL 


i  3S  SIA.MKXE      HOME     TklCATM  EXT. 

Ml  "l.oi^a"  as  "I'rana."'  \\liicli  is  the  liii'  pi'iiici])!^  ])rn|)(  luiidcil 
hy  ilic  late  \  i\.i  Kaiianda  tn  l)c  (nily  i  means  ti)  ultimate  lib- 
eration. 

Mhni  and  Mind   and  lu'eatli   lia\e  perfect   affinitw      Cdntroj   the  one. 

lirenth  -jnd  you  coutrdl  tile  ])ii\\er  of  the  other. 
Control  ,>i  .\l)Solute    aud    intelliL;ent    control    .if   mind    and    breath    is 

Mind  :in<i  uecessary  before  the  hiiyiiest  dei^ree  of  success  can  l)e  attained 

lircati,  ji^   physical   development. 

Method  271.   All   l)reathin^-  exercises  are   threefold   in   nature — in- 

of  lialing,  holding-,  and  exhaling",  to  be  taken  at  the  ratio  of  two. 
three  and  one,  counting  sixty  to  the  minute.  ( )n  inhaling, 
nu'iitally  conduct  the  breath  in  at  the  right  nostial  to  the  base 
of  the  1)rain,  thence  down  the  right  chain  of  svmpathetics 
(par.  59)  to  the  base  of  the  spine:  hold  while  holding  the 
breath;  then  exhale,  conducting  the  breath  u])  the  left  chain 
of  svmpathetics  to  the  base  of  the  brain  and  out  at  the  left 
n.ostril.  Then  conduct  the  breath  in  at  the  left  nostril  and 
out  at  the  right,  proceeding  as  before.  ^Ou  mav  find  that 
these  exercises  can  be  taken  with  more  ease  by  breathing  in 
at  the  left  nostril  first.  It  is  alwa}'s  best  to  trv  the  nostrils  l)e- 
I'ore  commencing  the  exercises,  by  closing  one  with  the  thuml) 
\\hile  blowing  the  breath  through  the  other,  beginning  with 
the  nostril  through  A\hich  the  breath  passes  with  the  most  ease. 
.\fter  a  little  practice  \nu  will  be  able  to  perform  this  exercise 
with  perfect  ease.  Fhis  is  the  general  method  of  lireathing 
while  taking  the  physical   culture  exercises. 

W  hen  this  proticienc}"  in  breathing  is  attained,  ^■ou  are 
ready  for  tlie  next  step.  As  you  inhale,  carr^•  with  the  l)reath 
'c\  desire  of  health,  a  health  thought;  as  yim  exhale,  expel 
all  thoughts  of  disease.  This  recpn'res  a  great  deal  of  con- 
centration and  practice;  after  a  short  time,  howexer,  von  will 
be  able  to  conduct  the  breath  to  an\-  ner\-e  center  and  its 
corresponding  organ,  .and  to  assist  in  sending  a  renewed  ner\'e- 
wa\e  from  the  brain  and  spinal  cord  to  the  organ,  thereby 
increasing  the  circulation  and  <>i\inu"  it   renewed  actixitv. 


II'.    KI.I.A  I  KIN    (i|-    M  I-.X  I'Al.    AM)    I'inSU  Al.   t' I    1 .1' I '  K  I'.. 


KV) 


272.  r.rc'atliin:^    exercise^   iii;i\'   li.-   classified    as    t01!(t\\s: — 
I'irst  :    I  pper-clicst    or    full-clicst    hreaihiiij;". 

Sccimd:    I  j  >\\  cr-chcsl    i>r   (lia]:Iira:^iiialic   l)rcalliinL;.    soiiie- 
tinies  called  ahdoniinal  hreatliin^-. 

Phircl  :  Ivlntliniical  brcatliini^'  l<>r  the  expansion  of  the 
chest  diiw  award,  and  luilward  radiatimis. 

273.  While  inhaling-,  expand  liie  u])per  chest  and  cmuract       rf,i,vr- 
the  abdomen   ai'dnnd   the   na\el   as   far  as  possible:   hold   this      '''"■•"' 
position  while  holding-  tlie  breath.     On  exhalins^",  assume  the       -rt-'t  ""a- 
normal  position  of  the  chest  and  abdonK-n  slo\\l\-  and  e\'enl}-. 

This  exercise   is   to  be  taken   in   connection   with   the  method 
of  breathiniL^'  in   par.   -'71. 

These  bi"eathin<;'  exercises  will  be  found  inxalnable  in 
Ciises  of  asthma,  bronchitis,  intlamniation  of  tlie  membrane 
co\'ering"  the  heart.  ])tilmonar\-  ttibercnlosis.  inflammation  and 
cancer  of  the  breast  and  all  diseases  of  the  chest  and  cliest 
nuiscles. 

274.  \\  hile  inlialinj^".  contract  the  tii)per  chest  and  extend      Lowcr- 
the  limit's  downward,  expandini^'  tlie  abdomen:  hold  this  posi-      '^'"^■'"^ 
tion  while  holdino-  the  breath;  while  exhaling-,  slowlv  asstime      i'rcathmff 
the   normal    position   of   the   chest   and   alxlomen.      in    taking" 

these  exercises,  l)reathe  as  in  i)ar.  27  r. 

In  cases  of  dyspe])sia  this  is  a  mc)st  beneficial  exercise, 
when  the  health  thoughts  are  directed  to  the  solar  plexus.  It 
is  also  recommended  in  cases  of  tul)erculosis,  pletuMS}',  stom- 
ach,  li\-er  and   s])]een   troubles. 

275.  ivhythmical  breathing  is  extending  the  length  of  the      RhytiimUni 
normal   breath,   expanding  the  chest  in  e\Try  direction   with-      urcathmg 
out    es])ecially    affecting    the    diai)hragm    or    aii}-    other    ])art. 

This  also  is  to  be  luiited  with  the  methocl  of  breathing   (par. 

-7')- 

This  is  one  of  the  best  exercises  to  develo])  the  btist  and 
increase  sexual  ])o\\er:  to  be  taken  in  cases  of  general  debilit}', 
all  forms  of  spinal  trouble,  such  a>  inllammation  and  ciu-\-a- 
ture  of  the  spine,  all  lung  and  heart  diseases,  and  is  a  tmi\er- 
sal  tonic  to  etpialize  the  circulation  and  warm  tlie  entire  body. 


140  SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

With   each    inlialalinn    take   the   thought    of   new    lite   and 

perfect  health,   "J'rana,"   the   life-o-iv'ing  element. 

Method  276.  Let  the  student  assume  the  ])()sition;  standing-   ( ])ar. 

o''     2'/j)^   sitting-    (par.    J/S),   kneeling    (  ])ar.    2<S(3),   or   rechning 

ractwmg      { Yiiw.    2jg)  \   the   one   that   is   most   comfortable.      Remain    in 

concentration   a   moment,    freeing  the   mind    from   all    ])assion 

or  prejudice,  or  other  thoughts  of  self-interest,  by  assuming 

an  attitude  of  universal  love;  this  will  link  vour  inner  i)owers 

^\ith  the  universal  and  your  normal  self  with  vour  inner  self. 

The  mind  and  the  body  now  being  in  the  proi)er  attitude, 
relax  mentally  and  physically,  and  retain  the  passive  condition 
(par.  253)  while  practicing,  alternately  relaxing  first  one 
muscle,  then  another,  until  some  degree  of  mastery  of  the 
body  has  been  obtained  l)v  the  mind. 

Then  commence  the  breathing  exercises  ( pars.  ly^^,  274 
or  275).  continuing  until  there  is  a  dizziness  or  swimming 
of  the  head. 

Practice  the  breathing  exercises  until  vou  have  gained  con- 
trol of  the  normal  or  objectix'e  mind,  for  you  must  be  able 
to  control  the  mind  before  you  can  control  the  bodv. 

It  is  always  best  to  practice  the  foregoing  breathing  exer- 
cises until  you  have  acquired  proficiency  in  them  before  tak- 
ing uj)  the  physical  movements. 

Direct  your  thoughts  into  the  air  passages  and   nostrils, 
along  with  the  breath,  sending  ii  down  on  either  side  of  the 
spinal  column  with  the  spinal  sympathetics  to  the  solar  plexus 
md   other   nerve   centers. 
Concentration  The  excrcisc  of  couceutratiou  upon  the  end  desired  in  the 

combination  of  the  mental  forces  and  the  ])hvsical  move- 
ments is  quite  essential  for  the  attainment  of  the  highest  de- 
gree of  results. 

1'o  concentrate  is  to  hold  the  thought  on  the  object  de- 
sired. This  is  exceedingly  difficult  for  some  to  do  when 
they  begin  to  exercise  the  faculty  of  continuity,  but  a  few 
minutes,  three  or  ioxw  times  dailv,  devoted  to  this  practice, 
\\ill    produce    wonderful    results;    for    the   more   vou    exercise 


THE  RKLATIOX  OF  MKXTAI.  AND  I'lnSK  AL  CULTIUI-:.        I4I 

the  faculty  of  cc^ntinuity.  tlie  greater  will  be  the  amount 
of  blood  sent  ti)  that  ])art  of  the  brain  gn\erning'  the  faculty. 
For  in  the  ci»nil)inatinn  nt  tlic  triune  ])i>\\ers — concentration, 
breathing,  and  physical  nidxements  for  liealth  and  strength — 
the  mind  is  constantly  impelled  bv  desire,  and  this  serves 
a?  a  minister  of  pleasiuT.  I'hat  w  liicli  gives  pleasure  is  con- 
stantly being  sought  by  the  mind,  and  that  which  gives  pain 
excluded:  lience,  dwell  upnn  l)el(i\ed  images,  faces  of  dear 
friends,  precious  ol)jects,  and  ])]easant  thoughts,  to  the  ex- 
clusion of  all  otiiers.  Practice  in  tliis  manner  until  some  de- 
gree of  mastery  is  attained,  wlien  the  combination  of  mental 
and  physical  exercises  may  be  taken  up  for  ])ractice.  When 
the  mind  loses  hold  of  its  object,  as  it  will  many  times,  it 
must  be  brought  back  and  again  directed  to  tlie  object. 
Often  other  thoughts  rush  in  and  cause  the  mind  to  wander 
away  from  the  object  sought,  and  the  person  suddenly 
awakes  to  iind  hiiuself  tliinking  of  something  foreign  to  the 
object  of  thought.  This  will  often  liappen  to  the  beginner, 
but  it  must  be  contended  with,  however  tiresonie  it  may  be. 
There  is  no  other  way  that  power  of  concentration  can  be 
gained.  In  concentration  the  minrl  must  be  fastened  upon 
the  object,  and  remain  fixed  there,  not  reasoning  on  it,  but, 
as  it  were,  sucking  or  absorbing  its  contents.  In  exercising 
concentration,  breathing,  and  physical  movements,  concen- 
trate the  mind  on  the  desired  result,  upon  given  organs,  and 
hold  it  on  them  and  the  result  desired,  following  the  breath 
mentally,  to  and  from  it,  with  a  passive  will ;  that  is,  a  will 
without  reason.  \\'ith  this  leading  process  of  mental  cul- 
ture, breathing-,  and  physical  movements,  one  can  acquire 
power  of  control  of  the  nerve  centers  governing  the  circula- 
tion of  the  blood  to  all  ])arts  of  the  bodv. 

POSITIONS  OF  THE  BODY   FOR  EXERCISES. 

277.  IMovements  ma}-  be  taken  in  many  different  positions. 
For  1)revity,  we  adopt  the  following:  Standing,  sitting,  lying, 
or  kneeling. 


10 


PLATE  B  I. 


STANDI  XG. 


In  this  position  tb.e  heels  are  together,  the  feet  forming 
a  right  angle,  arms  at  the  side,  l)ody  erect,  chin  np,  chest 
expanded,  and  abd(>men  contracted. 


142 


PLATE    B  I.       STANDI XG. 


PLATE    B  2.        SITTING. 


PLATE  B  2. 


SITTING. 


278.  Seated  in  a  chair,  feet  resting  easily  on  the  floor, 
eight  inches  apart,  hands  resting  on  the  knees,  pahns  down- 
ward, body  erect,  and  free  from  the  chair. 


145 


PLATE  B3. 


LYING. 


279.  In  this  position,  the  body  resting  on  the  sofa,  bed 
or  floor,  with  the  feet  and  head  on  a  hne.  with  the  chest 
expanded. 


146 


i 


PLATE    B  4.        KXEELIXG. 


PL  An-:  15  4- 


KN'KKF.IXr,. 


280.  In  this  position  the  weight  nf  the-  hndy  is  on  the 
knees,  which  rest  upon  a  pad,  head  and  l)od}-  erect. 

From  each  uf  these  positinns  we  may  form  m.an\-  sn1)di\'i- 
sions. 

281.  All  acti\e  and  actix'e-resistinj^-  nii»\ements  must  l)e 
taken  1)_\-  the  ])atient.  as  one  can  not  act  for  another. 

282.  ^Movements  are  acfii'c  when  taken  by  the  patient  alone, 
and  f^assii'c  when  ai:)plied  1)\"  an  o]:)erator  without  the  aid  of 
the  ])atient.     Resist iii^:^,  when  there  is  a  nutscnlar  resistance. 

283.  M()\-ements  mav  l)e  active-resisting  or  passi\'e-resist- 
ing".  When  they  are  acti\'e-resisting,  the  patient  is  acting 
against  his  own  muscular  tension.  Passive-resisting,  when 
made  against  the  resistance  of  another. 

284.  Rotation  is  a  circular  motion.  In'  which  the  ditlerent 
joints   are  brought   into   motion   within   their   normal    limits. 

285.  Activc-rotarw  when  the  rotation  is  made  b}'  the  pa- 
tient without  assistance. 

286.  Passirc-rofary,  when  the  rotation  is  made  on  the  pa- 
tient l)y  an  oi)erator. 

The  active  uKnements,  active-resisting  and  acti\'e-rotary, 
are  to  be  combined  with  the  breathing  and  psychic  energies, 
and  constitute  our  system  of 

COMBIXED    MENTAL   AND    PHYSICAL    CULTURE. 

287.  These  physical  mo\'ements,  com1)ined  simtiltanenusly 
with  the  psychic  act  of  hrcatJiing  and  ■zcilliiig  the  desire  of 
health,  is  a  conscious  means  of  supplying  the  blood  with  an 
increased  amount  of  oxygen  and  eliminating  carbon  dioxide, 
and  at  the  same  time  building  up  tlie  mental  forces  that  con- 
trol the  physical  organs.  A  systematic  practice  whicli  will 
produce  decided  and  curati\'e  etiects.  and  is  applicable  in  all 
degrees  of  health  exercises. 

149 


KOTATIOX. 


288.  'I'hc  rotations  are  used  to  stimulate  tlic  circulation 
ill  all  the  joints,  strengthen  the  lii^aments,  free  the  circula- 
tion, and  give  elasticity  to  the  tendons  of  the  muscles.  i)rodu- 
cing  a  suction  ]xnver  upon  the  \eins. 


PLATE  B5. 


ACTIVE   ROTATION    OF   FEET   IX    SITTING   POSITION. 

289.  Rotation  of  the  feet  may  be  performed  in  the  sitting 
]M)sition.  right  knee  crossed  over  the  left,  letting  the  linihs 
relax ;  inhale  an  abdominal  breath,  holding  it  while  the  foot 
is  rotated  from  outward  to  inward,  six  times,  and  rex'erse. 
Rejjeat  in  like  manner  with  the  left   foot. 


■50 


I'LATl-:    H   v        AC   ri\  K    KorAlloX     ()|-    FKKT    IX    SITTIXC     I'OSITIOX, 


PLATE   B  6.       ACTIVE   ROTATION    OF    FEET   IN    STANDING    POSITION. 


PLATE  B6. 

ACTIVE   ROTATION   OF   FEET   IX   STANDING   POSITION. 

290.  Standing-  on  the  left  foot  with  the  right  foot  extended 
in  front,  inhale  an  abdominal  breath,  holding  it  while  the 
foot  is  revolving  from  outward  to  inward,  six  times  and  re- 
verse. Repeat  in  like  manner  with  left  foot.  Exhale  slowly 
and  evenly. 


153 


PLATE  By. 

ACTIVE   ROTATIOX    OF    THE    KXEES. 

291.  With  the  rigiit  leg"  extended  forwcird  at  right  angles 
to  the  1)1  )d}-,  foot  suspended,  holding  the  thigh  still,  take  an 
abdominal  breath  and  a  health  thought  simnltaneouslv,  hold- 
ing the  breath  and  mind  on  the  intention:  rotate  the  foot  and 
lower  leg  six  times,  and  reverse,  while  retaining  the  breath. 
Ke])eat  in  like  manner  with  It^ft  knee. 


154 


PLATE    B  7.       ACTIVE    ROTATION    OE    THE     KXEES. 


PLATE    B  8.       ACTIVE    ROTATION    OF    THE    THIGH. 


PLATE  B8. 

ACTIVE    ROTATION    OF    TKE    THIGH. 

292.  Standiiis^-  on  the  left  foot,  extend  the  riglit  leg"  at 
a  right  angle,  as  in  the  preceding;  inhale,  hold  the  breath 
and  thought,  as  above.  Rotate  the  thigh  on  the  hip  six  times 
and  reverse.     Repeat  in  like  manner  with  left  thigh. 


157 
11 


PLATE  B9. 

ACTIVE  ROTATION  OF  THE  BODY  OX   THIGH-JOINT. 

293.  \\'ith  the  hands  on  the  hips,  thumbs  forward,  body 
erect.  l)reathe  and  hold  the  thought  as  before;  rotate  Ijody 
on  hip-joints  six  times  and  reverse.  Increase  the  number  of 
counts  each  day.  with  each  of  the  movements,  as  tlie  jxnver 
of  breathing-  increases  in  strength. 


i5« 


PLATE    B  9.       ACTIVE    ROTATIOX    OF    THE    BODY    OX    T 1 1 IC,  ll-.l  OIXT. 


PLAT1-:   B   lO.       ACTIVE    ROTATION    OF    THE    DOOV    OX    THE   >IIPS. 


PLATE  B  lo. 

ACTIVE    ROTATION    OF    THE    BODY    ON    THE    HIPS. 

294.  In  the  same  position,  and  breathing-  as  above.  l)encl 
the  body  forward  at  the  last  joint  of  tlie  spine.  Avhere  it  joins 
the  hips,  to  a  right  angle  to  the  hips,  and  mo\'e  the  body  in 
a  complete  circle,  from  right  to  left  and  from  left  to  right. 
six  times ;  exhale  and  inhale  before  reversing-. 


i6i 


PLATE  B  II. 

ACTIVE    ROTATION    NEAR    THE    MIDDLE    OF    THE    BACK 
AT    TWELFTH    DORSAL. 

295.  W'itli  the  body  erect,  hands  on  hips,  bend  the  back 
in  the  middle,  over  the  last  ribs;  inhale,  hold  the  breath,  and 
move  the  bodv  in  a  circle  as  before. 


162 


PLATE    B  If.       ACTIVE    KOTATIOX    XEAR    THE    MIDDLE    OF    THE    HACK. 


PLATE    \i   12.       ACTIVE    ROTATION    OF    S 1 U  )ILI)KR-BLADE. 


PLATE  B  1 2. 

ACTIVE  ROTATION  OF  SHOULDER-BLADE  OX   BACK  AND 
SHOULDER-JOINT. 

296.  Stand  erect,  head  up.  arms  bv  the  sides  and  relaxed; 
take  a  deep  upper-chest  breath,  hold,  move  the  shoulder  in 
a  circular  motion  six  times,  reverse,  exhale,  inhale,  and  repeat 
with  left  shoulder. 


165 


PLATE  B  13. 

ACTIVE   ROTATION    OF   THE    HANDS. 

297.  Stand  erect,  hands  at  the  sides,  right  liand  extended, 
npper-chest  inhalation;  rotate  the  hand  on  the  wrist  ten  times 
and  reverse,  exhale,  inhale,  and  re])eat  with  left  liand. 


166 


PLATE    B  13.       ACTIVE    ROTATION    OF    THE    HANDS. 


PLATE    B   14.       ACTI\1-:    ROTATION    OF    THE    ELBOW 


PLATE  B  14. 

ACTIVE   ROTATION    OF   THE   ELBOW. 

298.  With  the  l)()(lv  and  arm  in  the  same  position  as  be- 
fore, with  a  full-chest  inhalation,  rotate  right  forearm  on 
the   elbow.      Repeat   with   the   left    forearm. 


169 


PLATE  B  15. 

ACTIVE   ROTATION   OF   WHOLE   AR.AI. 

299.  W'itli  the  right  arm  at  the  side,  full-chest  breath  and 
holding-  It.  let  the  arm  swing  loosely  around  the  body  and 
head,  full  length,  eight  times,  reverse,  and  repeat  with  the 
left  arm. 


170 


PLATE    II    15.       ACTIVE    ROTATION    OF    WHOLE    ARM. 


PLATE    B  1 6.       ACTTVF.    ROTATION    OF    XECK    ON    SHOULDER. 


PLATE  B  1 6. 

ACTIVE    ROTATION    OF    NECK    ON    SHOULDER. 

300.  Stand  erect,  tlie  neck  1iml)er;  take  a  full  upper-chest 
breath,  and  hokl ;  rotate  the  neck  on  the  shoukler,  from  right 
to  left,  six  times,  and  reverse. 


12 


I'LATI':   15  17. 

ACTINF.    ROIATIOX    OK     IIKAI)    OX    NECK. 

301.  Stand  erect,  with  the  u])i)er  ])art  nf  the  neck  hnil)er. 
'I'ake  a  fnh  npper-chest  l)reath,  and  hold  it.  R(jtate  the 
head  on  the  neck  six  times,  re\erse,  and  exhale. 

The  aim  of  these  rotations  is  to  give  the  patient  the  power 
dt"  treating"  himself;  to  lengthen  and  shorten  the  ^■eins.  so 
as  to  ])rodnce  a  sticking"  of  their  contents,  thus  stimul.'iting" 
the  circulation  in  the  joints,  removing"  foreign  matter  from 
them  and  giving  strength  to  the  heart,  in  the  meantinie  cul- 
tivating" the  mental  powers  to  work  in  harmon}'  \\ith  the 
physical   mo\-ements. 

ACTIVE-RESISTING    EXERCISES. 

302.  Active-resisting  exercises  are  the  best  to  obtain  the 
highest  degree  of  psychic  effect  upon  the  physical  organs, 
because  they  combine  the  psychic  l)reath  with  the  physical 
tension  or  pressure  and  squeezing  processes  on  the  dee])- 
scated  blood-vessels,  muscles  and  nerves  of  the  extremities, 
thereby  setting  up  a  renewed  vitalizing  process. 

These  exercises  may  be  taken  in  a  sitting,  reclining  or 
standing"  position. 

The  standing  position  gives  the  most  freedom  of  muscular 
action. 

^^"e  will  give  only  the  standing  position.  Any  one  learn- 
ing the  principles  in\olved  can  apply  the  movements  in  any 
position. 

303.  First,  assume  the  chosen  ])osition  (Plate  B  i,  B2  or 
1>  3  )  :  relax  the  bocly  mentall}-;  release  all  tension. 

In  this  position  you  are  ready  to  begin  the  resisting"  ex- 
ercises. 

Xext.  exercise  concentration  and  breathe  by  concentrating 
the  mind  on  the  a.ct  antl  Ijegin  to  inhale  slowly,  letting 
the  cliest  expand  downward  and  the  abdomen  outward:  when 
174 


n.ATE    B   17.       ACT1\  K    RolATIOX    OF    HEAD   ON    NECK. 


PLATE    B     i8a.       standing     POSITION. 


chest  ami  ahdnnicn  arc  full,  retain  llic  hrcatli.  and  slowly 
exhale.  (Irawins^-  the  center  <»f  the  alxloincn.  or  na\el.  in  as 
tar  as  possible.  Inhale,  hold,  and  exhale  the  hreath  at  tlie 
ratio  of  two.  three  and  one.  Kepeat  the  hreathitiLi-  rh\thnnc- 
ah\-  six  times. 


PLATE  B  I 8a. 


STAXDIXG    POSTTTOX. 


Assume  the  standing-  position  (  Plate  B  i).  hands  at  the 
sides,  palms  downward,  lingers  extended,  and  mtiscles  of  the 
fingers  and  arms,  to  the  elbow,  marie  tense. 


177 


PLATE  B   I  8b. 

STANDI XC.   POSITION    (CONTINUED). 

Raise  the  hands  to  a  level  with  the  shoulder  and  in  front 
of  the  face;  while  inhaling  a  dee])  abdominal  l)reath.  mentally 
conducting-  the  breath  in  at  one  nostril  to  the  navel  region, 
while  the  palms  of  the  hands  are  turned  upward,  holding  the 
muscles  of  the  arm  and  hand  tense. 


178 


PLATE  B    i8b.       standing   I'OSITION    (CONTINUED), 


PLATE  B    l8c.       STAXDIXC,    POSl  IK  ).\    (  C(  ).\'ri  X  T  Kl '  ) 


I'LA'lE   U  i8c. 

STAXDIXC.   I'OSITION    (  COXTl.N  T  KD)  . 

Slowlv  close  the  hands  and  arms  lightly  against  the  chest, 
against   tension. 

Relax  the  liands  and  arms  while  exhaling  slowly  and 
easih-;  repeat  this  exercise  three  times.  Increase  as  power  is 
gained. 

This  is  one  of  the  most  wonderfnl  exercises  for  gaining 
mental  and  ])h\sical  strength,  and  control  of  mind  and  body. 

While  taking  the  resisting  exercises,  the  mind  and  breath 
can  be  directed  to  any  organ  of  the  bod}-.  To  do  this  re- 
cptires  a  stead\'  an<l  slow  practice  and  exercise  of  energetic 
power,  will  and  force,  for  several  weeks,  and,  sometimes, 
months;  bnt  it  is  an  exercise  for  mind  and  body  that  will  bene- 
ht  one  to  take.  It  should  always  be  taken  with  i)atience, 
and  care  not  to  f)vertax  the  system. 

Actixe-resisting  exercises  are  taken  for  the  long  muscles 
and  bodv  organs. 


tSi 


PLATE  B  19A. 

LI\-ER,    SPLEEN    AND    BOWELS. 

304.  Body  erect,  feet  ten  inches  a])art,  hands  by  the  sides, 
take  a  deep,  long-  inspiration  (abdominal),  holding  the  breath 
clown  against  the  diaphragm  ( this  requires  the  exercise  of 
great  will  force),  and  the  mind  on  the  navel  region  (solar 
plexus)  ;  bend  the  body  forward  at  the  last  joint  of  the  back, 
and  return. 


182 


PLATE     B     I9A.       LIVER,     SPLEEN     AND     BOWELS. 


PLATE    B     I9B.       LIVKR.     Sl'LKKX     AND     BOWELS     (  COXTIXIED). 


PLATE  B  19B. 

LIVER.    SPLEEN    AND    BOWELS    (COXTINUEn). 

Bend  to  a  position  backw  ard  as  far  as  can  l3e  reached ;  re- 
peat this  in  rapid  snccession  six  times.  s\vayin|L;'  the  body 
backward  and  forward  as  far  as  it  can  be  carried. 

This  is  a  good  exercise  to  take  before  retiring,  or  u\n)n 
rising  in  the  morning,  also  when  there  is  torpidity  of  the 
liver,  spleen  or  bowels. 

305.   For    passive    movements,    see    chapter    on    "(leneral 
Treatment."  pars.   197,   198.   199.  200  and  201. 


185 


Chapter  XIV. 

H\i)R()'riii':kAPV. 

306.  rerlia])s  there  is  no  one  system  of  the  art  of  heahng 
tliat  is  so  wide  in  its  range,  and  yet  so  sj^ecitic  in  its  appli- 
cation, and  so  ])otent  for  good  nv  e\il.  as  that  of  Rational 
Hydrothera]))'.  Water  is  nature's  soUent  for  solids,  working 
in  its  own  mysterions  way;  it  is  her  cleanser  and  ])nrifier, 
and  when  ai)plie(i  to  the  earth  and  all  her  ])rodnctions  along 
with  the  radiations  of  the  great  solar  snn.  hecomes  her  seda- 
tive, tonic,  stimulant  and  heautifier.  \\'ater  is  without  (jues- 
tion  the  most  ancient  of  all  remedial  agents  for  disease.  It 
is  always  found  ready  at  hand  in  e\ery  household,  and  may 
be  relied  upon  as  a  remedy  \\  Inch  adapts  itself  to  almost  every 
imaginable  condition.  No  other  agent  is  so  capable  of  carry- 
ing with  it  the  princijjles  of  heat  and  cold,  producing  so  great 
a  varietv  of  phvsiological  effects,  hence  none  so  adaptable 
for  meeting  the  N'arious  conditions  in  the  sick  room  in  emer- 
gencies and  in  accidents. 

\\'ater  being  so  specific  in  its  application,  and  so  wide 
in  its  range,  we  can  only  treat,  in  this  small  \olume,  a  few 
of  the  l)est  and  most  practical  methods  of  ai)plying  heat  and 
cold  through  the  agency  of  water.  Our  Siamen.e  methods  of 
treating  diseases  with  water  are  the  most  effectixe,  simple 
and  /^radical  for  home  use  that  we  are  al)le  to  select  from 
the  man}'  methods.  They  are:  Siamene  Aiedicated  Sweat 
Bath  No.  I,  Siamene  ]\Iedicated  Sweat  Bath  No.  2,  Siamene 
Medicated  Tul)  Sweat,  Siamene  Friction  Bath.  Fomentations, 
Siamene    Cold    l)ath,    and    Cold    and    Sweating    Compresses. 

Siamene   Medicated  Sweat    l>aths  N^o.   i   and   No.   2  have 

a  twofold  effect.      First,   they  excite  the  vasso-motor  nerves 

of  the  skin  to  dilate,  sending  their  op]iosite  contractive  effects 

into  the  internal   organs,   giving  them  tone.      Secondly,   they 

186 


]ini)K()T1ii:kai'V.  187 

(qicn  the  jxircs  i)f  the  skin,  ihcrchy  |)i"(  MhiciuL;'  a  free  eliiiiina- 
tioii  n\   furei^n  matter  tVi>iu  hnth  intei'iial  and  external  (ir_o-;ins. 

siAMKXE  .Mi-:i)UAi"i:i)  s\\  i:a  r   i'.atil   xo.    i. 

307.  The    most    desirable   a])])lianees    for    home   use   are   a      wimt  is 
S([uare    (Jnaker    cabinet,    two    alcohol    lam])s,    two    one-(|nart      .vccc-s.s.-,ri 
pans    (  j^'ranite  or  tin),   a   sitz  tub    (or   wash-tnb),   a  blanket, 

two  Titrkish  towels,  a  box  with  the  bottom  taken  off  and 
slats  nailed  o\"er  the  to]),  and  a  chair  with  a  ])erforated  bottom, 
covered  with  a  cloth. 

I'ill  the  pans  with  water,  add  Siamene  Uath  Powder  as  Mvtiiod  of 
directed  on  the  packai^e.  and  place  over  the  lig-hted  lamps,  raking- untii 
one  under  the  chair,  the  other  under  the  l)ox  for  the  feet  to 
rest  upon.  Ha\'e  the  patient  remo\e  all  clothing'  and  sit  on 
the  chair,  quickly  close  the  cabinet  to  confine  all  the  heat  and 
medicated  steam.  Drink  water  freely  at  the  temperature  most 
ag'i"eeable  to  the  patient.  Keep  a  cloth  wet  in  cold  or  ice 
water  applied  to  the  crown  of  the  head  while  in  the  sweat. 

The  patient  should  remain  in  the  sweat   from  fifteen  to      DumHou 
tliirty  minutes,  or  until  the  perspiration  stands  in  beads  on      of  swcnt 
the  forehead  and  face,  unless  there  should  be  a  rush  of  blood 
to  the  head  or  dizziness  that   the  cold   water  to   the  crown 
of  the  head  will  not  relieve. 

308.  Immediately  after  coming  out  of  the  sweat,  step  to      suz  rui, 
the    sitz    tub,    which    shoidd    be    three-fourths    full    of    water 

from  60  degrees  to  70  degrees  F.  If  the  patient  is  old. 
or  feeble,  commence  taking  the  sitz  at  70  degrees,  reducing 
the  temperature  one  or  two  degrees  at  each  succeeding  bath, 
until  65  to  60  degrees  is  reached.  Turn  your  back  to  the 
tul).  ])lace  r)ne  hand  on  each  side  of  it  to  sui)j)ort  the  l)od}'. 
and  sit  down,  not  allowing  the  water  to  go  abox'e  the  line  of 
the  eig'hth  dorsal  \'ertebra ;  this  embraces  all  of  the  centers  of 
the  solar  plexus.  Do  not  /^iif  the  hands  or  feet  into  the  eold 
zcater.  Immediately  after  sitting  in  the  tub,  ha\e  an  attend- 
ant place  a  blanket  around  the  entire  body,  except  the  head, 
to  keep  all  exjx^sed  parts  warm. 


l88  SIAMKXE     HOME    TRKAT.M  KXT. 

Diir.uiioii  Kcniain    in   tlie   sit/,   unti]    the   jjcrspiralinn    is   dry   on   the 

of  sitz  exposed  ])arls  of  the  hodv.  or  until  you  experience  a  ])leasant 
cooling  sensation  over  the  entire  body.  ( )n  rising-  t"roni  the 
sitz  tub,  rub  down  with  dry  Turkish  towels. 

Rewann   the   parts   exposed   to   cold    water    with   a    warm 

sponge  or  with   friction.      If  the  assistant   is  com])etent.   gixe 

a  thorough  general  treatment  (Chapter  X)  and  light  ap])lica- 

tion  of  e{|ual  parts  of  Xer\e  Food  and  alcohol  or  bay  rum. 

other  Devices  lu  the  al)sence  of  a  cabinet  and  alcohol  lamjjs.  two  blankets 

may  be  used  to  conhne  the  heat  and  medicated  steam  around 

the   jjatient.    and   one   three-gallon   pail    under   the   chair,    and 

a  milk  or  dish  pan,  w  ith  slats  across,  under  the  feet.      Fill  these 

with  boiling  water,  and  use  Siamene  Bath  Powder  as  directed. 

l^roceed  as  w  hen  using  the  caliinet. 

Manner  of  If  the  paticiit,   froui  auy  cause,  can  not  sit  on  a  chair,  a 

vsinff  a  Cot      cot  mav  be  used  by  placing  a  blanket  o\er  it  in  such  a  luanner 

as  to  touch  the  t^oor  on  all  sides,  thus  confining  the  heat  and 

steam:  place  the  patient  on  the  cot  and  spread  another  blanket 

over  him.      When   the  C(^t   is  used,   three  pots  of  hot   water 

should    he    used,    one    under    the    shoulders,    one    under    the 

hips,    and    the   third    under   the    feet.     To   use   the   cold    sitz 

in   such   cases,   the   patient   luav  be   suspended   in   a   sheet   or 

blanket,  su])ported  by  an  attendant  on  each  side. 

Hou- Often  In  chrouic  cases  these  medicated  sweats  should  l)e  taken 

to  Take     cvcrv    otlicr    (lay,    in    acute    cases,    ever}'    day.      People    in    a 

state  of  health  should  take  them  once  every  week  or  two. 

There  need  be  no  fear  of  taking  cold  after  these  baths; 
in  fact,  in  my  experience  of  thirtv  vears,  I  baxe  seen  nothing 
so  effecti\"e  in  breaking  u])  colds,  when  coiitracted,  and  ])re- 
venting  them,  and  kee])ing  ])eo])le  in  a  healthy  conditi<jn.  as 
this    bath. 

SI.X.MK.Xl-:     MKDIC.VTF.D    SWICAT    V,.\T\\     XO.    2. 

309.  'idle  Siamene  Medicated  Sweat  liath  Xo.  2  is  a])- 
plied  in  man}-  cases  where  it  is  not  con\enient  or  ])ossible  to 
take  the  Siamene  Medicated  Sweat  Path  .\o.   1.  an<l  will  give 


UNDKDIII  i:R.\1'N'. 


189 


excellent    results    in    all    cases.      It    is   more   easily   apijlied    to 
children   and   infants  than    Uath    Xn.    i. 

l-'ill  a  bath  tuh  with  water  from  T05  to  iio'de.s^rees  F.  Method  of 
Put  one  to  two  heaping  tablespoonfuls  of  Siamene  Bath  ''' '"'° 
Powder  in  a  cjuart  of  boiling  water  and  add  one  to  two  hand- 
fuls  of  common  salt;  stir  until  all  is  dissolved;  add  this  to 
the  water  before  getting  into  the  tub.  Remain  in  the  tub 
from  eight  to  fifteen  minutes.  Get  out  of  the  tub.  and.  with- 
out drying,  go  to  bed  between  warm  sheets,  and  co\er  with 
blankets.  Take  a  good  sweat,  and  sleep.  If  taken  at  bed- 
time, remain  in  bed  all  night.  On  rising,  take  a  cold  or 
tepid  sponge  bath  or  shower,  using  Siamene  Soap  to  cleanse 
the  bodv.  If  a  salt  glow  is  desired,  give  it  after  the  body 
has  cooled,  and  use  very  fine,  dry  salt. 

SIAMEXE     MEIHCATED    TUB    SWEAT. 


310.  A  wash-tub.  a  water  [)ail  or  foot  tub,  a  1)lanket,  and  a     Necessities 
cold  sitz  are  necessary. 

To  three  gallons  of  boiling  water  add  Siamene  Bath  Method  of 
Powder,  and  continue  to  boil  for  three  minutes;  place  one-  Taking 
eighth  of  it  in  the  pail,  the  remainder  in  the  tub ;  add  enough 
hot  and  cold  water  to  make  each  three-fourths  full,  and  at 
a  temperature  from  100  degrees  to  no  degrees  F.  Have  the 
patient  remove  all  clothing,  sit  in  the  tub  with  the  feet  in 
the  water  pail ;  place  a  blanket  around  the  patient  to  keep 
out  all  cold  and  keep  in  the  medicated  steam  and  heat. 

Remain  in  the  sweat  from  ten  to  twenty  minutes,  or  until 
perspiration  appears  in  beads  on  the  forehead  and  begins  to 
run  down  the  sides  of  the  face. 

Arise  from  the  sweat  with  the  blanket  around  the  body, 
walk  to  the  cold  sitz  tub,  three-fourths  full  of  water  at  a 
temperature  from  60  degrees  to  70  degrees  F.  ( ])ar.  30(S). 
turn  the  back  to  the  tub.  and  sit  down,  remaining  with  the 
blanket   around   the   body    until   cooled   off.      (''Exceptions," 


Duration  of 
Sweat 


13 


IQO  SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

If  the  attendant  is  capable,  give  general  treatment  as  in 
the  cabinet  sweat;  otherwise  dry  the  body  thoroughly,  cover 
well,  and  rest  on  a  cot  or  bed  for  half  an  hour;  if  taken  at 
bedtime,  retire. 

SIAMENE    COLD   BATH    FOR    FEVERS. 

311.  Tlic  application  of  cold  to  influence  the  heart  and 
blood-vessels  has  as  wide  a  range  of  application  as  that  of 
heat,  and  the  mode  of  procedure  in  the  treatment  of  fevers 
Method  of  is  as  follows :  First,  a  bath  tub  containing  water  from  75 
Taking  degrees  to  85  degrees  F..  the  temperature  being  regulated  ac- 
cording to  the  vigor  and  strength  of  the  patient,  and  to  be 
diminished  one  degree  for  each  bath  until  65  degrees  is  reached. 
Old  and  feeble  people  and  infants  usually  require  the  highest 
temperature. 

In  the  absence  of  a  stationary  tub.  a  temporary  one  made 
of  boards  and  pitch,  or  a  portable  rubber  bath  tub.  may  be 
substituted  for  adults,  and  a  large  wash-tub  for  infants  and 
small  children.  Three  or  four  Turkish  towels,  a  pair  of 
sheets,  and  a  cjuart  cup  are  the  necessary  articles  of  this 
bath. 

Place  a  towel  wet  with  water  at  55  degrees  F.  around  and 
over  the  head ;  then  lift  the  patient  as  quickly  as  possible  from 
the  bed  into  the  tub.  containing  water  enough  to  come  around 
the  neck.  During  the  bath,  pour  water  over  the  head  and  back 
at  a  temperature  four  or  five  degrees  lower  than  the  water 
of  the  bath.  The  effect  of  this  will  be  to  keep  the  head  cool 
and  the  bath  at  the  original  temperature. 

When  the  patient  first  enters  the  bath,  he  often  experiences 
unpleasant  sensations  from  the  cold.'  Respiration  may  be 
gasping  and  difficult.  This  inconvenience  is  relieved  when  the 
cold  water  is  poured  over  the  head. 

During  the  time  of  taking  the  bath  there  should  be  a  con- 
tinuous rubbing  of  the  body.  Siamene  Movement  over  the 
fleshy  portions,  and  effluraging  the  chest  and  extremities.     It 


IIVDROTHF-KAI'V.  I9I 

recjuircs  two  attemlants,  one  to  pour  the  water  on  the  liead, 
the  other  to  niani])iilate  the  patient. 

At  the  tirst  synii)t(nns  of  secondary  chill  the  patient  shonkl 
be  immediately  removed  from  the  bath.  If  he  is  threatened 
with  collapse,  a  very  short  bath  should  be  administered  every 
hour  until  the  collapse  is  no  longer  threatened. 

The  duration  of  the  first  bath  should  be  from  five  to  seven      miration 
minutes,  increasing"  one  minute  each  bath  until  ten  to  twenty     "'  '^''^^'^ 
minutes  is  reached.     If  the  bath  is  for  the  old  and  feeble  or 
infants,  it  should  be  very  short  to  commence  with. 

After  the  bath  is  completed,  remove  the  patient  from  the 
tub  into  the  bed.  without  drying,  and  cover  with  a  sheet  and 
blankets.  Darken  the  room,  and  allow  the  patient  to  be  quiet, 
and  he  will  usually  go  to  sleep  and  perspire. 

The  effect  of  this  bath  is  to  reduce  the  temperature  of  the     affects 
body  one  to  two  degrees  F.  each  bath.     The  number  of  baths     ot  uath 
should  be  three  or  four  daily,  or  more  if  the  temperature  is 
obstinate.     These  baths  should  be  given  only  during  the  day, 
at  night-time  using  the  cold  compress  on  the  abdomen.      (See 
"Cold  Compress,"  par.  314.) 

This  treatment  should  begin  at  the  earliest  possible  stage 
in  the  disease,  or  as  soon  as  it  is  determined  that  the  case 
is  a  continued  form  of  fever,  regardless  of  the  height  of 
the  temperature,  and  should  be  given  continuously  throughout 
the  entire  course.  The  bath  is  needed  for  cleanliness,  tonic 
effects,  and  to  energize  and  sustain  the  heart. 

The  effect  of  this  bath  upon  the  circulation  is  as  follows : — 

1.  To  increase  general  vital  resistance. 

2.  To  energize  the  nerve  centers. 

3.  To  increase  the  activity  of  the  kidneys,  liver,  skin,  and 
lungs. 

4.  To  slow  the  pulse. 

5.  To  tonic  the  heart  and  improve  the  circulation  of  the 
blood. 

The  friction  applied  during  the  bath  dilates  the  blood-ves- 
sels, prevents  shivering,  and  assists  heat  elimination.    The  rub- 


192  SIAMEXE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

Ijiiii^-  nnisi  not  be  ^•i()lLMlt,  but  l)e  an  EtTllura<^e  movement  with 
the  Siamene  •\b>\ement  appHed  to  the  more  fleshy  portions  of 
the  body,  abdomen,  loins,  etc.  As  the  rubbing  prevents  shiver- 
ing, it  increases  the  effect  of  tlie  bath  in  lowering  the  tem- 
perature, and  enables  the  patient  to  endure  the  bath  a  longer 
period  of  time. 

The  cold  ap])lied  to  the  head  during  the  bath  causes  a  con- 
traction of  the  blood-vessels  of  the  brain  and  increases  the 
movement  of  all  the  fluids  throughout  that  organ,  thus  en- 
ergizing the  ner\e  centers  throughout  the  entire  body. 

S.\.LT  GLOW. 

Method  of  312.  Take  salt  of  medium   fineness  and  moisten  slightly. 

Taking  mj^^j  apply  to  the  surface  of  the  body,  rubbing  it  in  with 
friction-movements,  the  amount  of  pressure  being  adjusted  to 
the  sensation  of  the  patient.  Light-complexion,  thin-skinned 
people  should  have  light  pressure ;  dark-complexion,  thick- 
skinned  people,  heavier  pressure. 

The  patient's  skin  should  be  moistened  before  api)lying"  the 
salt.  \\'hile  the  l)est  time  to  take  the  glow  is  immediately  after 
a  Siamene  Medicated  Sweat  No.  i.  or  after  taking  a  warm  or 
cold  plunge  bath.  The  patient  should  lie  down  on  a  slab,  cot. 
table,  or  bed,  covered  with  a  sheet ;  also  spread  a  sheet  over 
the  patient  to  prevent  chilling. 

The  salt  is  then  applied  to  one  part  of  the  body  at  a  time. 
After  the  application,  the  salt  which  adheres  to  the  surface 
should  be  removed  by  a  c  id  or  tepid  shower,  spray,  or  sponge. 
The  patient  is  (|uickly  dried  and  thoroughly  rubbed  with  a 
rough  towel,  then  chafed  down  with  a  smooth,  dry.  hand 
Efflurage  moxement.  In  cases  of  feeble  patients,  a  dash  of  hot 
Avater  or  shower  should  be  gix'en  before  the  final  cold  ap- 
plication. 
EiTects  of  The  salt  glow  is  one  of  the  most  efticient  applications  to 

Salt  Glow  increase  circulation  witiiout  l^eat  pressure.  The  salt  acts  as  a 
chemical  irritant  to  the  sio'n.  in  addition  to  the  mechanical 
stimulation  produced  i)\-  t!ie  friction.      Tt  is  analogous  to  the 


IIVDKOTIIKKAI'V.  193 

sea  and  brine  bath  and  the  saline  spon.s^e,  with  bnt  Httic  thermic 
effect,  providing^  the  temperature  of  tlie  salt  when  applied  is 
not  tar  l)elow  the  temperature  of  the  body.  To  increase  its 
activity  to  a  hii;ii  (lci;rce.  .qive  it  ice  cold  by  moistening-  with 
ice  water  and  rubbing  briskly. 

The  salt  glow  is  a  tonic  measure  of  high  value;  it  is 
especially  valuable  in  feeble  patients,  poor  circulation,  and 
should  be  given  to  all  those  who  do  not  take  cold  l)aths 
well,  and  those  who.  after  taking  cold  baths,  do  not  rewarm 
the  body  readily.  It  should  be  given  to  all  those  who  have 
sluggish  skin,  indigestion,  constipation,  and  some  forms  of 
kidney  trouble. 

It  mav  be  used  to  considerable  advantage  following 
Siamene  Sweat  No.  i  in  cases  of  Bright's  disease  and  diabetes. 
The  salt  glow  must  be  avoided  in  eczema  and  most  other  skin 
diseases. 

SWEATING     COMPRESS. 

313,  The  sweating  compress  is  made,  first  by  folding  an      Method  of 
old  linen  or  cotton  cloth  six  or  eight  thicknesses,  sufficiently      Making 
large  to  cover  the  part  to  be  treated ;  wring  it  from  cold  water,      (-ompress 
and   apply  it  to  the   part.     Secondly,   lay  a   dry  cloth   three 
inches   larger   each    way   over   the   wet   one.     Thirdly,    apply 
two  or  three  thicknesses  of  paper,  oil  silk,  or  rubber  over  that. 
Fourth,   a  bandage  over  all,   and  bind   snugly  tight.     Wear 
this  all  night.     In  the  morning  remove  and  bathe  the  parts 
with  cold  or  tepid  water. 

This  compress  will  sweat  the  parts,  remove  inflammations 
and  accumulations  in  deep-seated  organs. 

The  use  of  the  sweating  compress  should  always  be  pre- 
ceded l)y  a  thorough  general  treatment  to  equalize  the  general 
circulation. 

This  compress  applied  to  the  stomach  is  especially  bene-      ^yi^^^  ^^  ^^^ 
ficial  in  all  cases  of  epilepsy,  infantile  diarrhea,  cholera  morbus,      the  compress 
and   all    forms  of  inflammation   of  the   stomach.      It   is   also 
beneficial  in  cancers,  all   forms  of  infiammation  of  the  li\-er. 


194 


SIAMKXE     HOME    TREATMENT. 


bowels,  uterus.  lun<^s.  and  joints  when  applied  over  the  part 
affected. 

COLD   COMPRESS. 

Method  ot  314.   The  cold   c<»mi)ress   is   made  by    folding-   linen   three 

Making  Qi-  f,)i,]-  thicknesses  large  enough  to  cover  the  part  to  l)e 
treated,  wrung  from  cold  water,  temperature  55  degrees  to  70 
degrees  F.  It  shottld  be  changed  frequently  every  five  or  ten 
minutes,  or  often  enough  to  keep  the  surface  and  compress 
cold.  The  patient  should  drink  large  quantities  of  water  in 
sips,  slowly  and  frequently. 

This  cooling  process — that  is,  the  time  of  changing  the 
compress,  and  the  frecjuency  of  drinking — should  be  gradually 
diminished  as  the  temperature  of  the  body  cools  down. 
The  Effect  This  cooling  process  is  a  powerful  revulsion  measure.     It 

is  one  of  the  most  valuable  of  all  measures  in  controlling  the 
circulation  of  the  internal  organs  of  the  body  through  the  in- 
fluence of  the  capillary  circulation  of  the  skin.  \\'hen  the 
Lold  compress  is  applied  to  the  skin,  causing  contraction  of 
the  surface  vessels,  it  dilates  the  deeper-lying  vessels  that  are 
in  relation  to  the  surface.  This  in  time  affects  the  internal 
organ  supplied  by  the  reflex  ner\-es,  and  keeps  them  in  a  con- 
tinuous state  of  tonic  contraction.  The  cold  compress  is  in- 
dicated in  fever  arising  from  internal  congestion  of  the 
viscera,  brain,  etc.,  and  all  local  fe\-ers. 
Duration  of  Tlic  cold  comprcss  should  never  be  continued  long  enough 

Cold  Compress  to  producc  uumbuess  of  the  skin,  as  is  often  done  in  cases  of 
brain  and  spinal  fevers.  When  the  cold  compress  produces 
chilliness,  this  must  be  overcome  by  ihe  application  of  heat, 
triction,  or  l)y  the  Siamene  Ab)vement  to  the  spine. 


FOMENTATIONS. 

315.  'J'hese  are  ai)])lications  of  hot  compresses,  usuallv 
thick,  folded  flannel  cloths  applied  a  number  of  times  in  suc- 
cession at  a  high  temperature.  It  is  essentially  a  local  vapor 
bath. 


iivi)R(»thi:rapv.  195 

The  material  may  be  a  piece  of  woolen  blanket,  a  large,      h-cfinisitcs 
flat  sponge,  a  thick  woolen  cloth,  or  a  thick  mass  of  cotton 
cloth. 

The  compress  should  be  large  enough,  when  applied, 
to  extend  over  and  cover  several  inches  outside  the  surface 
affected.  Sometimes  the  pain  may  be  in  the  stomach,  and 
the  compress  to  relieve  it  be  rec[uired  on  the  back,  and  like- 
wise with  any  other  part  or  organ. 

SIAMENE    FRICTION    BATH. 

316.  The  Siamene  Friction  Bath  is  taken  by  the  male  as     -^la'e 
follows:  Prepare  a  large  pail  or  small  tub  absolutely  full  of      Trcdimcnt 
cold  w^ater;  temperature  from  50  degrees  to  65  degrees  F., 

the  colder  the  water  within  this  range  of  temperature,  the 
more  effective  the  results :  also  provide  a  coarse  linen  cloth 
the  size  of  a  small  napkin.  Place  the  vessel  at  a  proper 
height.  Grasp  the  male  organ  in  the  left  hand,  drawing  the 
prepuce  (foreskin)  well  over  the  gland;  holding  it  thus, 
immerse  hand  and  organ  into  the  water,  permitting  the 
scrotum  to  remain  outside  the  bucket.  While  holding  the 
organ  in  the  water  and  foreskin  over  the  gland,  gently  lave 
the  foreskin  from  fifteen  to  thirty  minutes.  Then  fold  around 
it  a  warm,  soft  cloth  or  cotton,  and  retire,  if  at  bedtime ;  if 
not.  take  brisk  exercise  until  the  entire  body  is  rewarmed. 

317.  The  same  general  instructions  are  applicable  to  the     Female 
female,  with  this  exception.     The  lady  sits  on  a  board  placed      Treatment 
across  the  vessel  of  water,  with  knees  spread  apart,  an'd  raises 

the  cloth  up  and  down,  letting  the  water  drip  on  the  pubic 
arch,  drawing  the  cloth  up  and  down  against  the  external 
genitals,  producing  cold  friction. 

This  bath  has  the  most  wonderful  electrical  effect  on  all 
the  pelvic  organs  of  any  remedy  known  to  the  author,  and  is 
highly  beneficial  in  all  cases  of  inflammation  of  the  generative 
organs,  cellular  tissues  of  the  pelvis,  rectum,  bladder,  and  kid- 
neys.    It  acts  as  a  cooling  and  refreshing  tonic. 


196  SIAMENE     IIO.MK     TRKATMKXT. 

This  is  one  of  the  very  best  treatments  tliat  i)re^nant 
women  can  take  in  the  latter  montlis  of  j^estation.  It  tonics 
the  circnlation  of  the  uterus,  and  strengthens  the  Hgaments 
that  support  the  same,  ))re])arini;-  tlie  patient  for  natural  and 
easy  labor. 

It  is  especially  recommended  for  tired,  weak,  and  prolapsed 
uterus,  oxarian  inflamniation,  inflammation  of  the  testicles, 
lower  bowels,  gonorrhea  in  l^oth  male  and  female,  all  forms 
of  sexual  weakness,  chronic  ulcers  and  chronic  inflammation 
in  any  part  of  the  body. 

This  bath  should  be  taken  four  to  eight  times  a  day,  as  in- 
dications call   for. 

THE    PHILOSOPHY    OF    THIS    BATH. 

Nature  never  makes  a  mistake  in  constructing  her  temi)les. 
There  is  but  one  thing  in  the  art  of  man  that  can  be  com- 
pared to  the  anatomy  of  the  human  system,  and  that  is  the 
building  of  King  Solomon's  temjjle.  In  the  building  of  this 
temple,  there  were  many  thousands  of  workmen  employed, 
many  kinds  of  timbers  and  stones  entered  into  its  structure. 
They  were  all  prepared  for  their  several  places  in  the  forests 
and  (|uarries,  and  brought  together  and  placed  in  position  in 
this  great  structure,  every  piece  of  timber  and  every  stone 
fitting  so  exactly  that  it  all  appeared  to  be  the  handiwork  of 
God. 

Whether  each  man  is  of  God  or  is  an  independent 
identity  it  matters  not,  for  in  his  physical  structure  every  part 
of  the  human  system  is  perfectly  adapted  to  every  other  part. 

Man  is  both  positive  and  negative ;  that  is,  he  is  double, 
two  minds,  conscious  and  unccMiscious,  two  hemispheres  of 
brain,  two  hands,  two  feet,  two  eyes,  etc.,  with  the  power  of 
reproduction  of  both  positive  and  negative  conditions. 

There  are  two  systems  of  nerves — motor  and  sensorial — 
tliat  supply  and  preside  over  the  functional  powers  of  all  these 
organs  and  even  over  each  cell  that  enters  into  the  composition 
of  them. 


HYDRO  Til  KRAl'V.  197 

The  functions  of  the  sensorial  nerves  enter  into  the  fiin(hi- 
niental  laws  of  this  most  womlerfnl  treatment,  every  cell 
in  the  bodw  e\en  in  the  extreme  end  of  a  liair,  hcin^-  su])i)lie(l 
with  these  s_\nii)athetic  hhers.  They  must  he  thus  supplied 
or  the  kind  could  not  be  reproduced. 

There  is  no  other  surface  of  the  body  of  ecjual  area  that 
is  so  richly  endowed  with  the  supply  of  these  sympathetic  nerve 
filaments  as  the  prepuce  of  the  male  and  the  clitoris  of  the 
female.  \\'e  have  ample  evidence  of  this  in  sexual  congress, 
^vhen  a  complete  imion  of  all  the  cells  of  the  body  takes  place. 

\\'ith  this  mechanical  arrangement  and  the  physiological 
function  of  the  same,  we  are  enabled  to  reach  every  cell  sympa- 
thetically through  the  friction  bath,  it  being  the  exact  oi)])osite 
of  sexual  union. 

A   DOUCHE. 

A  douche  ma}-  be  made  in  one  of  two  ways :  A  can,  pot.  Douche 
or  a  vessel  of  any  description  having  an  opening  on  one  side 
near  the  bottom  small  enough  to  admit  a  rubber  hose; 
suspend  it  the  requisite  height ;  or  it  may  be  a  pot,  pail,  can, 
or  any  other  vessel  placed  at  the  rer|uisite  height,  and  eight 
or  ten  feet  of  hose.  \\'rap  the  hose  six  or  eight  times  with 
a  wire  and  bend  it  in  the  middle  of  the  wrapping,  allowing 
one  end  of  the  hose  to  reach  the  bottom  of  the  vessel  (  syphon). 


Chapter  XV. 


SIAMENE  REMEDIES. 


How  It  Acts 


sinmene  318.   Siamcne  Nerve  Food  is  prepared  from  the  active  prin- 

xerxe  Food     ciples    of   Vegetable   compounds.     It   is    a    predigested    food, 

especially  valuable  for  the  nerve  and  brain  tissues.     It  contains 

no   fats  or  other  substances  that  the  skin  does  not  readily 

absorb. 

The  human  body  is  strangely  and  wonderfully  created, 
with  all  its  component  parts  adjusted  and  perfecth'  adapted 
one  toward  the  other,  the  brain  and  nervous  system  governing 
the  entire  body. 

Every  nerve  center  (par.  6i)  in  the  body  sends  branches 
to  the  surface,  and  there  divides  many  times  into  fine  filaments, 
permeating  the  skin. 

The  Siamene  Nerve  Food,  possessing  the  properties  of  a 
food  and  stimulating  tonic,  is  applied  to  the  skin  with  the 
manipulative  movements. 

Thus  applied,  it  acts  as  a  food  to  the  nerves  and  a  stim- 
ulant to  the  brain  and  nerve  centers,  thereby  invigorating  and 
giving  renewed  activity  to  all  the  internal  organs  through 
these  fine  nerve  filaments  and  increasing  the  strength  of  the 
absorbent  vessels.  In  this  way  it  becomes  a  stimulant  and 
nutrient  tonic,  and  restorer  of  shattered  and  weak  nerve  force. 

319.  Siamene  Catarrh  Cure  is  a  peculiar  product  of 
nature,  composed  of  a  number  of  chemical  elements  combined 
tlu'ough  the  agency  of  heat  and  volcanic  pressure. 

It  is  one  of  the  most  efficient  bactericides,  and  is  applicable 
in  all  forms  of  catarrh  in  any  portion  of  the  body. 

320.  Siamene  Fruit  Laxative  is  a  combination  of  fruit 
juices  and  bactericides,  which  causes  a  perfectly  natural  action 

198 


Siamene 
Cntnrrh  Cure 


Siamene 
Fruit  Laxative 


SIAMKNE    R1:M1£L)IES. 


199 


Laxative 
I.ozeiiiies 


of  the  alimentary  canal,  cleansing  it  from  all  waste  without 
producing  any  of  those  harmful  results  following  most  physic 
remedies,  at  the  same  time  destroying  all  deadly  germs  that 
niav  infest  this  part  of  the  body. 

321.  Siamene  Laxative  Lozenges  are  composed  of  tonic  sinmene 
laxative  remedies,  combined  with  bactericides.  They  have  a 
peculiarly  selective  power  in  giving  tone  to  the  nerves  of  the 
aHnientary  canal  and  a  destructive  power  to  all  bacteria  which 
produce  fermentation,  irritation,  congestion,  and  inflamma- 
tion of  the  mucous  coats  of  the  intestines.  They  are  admis- 
sible in  all  cases  of  constipation,  and  especially  applicable  to 
children,  because  they  are  pleasant  and  easily  taken. 

322.  Siamene  LTerine  Suppositories  contain  all  the  healing  siRmene  uteri 
properties  necessary  in  such  a  remedy.  Its  ingredients  are  svppositones 
absorbents,  tonics,  astringents,  eliminators,  and  anodynes,  and 

are  the  most  efficient  that  the  medical  profession  has  been  able 
to  produce.  ' 

323.  Siamene  Uterine  Tonic  is  composed  of  remedies  that 
have  a  specific  and  selective  action  upon  the  nerve  centers  and 
the  tissues  of  the  generative  system  in  both  male  and  female. 
It  gives  tone  to  the  tired  and  wornout  nerves,  improving  the 
circulation  of  the  blood  to  the  parts  affected,  supplying  them 
with  an  increased  amount  of  nutrition.  When  administered 
luider  the  specific  directions  in  the  paragraphs  treating  uterine 
diseases,  it  never  fails  to  produce  positively  good  results. 

324.  Siamene  Uterine  Tablets  are  composed  of  bactericides 
that  have  a  specific  action  upon  all  the  bacteria  that  infest  these 
channels,  producing  a  deadly  effect  upon  them.  This  remedy 
selects  out  the  germs  that  are  peculiar  to  these  anatomical 
parts,  and  it  will  always  be  found  reliable,  simple  and  safe. 

325.  The  gono-cocci,  the  specific  germ  producing  the  dis-     siamene 
ease  in  the  male  and  female  called  gonorrhea,  has  always  been     Gonorrhea 
recognized  by  the  medical  profession  as  a  hard  germ  to  des-     ^'^p^'"^" 
troy,  it  being  capable,  by  its  migratory  power,  of  colonizing 
in   almost   any   part   of  the   human  body.     We   have   in   the 
Siamene  Gonorrhea  Specific  a  remedy  that  will  never  fail  to 


Siamene 
Uterine  Tonic 


Siamene 
Uterine  Tablets 


200 


SIAMKXl!:     HOME     TREATM  EXT. 


Siameiie 

Jiacterin 

Killer 


destroy  the  gono-cocci   when  taken   under  tlie  specific  (hrec- 
tions  as  outlined  in  par.  }^jy.  on  "( ionorrhea." 

326.  When  the  physical  constitution  becomes  worn  and 
bankrupt,  the  ner\'ous  system  shattered,  the  diii^estive  system 
weak,  and  the  heart  anemic  and  tla])by.  the  blood  at  once  be- 
comes fertile  soil  for  not  only  one  but  \'arious  species  of 
germs  that  sap  the  life  blood.  In  all  such  cases  the  human 
will,  in  a  measure,  forsakes  its  ow'n  environment ;  then  there 
is  not  sufficient  of  this  most  wonderful  divine  agent  to  hold 
the  back  bones  in  place  and  su])ply  the  spinal  cord  and  nerves 
with  sufficient  resisting  i)ower  to  ox'ercome  the  attacks  of 
bacteria  that  swarm  around  and  infest  the  weak  organs  of 
the  constitution.  For  all  thus  afflicted  we  present  the  Siamene 
Bacteria  Killer,  which  contains  all  the  elements  required  to 
effect  a  permanent  cure.  It  is  composed  of  the  best  general 
[jactericides  that  we  have  been  able  to  select  from  the  manv  in 
the  vegetable  kingdom,  chemically  combined  in  such  a  manner 
as  to  meet  the  indications  where  a  tonic  remedy  is  required. 
Siamene  327.  Siamcue  Antiseptic  Wash  is  especially  adapted  to  in- 

Antiseptic      flammations  of  the  skin   and  muscles,   such  as  stings,  bites, 
Wash      l)i-uises,  cuts,  burns,  chapped  hands,  cczcuia,  tetter,  etc.      Being 
a   superior   agent,    it   relieves   pain   and   soreness   almost    in- 
stantaneously.    Barb-wire  and  all  other  cuts  and  bruises  on 
animals  yield  readily  under  its  free  use. 

328.  Siamene  Rheumatic  Oil  is  composed  of  elements  that 
are  combined  in  such  a  manner  as  to  produce  results  that  no 
single  remedy  known  will  produce.  It  penetrates  the  skin 
and  muscles,  drawing  foreign  matter  irom  them.  It  has  both 
ail  endosmosis  and  exosmosis  power.  It  has  a  magical  effect 
upon  inflamed,  painful,  and  enlarged  muscles,  joints  and  bones, 
and  is  applicable  in  all  forms  of  rheumatism  of  muscles  and 
joints,  sciatica,  internal  tumors  and  swellings  in  any  part  of 
the  body.  In  sore  throat,  where  the  glands  are  enlarged,  and 
in  diphtheria,  it  has  no  i)eer. 
siameue  KUeu-  329.   Siameiie  Rheumatic  (ierni  Killer  is  com])osed  of  rem- 

maticOenii Killer      cdics  that  are  spcci fic  .mtidotes  for  the  micro-organism  which 


Siamene 

Rheumatic 

Oil 


siA.M  i:\i-:  iii-:MKi)ii': 


20 1 


Simiicnc 

Pain 

Litiinierit 


Siainene 
Hath  I'owder 


]n"ti(liicc'S  rheuniatisin  and  Lj"i»iit.  and  can  be  relied  npon  to 
destroN-  and  eradicate  this  hacillns  in  all  acute  cases  when  taken 
in  connection  w  ith  general  spinal  treatment  and  Sianiene  Sweat 
Bath  X(\   1. 

Sianiene  Diabetic  Cure,  being'  a  bactericide,  exerts  its  in-      sinmcnc 
iluence  to  destroy  th.e  li\inj^-,  breeding  fungus  that  is  in  the      i>i(ii>etic 
blood   of   the   diabetic    patient.      When    it   is   administered    in      '-'"''' 
connection  with  the  mechanical  manipulaii\e  treatment,  good 
results  may  confidently  be  expected. 

Siamene  I'ain  l^inimiMit  is  composed  of  the  most  active 
and  difftisive  oils,  and  is  beneficial  in  all  local  pains,  super- 
ficial or  dieep.  It  must  be  ai)])lie(l  with  heat  if  successful  re- 
sults are  obtained.  When  so  applied,  it  acts  as  a  stimulant  to 
increase  the  circulation  of  the  blood  and  as  an  anodyne  to 
the  ner\-es.  relieving  all  pain. 

330.  The  skin  being  the  third  great  sewerage  system  of 
the  body,  it  requires  an  acti\-e  agent  having  specific  influence 
upon  it  to  carry  off  waste  materials.  The  Siamene  Bath 
Powder  is  the  most  effective  for  accomplishing  this  purpose 
of  anything  known  to  the  author. 

331.  Siamene  Soap  contains  as  its  active  principle  a  bac- 
tericide that  will  tlestroy  all  germs  affecting  the  scalp,  ])ro- 
ducing  inflammation  of  the  hair  follicles,  causing  falling  hair, 
dandruff  and  other  scalp  diseases ;  also  all  germs  affecting 
the  skin  which  produce  eczema,  both  soft  and  dry.  This  soap 
is  very  eft"ecti\'e  in  cleansing  all  sores  before  dressing  with 
Siamene  Antiseptic  Wash. 

332.  Siamene  Dyspepsia  Tablets  are  composed :  First,  of     siametw 
remedies  that  destroy  the  bacteria  of  the  stomach  which  cause     Dyspepsia 
fermentation  and  gases:  second,  of  remedies  that  increase  the      '^^^'^^^ 
secretions  of  the  gastric  and  intestinal  juices  ;  third,  of  remedies 

that  tonic  the  nerves  of  the  stomach;  fourth,  of  remedies  that 
promote  the  solvability  of  foods,  bringing  them  into  an  easy 
state  of  digestion.  They  are  indicated  in  all  cases  of  fermen- 
tation and  mal-assimilation  of  foods,  and  d\-spepsia. 


Sianiene  Soap 


202 


STAMEXE     HOME     TREATMENT. 


Sianierie 
Diuretic 
^lixtiire 


siarncrie  K'cctfii  333.  In  all  Tcclal  diseases  is  found  a  s^erni  that  is  peculiar 

stippositaries  tc'  that  regioii,  and  these  germs  must  be  destroyed  if  you  ex- 
pect to  effect  a  complete  cure.  The  Siamene  Rectal  Supposi- 
tions are  composed  of  the  best  germicides,  astringents,  and 
tcMiics.  are  highly  absorptive,  feed  the  nerves,  and  give  strength 
to  the  walls  of  the  intestines.  These  suppositories  combine 
all  that  can  be  desired  to  effect  a  permanent  cure  in  all  forms 
of  rectal  diseases,  when  combined  with  the  other  Siamene 
treatments. 

334.  Siamene  Diuretic  INIixture  embraces  bactericides, 
stimulants  and  tonics  that  are  peculiarly  well  adapted  to 
meet  the  indications  in  all  forms  of  kidney  and  bladder  trouble, 
acute  and  chronic.  When  it  is  taken  in  connection  with 
Siamene  Medicated  Baths  and  Siamene  manipulations  in  the 
various  forms,  absolute  success  can  be  expected,  where  the 
constitution  is  sufficiently  strong  to  support  the  treatments. 
Dry  Cupping  335.  Dry  cupping  is  one  of  the  best  mechanical  means  we 

have  in  the  household  for  relieving  internal  congestion 
and  pain.  To  apply,  take  a  small  tumbler  or  teacup  hav- 
ing a  smooth  edge,  a  piece  of  cotton  cloth  or  paper  folded 
the  size  of  an  ordinary  thimble;  saturate  same  with  kero- 
sene or  alcohol,  with  a  pair  of  shears  or  something  with 
which  to  grasp  it.  Bare  the  surface  to  be  cupped,  fit 
tlie  cup  on  the  surface  to  see  that  there  are  no  air-spaces 
before  cupping;  then  take  the  cup  in  one  hand,  with  the 
shears  in  the  other,  grasp  the  saturated  cloth  or  paper,  and 
touch  it  to  a  burning  match  or  candle.  When  ignited,  drop 
ir  into  the  glass  and  quickly  apply  the  cup  to  the  surface  to 
be  cupped.  If  the  cup  adheres  evenly,  closing  out  all  air 
(air  tight),  it  will  immediately  take  hold  of  the  skin,  sucking 
all  the  fleshy  parts  into  the  vessel,  drawing  all  congested  blood 
from  the  internal  organs  to  the  surface.  After  it  has  re- 
mained on  from  three  to  seven  minutes,  take  the  glass  in  one 
hand,  placing  the  thumb  of  the  other  hand  on  the  flesh  near 
the  glass,  then  turn  the  glass  to  one  side,  allowing  air  to  pass 
under  it,  and  the  glass  will  come  off  easily.     After  the  cup 


SI  AM  EXE    REMEDIES.  2O3 

is  removed,  bathe  the  surface  cupped  with  Sianiene  Autiseptic 
Wash. 

SIAMENE  UNLEAVENED  BREAD. 

336.  Grahaui  flour  and  cold  water,  or  two  parts  of  whole 
wheat  or  graham  and  one  part  of  oatmeal  and  water,  made 
into  an  unleavened  sponge.  Use  no  salt  or  seasoning  of  any 
kind.  This  should  be  kneaded  until  the  mass  has  acquired  a 
light,  spongy  condition ;  then  roll  to  one-fourth  inch  in  thick- 
ness, and  cut  into  strips,  place  in  a  pan,  or,  better,  on  a  porous 
tiling  in  a  baking  oven  or  stove  oven  mediumly  hot.  Bake 
thirty  minutes;  turn  and  bake  thirty  minutes;  turn  again  and 
bake  fifteen  minutes ;  be  careful  not  to  burn.  When  properly 
baked,  it  should  be  a  light  brown,  not  scorched  or  blistered. 
In  this  condition  the  bread  is  sweet  and  nutritious.  It  is 
highly  recommended  in  all  cases  of  indigestion. 


Chapter  XVI. 


DISEASES:  THEIR  SWAIITOMS  AND  TREATMENT 


DERANGEMENT  OF   THE  SPINAL  SENSES. 

Symptoms  337.   T/ic  Eyc. — The  sense  of  ^'isi()^  may  be  exalted,  im- 

])aire(l.  or  i)er\'erted  in  disorders  of  the  l)rain,  whether  organic 
or  functional  It  is  exalted  in  intlaniniation,  impaired  or  per- 
verted in  l)rain  affections.  Spots  and  various  small  objects 
floating  before  the  eye  have  a  significance  of  some  form  of  dis- 
eased condition  of  the  brain,  such  as  anemia  and  disturbances 
of  nerve  centers.  Ordinarily  they  may  be  considered  mere 
shadows  caused  by  functional  disturbances  of  the  nerve  centers. 

Treatment  Jn  all  fomis  of  inflammation  of  the  eye.  free  the  general  cir- 
culation (par.  230),  and  especially  that  of  the  neck  (  pars.  210- 
213),  over  the  superorbital  nerve  (par.  221),  and  the  inner 
corner  of  the  eye,  lachrymal  sac   (par.  220). 

As  a  wash  for  all  inflamed  eyes,  use  Siamene  Antiseptic 
Wash. 

Keep  the  bowels  well  regulated  by  using  Siamene  Fruit 
Eaxative  or  Siamene  Laxative  Lozenges,  and  restrict  yourself 
tc  a  light,  bland  diet. 

Symptoms  338.   Tlic  Ear. — The  same  may  be  said  of  hearing  as  of  \-i- 

sion.  Its  functions  are  impaired  and  perverted  by  cerebral  af- 
fections. ]\Iost  commonly,  however,  impaired  hearing  is 
caused  l)y  cold  draughts  on  the  back  of  the  neck,  while  the 
body  is  heated,  producing  muscular  contractions  and  unequal 
circulation.  In  some  cases  impaired  hearing  is  secondarily 
produced  by  catarrh  of  the  eustachian  tubes  leading  from  the 
back  part  of  the  nasal  caxities  to  the  internal  ear. 
204 


diseases:  tiikir  symptoms  axd  treatment.         205 

The  same  i^eneral  treatments   for  the  eye  meet  the  iiuh-      rrcntmcn 
cations  of  the  ear.     Treat  tlie  nerves  and  glands  under  the 
lower  jaw  leachng  up  to  the  ear  (par.  224),  vibrate  the  ear 
(par.  214)  ;  also  apply  fomentations  (par.  315)  to  the  ear. 

Earache,   in  addition  to  the  preceding-  treatment,   should      Kumciu- 
have  warm  Sianiene  Catarrh  Cure  nr  mullein  oil  dr()])])ed  into 
il.     Either  one,  or  both   combined,   are  of  marvelous  value. 
They  destroy  tlie  germs,  are  soothing  and  cleansing.     Hien 
insert  a  warm  compress  of  wool  or  cotton  into  the  ear. 

339.  Tlir  Xosr. — The  upper  air  passages  embrace  the  upper 
nasal  chambers,  pharynx,  larynx  and  trachea  (nose  and 
throat). 

In  acute  inflammation,  acute  catarrh  of  the  nose  (bad  Treatment 
cold  in  the  nose  and  head),  tonsillitis  (sore  throat),  mumps, 
or  enlarged  tonsils,  first  give  general  spinal  treatment  to  free 
the  circulation  (par.  230),  giving  special  attention  to  any  con- 
tracted muscles  and  sore  places  on  the  neck  (pars.  210-213). 
Apply  sweating  compress  (par.  313)  to  the  neck  at  bedtime. 
Use  Siamene  Catarrli  Cure  freely  as  a  gargle  or  spray,  and 
swallow  a  teaspoonful  in  one-half  glass  of  water  once  every 
three  hours. 

In  chronic  catarrh,  affections  of  the  nasal  passages  and  chronu 
throat,  in  addition  to  the  above  treatment  give  Siamene  Laxa-  catarrh 
tive  Lozenges  every  night  upon  retiring,  and  immediately  after 
rising  drink  two  to  three  glasses  of  water.  Use  Siamene 
Catarrh  Cure  freely  or  peroxide  of  hydrogen  every  two  or 
three  hours  in  a  spray  or  douche.  If  peroxide  of  hydrogen 
is  used,  dilute  with  four  parts  of  water  to  one  of  peroxide  of 
hydrogen, 

DERANGED    MOTION. 

The  manifestations  of  deranged  motion  are  called  paralysis, 
tremor,  spasms,  and  convulsions. 

PARALYSIS. 

340.  Paralysis  is  a  loss  of  the  pow'er  of  motion  or  sensa- 
tion, one  or  both,   general  or  local,   with  a  retained  will  to 

14 


2o6 


SIAMENE     HOME     TREATMENT. 


Trentineut 


move  the  affected  jjart.  The  loss  of  sensation  often  liappens 
alone. 

Causes  are  congestions  or  anemia  produced  l)y  pressure 
upon  some  nerve  center,  usually  seated  in  the  base  of  the 
brain. 

Local  paralysis  is  usually  produced  by  the  action  of  some 
poison, — lead,  arsenic,  mercury,  ptomaines  (diseased  germs) 
from  meats  and  vegetables. 

First  remove  the  pressure  by  general  spinal  treatment 
(par.  230),  and  apply  dry  cupping  (par.  335)  up  and  down 
the  spine.  Give  Siamene  Bacteria  Killer.  Give  Siamene 
^kledicated  Sweats  to  stimulate  the  vasomotor  nerves  of  the 
entire  body  and  open  the  pores  of  the  skin.  Give  local 
I'etrassage  treatment  daily.     Apply  Siamene  Rheumatic  Oil. 

For  paralysis  from  ptomaines  of  diphtheria  and  rheuma- 
tism give  peroxide  of  hydrogen,  one-half  teaspoonful  in  half 
a  tumbler  of  water,  every  three  or  four  hours. 

^^'hen  paralysis  affects  limited  areas,  such  as  a  single 
muscle,  nerve  or  organ,  close  search  should  be  made  for  the 
localized  spot  along  the  spinal  centers,  corresponding  to  the 
part  affected  (see  Reference  Column),  and  give  it  special  treat- 
ment. 


CONVULSIONS. 


Treatment 


341.  Spasms  of  muscles,  general  or  partial,  often  begin 
in  the  eyes,  hands  or  toes,  involving  the  entire  body,  leaving 
the  patient  dull. 

These  are  due  to  irritation  of  the  brain  reflected  from 
some  distant  source,  as  an  intestinal  worm,  undigested  food 
in  the  bowels,  eye  strain,  a  burn  on  the  hand,  a  blister,  a 
fright,   etc. 

If  seen  in  the  attack,  strip  the  patient  and  immerse  in 
warm  mustard  water,  with  a  cold,  wet  cloth  to  the  head, 
ten  or  fifteen  minutes.  Run  a  cloth,  wrung  from  cold  or 
ice  water,  up  and  down  the  spine  quickly.  Treat  the  skin 
up  and  down  the  spine  with  Siamene  Movement   (par.   184) 


DISEASES  :   Til  Kl  K   SV  M  1'  T( )  M  S   A  N  1 )    lUEATM  EXT.  20/ 

10  siiniulate  the  reflexes.  In  the  iiiaiia<;enient  of  such  cases 
give  general  spinal  treatment,  (live  Siamene  Laxative  Lozen- 
ges to  regulate  the  howels.  Diet  the  ])atient  on  easily  digested 
food. 

ACl'TE   IXELAMMATIOX    OF   BRAIN    A XI)   STIXAL   COKD. 

342.  By  this  term  is  meant  inflammation  of  the  membrane 
covering  the  brain  and  spinal  cord. 

Svtnptoiiis. — Intense   headache,    followed   by   restlessness,     symptoms 
nervous  vomiting,  hard,  frecpient  pulse,  red  eyes,  often  with 
small  contracted  i)upil.   eyes  crossed,   very  sensitive  to  light 
and  sound,  obstinate  constipation,  stiffness  of  the  muscles  of 
the  neck,  delirium,  convulsions  and  high  temperature. 

Place  the  patient  in  a  quiet,  darkened  room  while  the  at-     Treatment 
tack  is  acute ;  keep  all  the  muscles  of  the  neck  and  back  re- 
laxed (pars.  2IO.  211,  212.  213  and  230). 

Give  Siamene  Fruit  Laxative  or  Siamene  Laxative  Lozen- 
ges. Apply  heat  to  the  feet  and  cold  to  the  head  and  spine. 
Dry-cup  the  spine  (par.  335).  Give  peroxide  of  hydrogen, 
one-half  teaspoonful  in  one-half  a  glass  of  water,  every  three 
hours;  give  to  children  in  proportion. 

NEURASTHENIA. 

343.  Xeurasthenia,  or  poverty  of  nerve  force,  is  a  germ 
disease.  The  germ  can  be  found  in  the  blood  and  on  the 
tongue  of  any  indi\'i(lual  who  suffers  from  this  nervous 
malady.  In  languor,  general  debility,  chronic  headaches, 
neuralgia,  epilepsy,  spermatorrhea,  suicidal  mania,  and  all 
forms  of  insanity,  the  blood  literally  swcirms  with  this  microbe. 

The  male,  on  account  of  the  greater  (leveloi)ment  of  his 
sym})athetic  system,  is  better  protected  than  the  female.  It 
is  contagious  in  close  contact ;  there-fore  one  affected  with 
neurasthenia  should  slee])  alone. 

The  presence  of  this  microbe  in   large   (|uantities   strikes      Trentment 
directly  for  the  organs  of  life,  the  reproductive  organs,  and, 
Avhen  unmolested,  saps  sexual  vigor  in  both  male  and  female. 


208  SIAMKXE     HOME     TREATMENT. 

Aniiiliilatc  lliis  niicmbe  with  Sianiene  IJacteria  Killer  and  free 
the  g-eiieral  circulation  (par.  230).  (live  Sianiene  Medicated 
Sweats  (par.  307  or  309). 

Gentle  petrassaging-  of  muscles,  deep  hreathing  (par.  274), 
mental  medicine  (pars.  254,  255  or  256).  Give  diet  that  is 
rich  in  brain  element,  phosphates,  such  as  broiled  animal  food, 
game,  etc.   ( i)ar.  386).     Take  abundant  rest. 

EPILEPSY. 

344.  J'aroxysmal  convulsions,  with  loss  of  consciousness 
and  power  of  voluntary  motion,  sensibility  followed  by  coma. 

Symptoms  It  is  recoguized  by  the  aura  or  warning,   dilated  pupils, 

general  nervousness,  seizure,  foaming  at  the  mouth,  biting  of 
the  tongue,  and  difficult  breathing.     The  fit  may  last  from  a 
few  seconds  to  several  hours. 
Cfiitses  Usually  the  cause  is  in  the  stomach.     It  may  be  in  the 

central  nervous  system  reflexed  on  the  stomach.  There  may 
be  some  diseased  germs  in  the  blood  circulating  thri)ugh  the 
weakened  patches  of  the  brain,  excreting  their  ptomaines, 
which  irritate  it,  thus  giving  rise  to  an  abrupt  discharge  of  the 
electrical  currents  in  the  brain, 

Treaimcut  During  the  attack,  loosen  the  clothing;  guard  the  patient 

from  doing  bodily  harm  to  himself,  such  as  biting  the  tongue, 
bruising  the  head,  etc.  If  the  seizure  is  difficult  to  control, 
give  an  enema  of  one  teaspoonful  of  turpentine,  two  table- 
spoonfuls  of  starch  and  four  oimces  of  water. 

Remove  the  cause ;  usually  you  will  find  a  disturbance 
about  the  ninth  dorsal  vertel)ra,  the  intercostal  muscles  drawing 
the  ribs  until  they  ru'e  lapped;  tenderness  oxer  the  stomach. 
Ciive  general  spinal  treatment  (  par.  230)  once  a  day.  Adjust 
the  ribs  if  they  require  it  (par.  232).  Apply  sweating  com- 
press (par.  313)  to  the  stomach  every  night.  Give  Sianiene 
Laxative  Lozenges  if  constipated. 

Administer  mental  medicine,  strong  suggestions  (see 
chapter  on  "Mental  ^Medicine,"  pars.  254,  255,  256)  ;  and, 
above  all   else,   observe  strict   dietetic   measures.     Give   some 


DISEASKS:   TllKlK   SYMTTOMS   AND    rKi:ATM  KXT.  209 

form  of  predigestecl  wheat  food,  such  as  Sianicnc  I'nlcavcncd 
Bread  (par.  t,t,(^),  or  trranose  biscuit  and  water.  Restrict  the 
patient  to  this  exchisive  diet  for  two  weeks,  giving"  two  meals 
a  day,  and  as  sparingly  as  will  satisfy  the  patient.  At  the 
end  of  the  two  weeks  add  baked  or  stewed  apples.  ivifJiout 
sugar.  At  the  end  of  three  weeks  some  other  Hgiit  pre- 
digested  food  may  1)e  added,  cxccf^t  sweets  and  fats.  Use 
olive  oil  salted  in  place  of  Initter.  but  it  is  not  to  be  introduced 
into  the  diet  until  the  end  of  first  three  weeks.  Keep  the 
patient  on  strict  diet  of  predigested  food  ,s-/.r  months.  For 
more  specific  instructions  for  indixidual  cases,  consult  the 
Bureau  of  Information. 

TETANUS     (lock-jaw). 

345.  Tetanus  is  marked  by  a  persistent,  rigid  contraction      symptoms 
of  muscles,  particularly  those  of  the  jaw.     It  is  usually  caused 

by  a  wound  or  an  injury.  It  has  a  specific  germ,  found  in 
garden  earth,  dirt  and  manure.  Such  cases  require  great 
care. 

Keep  the  muscles  thoroughly  relaxed  by  giving  general  rrcutment 
spinal  treatment  (par.  230)  and  Siamene  Medicated  Sweats 
(  par.  307  or  309 )  once  a  day.  Give  the  following  mixture. — 
tincture  of  lobelia,  tincture  of  capsicum,  tincture  valerian, 
equal  parts, — in  fifteen-drop  doses  once  an  hour  until  the  mus- 
cular spasms  are  controlled.  If  the  case  is  an  obstinate  one, 
increase  the  size  of  the  dose  five  drops  each  succeeding  dose. 
Follow  these  by  either  teaspoonful  doses  of  Siamene  Catarrh 
Cure  or  peroxide  of  hydrogen  in  one-half  glass  of  water  every 
hour.  By  all  means  keep  the  1)ody  thoroughly  relaxed  by 
freely  applying  Siamene  Xerve  Food  and  inhibiting  the  con- 
tracted muscles. 

NEURALGIA. 

346.  Neuralgia  is  due  to  a  weak  and  devitalized  condition      ceuises 
of  some  special  nerve,  or  either  a  disease  germ  or  its  ptomaine 
Jiffecting  the  same.     It  is  recognized  by  pain  shooting  along 

the  nerves,   irregular  and   intermittent ;   it   receives   its   name 


210 


SIAMEXE     HOME     TREATMENT. 


from  ils  location;  in  the  head  or  face,   facial:  heart,  angina 

]>ectoris;  stomach,  gastralgia ;  bowels,  neuralgic  colic;  kidneys, 

nephralgia;  sciatic  nerve,   sciatica,  etc. 
Treatment  Kclieve  tlic  i)ain  first  by  giving  general  treatment  (Chapter 

X  )  if  pain  is  general:  if  contined  to  a  local  spot,  give  general 

spinal  treatment  (par.  230),  general  treatment  of  neck  (pars. 

210,  211.  212.  213).  or  local  treatment  to  the  part  affected. 

using  Siamene  Nerve  Food  freely.     If  the  pain  is  obstinate. 

apply  Siamene  Pain  Liniment, 
Chronic  In  chronic  cases  give  Siamene  Medicated  Sweats  to  open 

seurnigia      \\\q  avcuucs  of  cxcretiou. 

In  all  cases  give  the  most  nutritious  diet. 


Treatment 


DISEASES  OF  THE  CHEST.       W'HOOPIXG-COUGH. 

347.  Whooping-cough  is  an  affection  of  childhood  due  to 
admission  of  a  micro-organism  by  the  respiratory  mucous 
membrane.  This  germ  enters  the  blood  and  propagates  along 
the  cervical  portion  of  the  spinal  cord  and  the  base  of  the 
brain. 

When  once  the  germ  has  become  fully  localized,  it  throws 
off  its  spores  at  intervals,  about  every  two  hours,  incidental 
to  which  immense  cjuantities  of  ptomaine  excretions  are 
thrown  off  from  the  mucous  surfaces  by  paroxysms  of  cough- 
ing. 

The  organisms  contained  in  the  blood  penetrate  all  parts 
of  the  body  in  search  of  the  elements  of  nutrition  for  food, 
and,  if  left  alone,  they  \\\\\  consume  all  of  this  element  in  the 
blood,  after  which  they  die  off;  it  takes  eight  to  twelve  w-eeks 
to  use  up  this  element. 

Give  general  spinal  treatment  once  a  day  to  equalize  the 
circulation,  general  treatment  of  the  neck  (pars.  210,  211,  212, 
213),  with  specific  attention  from  the  first  to  fourth  dorsal. 
Inhale  steam  from  a  solution  of  Siamene  Catarrh  Cure  in  a 
steam  atomizer.  In  the  absence  of  a  steam  atomizer,  a  small 
pitcher  containing  the  solution  may  be  used,  by  placing  it 
under  the  nose,  with  a  cloth  sufficientlv  lars:e  to  cover  the 


diseases:   their   symptoms   AXD  treatment.  211 

head  and  pitcher  to  C(-)nrine  the  steam.  S[)ray  the  nostrils 
occasionally  with  the  same.  15urn  naphthalene  in  a  plate,  and 
inhale  the  tinnes.  As  a  microhe  killer,  gi\'e  Siamene  Bacteria 
Killer,  or  one-half  to  two  grain  doses  of  phenacetin  once  in 
four  to  eight  hours.  Depend  principally  upon  freeing  the  cir- 
culation of  the  spinal  cord  in  the  cervical  region  by  Petrassage 
and  Siamene  Moxement. 

See  to  it  that  .all  the  sewerage  systems  are  kept  open, 
especially  the  bowels,  by  giving  Siamene  Laxative  Lozenges 
or  Siamene  Fruit  Laxative. 

BRONCHITIS. 

348.  Bronchitis  is  a  microbe  disease,  an  inflammation  of     symptoms 
the  lining  membrane  of  the  bronchial   tubes.     It   gives  rise 

to  cough,  expectoration,  difficulty  of  breathing,  fever  and 
pain.  The  cough  is  an  irritative,  hacking  cough  in  the  early 
stages;  later  it  is  deeper,  and  is  followed  by  copious  colored 
expectoration  due  to  microbes  in  the  blood. 

Give  general  spinal  treatment  (par.  230)  to  free  the  cir-  Treatment  tor 
culation  of  all  internal  organs,  with  special  treatment  to  the  Acute  ca^es 
cervical  and  upper  dorsal  nerves.  Inhale  steam  (par.  347) 
from  Siamene  Catarrh  Cure.  Place  sw'eating  compress  over 
the  chest  every  night,  followed  in  the  morning  by  sponging  off 
with  strong  salt  water.  Apply  Siamene  Nerve  Food  freely, 
and  manipulate  all  the  muscles  of  the  back  and  neck  wuth 
Siamene  ^^lovement  and  Petrassage.  Give  Siamene  Laxative 
Lozenges  to  regulate  the  bowels. 

In  chronic  cases,  in  addition  to  the  preceding  treatment.      Treatment  for 
apply  fomentations  (par.  315)  to  the  chest,  when  the  surface     chronic  cases 
of  the  body  is  free  from  fever.     Change  once  in  tw^o  hours. 
After  using  fomentations  for  four  or  five  days,  apply  Siamene 
Rheumatic  Oil  twice  daily,  continuing  it  as  long  as  it  will 
produce  counterirritation. 

Also  see  par.  231. 

tuberculosis. 

349.  Tuberculosis  is  a  deposit  of  the  tubercular  germ  in 
any  part  of  the  body. 


212  SI  AM  EXE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

Puhiionnry  PuliiK )iiary    tul)ei"cul()sis    is    a    deposit    of    the    tn1)ercular 

Tuberculosis  oenii  ill  tlic  luii^'.  Tlic  gemis  collect  in  colonies  or  |)atches  on 
a  spot  of  the  mucous  surfaces,  and  are  supposed  to  burrow  into 
the  spongy  parts  of  the  lung,  where  they  multiply  and  subsist 
upon  the  nutritive  element  of  the  blood  supplying  that  part. 
.\.s  they  increase  in  number,  they  i)roduce  a  fermentive  condi- 
tion in  the  lung  tissues.  This  forms  a  hard,  cheesy  substance 
called  tubercle  or  lump,  producing  a  dry,  hacking  cough,  short- 
ness of  breath,  excitable  pulse,  pains  about  the  chest,  hemor- 
rhage from  slight  streaks  to  profuse  discharge,  feverishness 
and  wasting  of  the  body ;  later,  increased  fever,  debility,  loss  of 
appetite,  purulent  expectoration  with  bloody  or  yellow  cheesy 
Hakes,  chills,  night  sweats,  exhaustion,  and  emaciation. 
Treatment  Opcu  all  the  scwcragc  systcms,  using  Siamene  Laxative 

Lozenges  for  the  bowels  and  Siamene  Medicated  Sweats  for 
the  skin  and  kidneys.  Free  the  circulation  of  all  the  spinal 
sympathetics  by  general  spinal  treatment  (par.  230)  every 
other  day.  Give  thorough  inunction  with  Siamene  Nerve 
Food  (Chapter  IX)  to  the  entire  body,  followed  by  general 
treatment    (Chapter  X)   once  a  week. 

Give  Siamene  Bacteria  Killer  and  peroxide  of  hydrogen 
internally,  in  one-half  teaspoonful  doses  in  water,  alternately 
every  three  hours. 

Three  times  a  day  take  ten  minutes,  alternating  abdominal 
Tpar.  274)  and  upper-chest  (par.  2/^,)  inhalations,  breathing 
at  the  ratio  of  two,  three  and  one.  While  breathing,  con- 
centrate the  mind  on  the  love  power  within,  giving  the  sub- 
liminal mind  full  control  of  the  situation  by  taking  the  ex- 
ercises in  a  passive  state  (par.  253). 
Diet  The  diet  should  consist  of  the  most  nutritious  food,  juices 

of  meats,  cream,  eggs  when  they  agree,  gelatine,  strong  broths, 
and  predigested  cereals.  Take  al)undant  outdoor  life,  camp- 
ing, climbing,  running,  jumping,  and  swimming. 

PNEUMONIA. 

350.  Pneumonia,  or  inflammation  of  the  lungs,  is  a  germ 
disease.     Its  germ  is  called  the  pncumo-coccus.     The  pneumo- 


diseases:  their  symi'tums  and  treatment.        213 

coccus,  or  genu  prevalent  in  the  blood  of  a  i)neumonia  pa- 
tient, is  one  of  the  most  deadly  germs,  short-lived,  but  very 
prolific  and  active  during-  lifetime. 

It  is  caused  by  exposure  to  inclement  weather,  often  aided      causes 
by  contagion. 

The  symptoms  are  hot,  drv  skin.  Hushed  face,  quick  pulse,      symptoms 
extremely  rapid,  hard  breathing,  i)ain  in  the  lung,  cough  with 
peculiar  expectoration  called  "prune  juice,"   rusty  brick-dust 
expectoration,  high  feyer,  and  delirium. 

First  open  all  sewerages  by  giving  Siamene  ]'ruit  Laxa-  TrcHtment 
tive  to  thoroughly  cleanse  the  alimentar}^  canal,  and  Siamene 
]^Iedicated  Sweats  to  open  the  pores  of  the  skin  and  act  upon 
the  kidneys  (pars.  307  or  309).  Give  general  spinal  treatment 
(par.  230 J  to  free  the  circulation  to  all  internal  organs.  Give 
specific  attention  to  freeing  the  portions  of  the  lungs  inyolved 
by  finding  the  contracted  muscle,  usually  in  the  dorsal  region, 
pressing  upon  the  nerves  that  control  the  affected  part ;  ex- 
pand the  chest  (par.  227).  Take  the  full  upper-chest  in- 
halations (par.  273).  If  free  breathing  is  obstructed  by  pain, 
find  the  contracted  muscle  along  the  spine  that  produces  the 
pain,  and  inhibit ;  then  have  the  patient  take  full  upper-chest 
breathing,  inhale,  hold,  and  exhale  at  the  ratio  of  two,  three 
and  one.  Let  this  be  continued  until  the  patient  is  in  a  state 
of  perspiration.  This  will  require  some  energy  on  the  part  of 
the  patient,  but  let  him  begin  slowly,  gently  and  easily,  with 
his  mind  concentrated  on  the  intent.  Apply  sweating  com- 
press to  the  lungs  at  bedtime. 

PLEURISY. 

351.  Pleurisy,  or  inflammation  of  the  internal  lining  mem- 
brane of  the  chest,  the  serous  covering  of  the  lung,  is  caused     causes 
by  mechanical  violence,  cold,  dampness,  and  exposure. 

Symptoms. — Depression,  fever,  dry,  hacking  cough,  lan- 
cinating pain,  or  catches  over  the  affected  area. 

Treatment. — Free  the  circulation  by  giving  general  spinal 
treatment  (par.  230)  ;  local  treatment  to  contracted  muscles 
and  nerves  corresponding  to  the  pain.     Give  Siamene  Medi- 


214  SIAMEXE     HOME     TREATMENT. 

cated  Sweat  No.    i    every  day.     Apply   Sianiene  Pain  Lini- 
ment. 
Chronic  When  the  (hsease  l)ecomes  chronic,  there  is  a  thickening 

pievrii^r  of  the  plcural  membrane,  with  accumnlation  of  fluids  in  the 
pleural  cavity.  Apply  Siamene  Rheumatic  Oil  twice  daily; 
if  the  accumulation  is  in  large  cjuantities,  it  is  advisable  to 
have  it  removed  by  surgical  operation. 

TONSILLITIS. 

352.  Tonsillitis,  or  inflamed  tonsils  and  throat,  acute  and 
chronic. 

Syiupfonis. — Pain,  redness  and  swelling  of  tonsils,  fe\er, 
difficulty  in  swallowing,  headache,  general  lassitude  and  ach- 
ing of  limbs. 

Treatment. — Free  the  circulation  b}'  giving  general  spinal 
treatment  (par.  230)  ;  give  special  attention  to  hard  and  con- 
tracted muscles  along  the  back  of  the  neck  and  upper  dorsal 
region,  around  the  angle  of  the  jaw  and  ear,  by  pinching,  pull- 
ing and  scjueezing,  gently,  forcefully  and  deeply.  Introduce  the 
finger  into  the  mouth  (par.  233),  giving  but  gentle  pressure, 
squeezing  the  tonsils  on  either  side.  Give  Siamene  Fruit  Laxa- 
tive or  Siamene  Laxative  Lozenges  internally  to  open  the 
bowels.  As  a  spray  to  the  throat  use  Siamene  Catarrh  Cure 
once  an  hour  or  inhale  steam  from  steam  atomizer. 

If  the  kidneys  are  not  acting  well,  and  there  is  tenderness 
over  last  dorsal  and  first  and  secontl  lumbars,  give  Siamene 
Diuretic  INIixture. 

DIPHTHERIA. 

353.  Diphtheria  is  a  microl)ian  disease  of  the  most  deadly 
form.  Its  microbe  is  i)revalent  in  the  most  shattered  state  of 
vital  force,  l;)eing  analogous  to  the  decayed  tissue  in  plants 
and  animals. 

Diagnosis. — An  indescribable  languor,  lassitude,  debility, 
followed  by  chills  and  fever,  nausea,  vesicles  coalescing  in  the 
fauces;  soft  palate,  tonsils,  tongue,  gums  or  other  parts  of 
the  mouth  bec(^me  like  washed  green  leather  patches,  and,  if 


diseases:   TIIKIR   SVMl'TOMS   AND  TKKATM  KXT.  215 

not  interfered  with,  grow  gangrenous,  and  the  breath  is 
charged  with  fetid  matter.  This  growth  sometimes  is  so 
extensive  as  to  ahnost  fill  the  month  and  air  passages.  All 
the  glands  under  the  jaw  and  ear  and  on  the  neck  swell ; 
kidneys  become  affected,  depressed,  with  scanty  secretions 
of  urine,  usually  containing  albumen;  a  quick,  small  pulse, 
high  fever,  temperature  ranging  from  loi  to  103  and  104 
degrees  F. 

Treatment. — The  first  thing  to  recognize  in  this  most 
dreaded  and  fatal  disease  is  that  it  is  a  microbian  disease  in 
which  the  micro-cocci  accumulate  at  an  exceedingly  rapid 
rate  upon  the  mucous  surfaces  of  the  air  passages,  migrating- 
in  colonies  into  the  blood,  ])oisoning  the  entire  system,  with 
a  specificallv  depressing  condition  of  the  vasomotor  centers. 
Usually  multiplied  colonies  take  up  their  abode  along-  the  liver 
and  renal  centers,  producing  albumen  in  the  urine  and  uric 
acid  in  superal)undant  quantities.  In  consequence  we  have 
uremic  poison,  causing  coma  and  death,  unless  the  tension  is 
removed  and  kept  lax  in  all  the  spinal  sympathetic  centers, 
and  more  especially  the  liver  and  kidney  centers. 

First  give  Siamene  Medicated  Sweat  Bath  No.  i  or  No.  2. 
to  open  all  avenues  of  excretion  of  the  skin  and  stimulate 
reflexively  all  the  internal  organs.  The  author  has  found  in 
his  experience  that  these  baths  can  be  relied  upon  as  the  means 
of  saving  more  human  lives  from  death  in  cases  of  diphtheria 
and  other  diseases  than  any  one  remedial  agent  known  to  the 
profession.  Give  general  spinal  treatment  to  free  the  circula- 
tion of  all  the  spinal  centers,  thereby  affording  nature  free 
sway.  Give  general  treatment  of  the  neck  (pars.  210.  211. 
212  and  213),  freeing  the  circulation  of  the  blood  in  the  neck, 
throat  and  tonsils.  Follow  this  operation  by  cleansing  the 
hands,  then  introduce  one  finger  into  the  throat,  giving  a  quick, 
gentle,  pressing  sweep  against  the  tonsils  and  fauces,  and  all 
soft  parts,  thereby  freeing  the  circulation  (par.  233). 

Give  Siamene  Bacteria  Killer  internally,  and  spray  the 
tonsils  with  the  same  in  a  steam  atomizer  everv  hour.     Ap- 


2l6  SIAMENE     IIO.M1-:     TREATMENT. 

ply  Siamene  l\heuniatic  Oil  to  the  throat:  this  is  the  most 
effective  local  treatment  known  to  the  author,  for  it  pene- 
trates the  deep  tissues  and  brinies  forth  poisonous  matter. 
If  the  throat  is  much  swollen,  apply  sweating  compress  (par. 
313),  saturating  the  cloth  in  a  solution  of  Siamene  Bacteria 
Killer;  change  once  in  four  hours. 

CROUP. 

354.  Dia<s:[n()sis. — Croup  is  a  microbian  disease,  both  sjjas- 
modic  and  membranous,  easily  recognized  by  a  peculiar  suf- 
focating sensation,  hoarse  breathing  and  coughing.  When 
n'lCmbranous.  it  requires  prompt  and  radical  treatment,  other- 
wise it  might  prove  fatal. 

Treatment. — Siamene  ]\ledicated  Sweat  Bath  No.  i,  or, 
in  case  the  patient  is  an  infant,  Siamene  Aledicated  Sweat 
Bath  No.  2.  followed  Ijv  general  spinal  treatment,  ^^•ith  specific 
attention  to  the  second,  third  and  fourth  cervicals.  Apply 
sweating  compress  (par.  313)  to  the  neck.  Give  Siamene 
Fruit  Laxative  or  Siamene  Laxative  Lozenges  to  cleanse  the 
bowels  thoroughly.  (live  Siamene  Bacteria  Killer  to  eradi- 
cate this  germ  from  the  alimentary  canal  and  the  blood.  This 
treatment  will  cure  every  case  if  given  as  directed. 

DISEASE    OF    THE    HEART. 

355.  Affections  of  the  heart,  functional  and  organic. 

Syml'toins. — Irregular  beat,  too  fast,  too  slow  or  inter- 
mittent ;  pain  over  the  heart ;  poor  circulation,  cold  feet,  pale 
and  anemic ;  shortness  of  the  breath,  weak  digestion,  and 
dropsical  effusions. 

Treatment. — Remove  the  pressure  by  giving  spinal  treat- 
ment (par.  230).  Sometimes  a  contracted  muscle  pressing 
upon  the  l)lood-vessels  of  the  inner  portion  of  the  thigh 
(saphenous  vein)  obstructs  the  flow  of  the  blood  from  the 
lower  extremities  to  the  heart,  causing  anemia  of  that  organ. 
Contracted  muscles  on  the  neck,  upper  chest,  upper  dorsal 
region,  and  misjilaced  ril)s  produce  both  functional  and  organic 


diseases:   TIIKIK   SYMI-ToMS   and  TKKATMKXr.  J\J 

heart  disease.  Look  tor  the  cause,  remove  it  by  such  nianipiihi- 
ti\"e  treainient  as  ina\-  l)e  indicated.  Take  off  the  f^rrssiiiw 
I'or  severe  and  obstinate  cases,  consult  the  r.ureau  of  Infor- 
mati(in. 

DISEASE  OF  THE  STOMACH. 

356.  Chronic  and  acute  i^astritis  or  intlaniniation  of  the 
stomach. 

Sxiiipfonis. —  Pain  in  the  stomach,  vomiting,  loss  of  or 
abnormally  increased  appetite. 

Treatment. — Free  the  circulation  of  the  blood  to  the  stom- 
ach by  giving  general  treatment  (par.  230).  with  special  at- 
tention to  the  fourth,  hfth.  sixth,  seventh  and  eighth  dorsal 
nerves  and  vertebnie  (par.  97).  l^n-n  the  patient  on  the  side 
and  raise  the  ribs  (par.  228).  Petrassage  the  stomach  and 
bowels,  give  circular  vibration  over  the  stomach  and  liver,  and 
Siamene  ^Movement  over  the  al)domen  and  chest,  Siamene 
Laxati\"e  Lozenges  or  Siamene  Fruit  Laxative  to  regulate  the 
bowels.  If  gases  accumulate  from  undigested  food,  use  Si- 
amene Dyspepsia  Tablets. 

HEPATITIS. 

357.  Hepatitis,  inflammation  of  the  liver,  acute  and  chronic. 
Nearly  all  atTections  of  this  gland  originate  from  a  partial 
disintegration  or  inflammation,  caused  by  solar  heat,  malarial 
germs,  alcoholic  drinks,  and  excess  of  carbonaceous  foods. 

Sxinptoms. — (Generally  commence  with  pains,  1)oth  acute 
and  dull,  and  tenderness  in  the  region  of  the  liver  (under  the 
ribs  on  the  right  side,  level  with  the  stomach).  Pain  under 
the  right  shoulder-blade;  enlargement  of  the  liver,  sympathetic 
or  hacking  cough ;  intestinal  disorders,  the  stools  showing 
an  excess  of  bile  (too  yellow),  or  a  diminished  amount  of 
l)ile  (clay  color).  The  skin  is  yellow;  there  is  depression  of 
spirits,  homesickness,  despondency,  copper  taste  in  the  mouth. 
etc.  The  acute  form  is  common  in  the  tropical  region,  but 
rare  in  temperate  climate. 


JlS  SIAMEXE     HOME     TREATMENT. 

Tvcai incut. — (leneral  siiinal  Ireatment,  special  attention 
j^'iven  to  the  eig'htli.  ninth  and  tentli  dorsals  on  the  rii^ht 
side  (par.  107).  (li\e  treatment  daily;  manipnlate  liver, 
Tapotment.  Sianiene  Movement,  circnlar  vibration,  sweating 
compress  at  night;  before -applying  the  compress,  bathe  the 
surface  over  the  liver  with  a  solution  composed  of  a  tea- 
spoonful  of  dilute  nitro-muriatic  acid  and  one-half  glass  of 
water.  Take  Siamene  Fruit  Laxative  every  night  and  morn- 
ing, followed  by  copious  drinks  of  water.  Take  physical 
culture  exercises  for  liver  (par.  304). 

THE    SPLEEN. 

358.  The  spleen,  lymph  channels,  pink  marrow  of  the 
bones,  the  mesentery  and  other  glands,  exercise  a  somewhat 
analogous  function  in  the  human  body  in  forming  and  dis- 
tributing the  white  blood  corpuscles  (leucocytes)  to  the  red 
blood  corpuscles  (erythrocytes). 

Besides  aiding  in  this  process,  the  spleen  acts  as  a  safety 
valve  for  the  heart  and  an  important  adjunct  to  the  liver. 
Placed  over  its  capsule  are  the  principal  ganglia  of  the  great 
sympathetic  system,  with  its  millions  of  little  brains  drawing 
the  vital  element  from  the  center  of  life,  the  brain. 

\Mien  this  gland  becomes  inflamed  and  congested,  we  have 
Icucocythemia  or  a  colorless,  clayish-looking  skin. 

Treatment. — Free  the  circulation  by  general  spinal  treat- 
ment (par.  230),  giving  special  attention  to  the  eighth,  ninth 
and  tenth  dorsals  on  the  left  side  (par.  107).  -\pply  locally 
over  the  spleen,  clay  poultice,  but  before  applying,  bathe 
the  parts  well  with  peroxide  of  hy<lrogen.  Give  Siamene 
Bacteria  Killer  or  fluid  extract  of  bearsfoot  internally. 

CONSTIPATION. 

Constipation  359.  Coustipatiou  is  perhaps  more  of  a  habit  than  a  disease; 

.1  Habit      it  is.  in  truth,  the  fruitful  source  of  many  diseases,  when  it 
is  allowed  to  fasten  itself  upon  the  system. 


DISF.ASKS:   TIll-.lK   SYMPTOMS   AXD  TREATMKXT.  219 

'JI10  lari^est  and  nicsi  iniixiriam  ni  the  four  threat  sewerage      TheMimentnry 
systems  of  the  body  is  the  alimentary  canal.  ^'"""' 

Causes. 

J'irst. — I'v  the  i)cculiar  nature  of  the  diet.  causes  of 

Second.— lm\nu-c  drmkiii:^  water.  constipation 

Third. — A   deticiency  of  bile. 

FourtJi. — Lack  of  intestinal  seeretions. 

Fifth. — Throno-h  the  secretions  of  neighboring  glands. 

Si.vth. — It  may  arise  from  impaired  power  of  the  bowels 
to  propel  their  contents. 

Seveiith. — It  may  be  the  result  of  some  misplaced  rib, 
making  pressure  upon  the  great  splanchnic  nerve. 

Eighth. — It  may  l^e  a  contracted  muscle  in  the  region  of 
the  sixth  to  tenth  dorsal. 

Ninth. — It  may  be  from  mental  worry,  which  will  de- 
vitalize the  entire  spinal  system. 

Tenth. — It  may  arise  from  eating  too  fast. 

Eleventh. — It  may  be  ]:)roduced  from  a  fear  thought. 

Tzvelfth. — Anger  while  eating. 

Thirteenth. — Neglect  to  attend  to  nature's  call. 

Fourteenth. — Excessive  mental  fatigue  without  sufficient 
physical  exercise. 

Fifteenth. — Excessive  or  improper  sexual  indulgence; 
sexual  excitement,  including  lascivious  thoughts;  self-abuse; 
keeping  the  generative  organs  too  hot  by  heavy  clothing,  or 
inattention  to  cleanliness. 

Si.vteenth. — Prolonged   ill   health. 

Seventeenth. — Mental  strain. 

Eighteenth. — Overwork. 

Nineteenth. — Close  confinement  without  proper  physical 
exercise. 

Sxniptonis. 

First. — Difficult  fecal  evacuations.  symptoms  of 

Second. — Headache,  constipation 

Third. — Dizziness. 


220 


SIAMEXE     HOME     TREATMENT. 


Fourtli. — Dull,  heavy  sensation  of  the  \mk\\  and  mind. 

l-iftli. — Lack  of  appetite. 

SixtJi. — Eruption    of    skin. 

Seventh. — Derangements  of  the  stomach. 

Eighth. — Flatulency. 

Ninth. — A  sallow  complexion. 

Tcntli. — l)lood    diseases    from    absorption    of    ptomaines, 
accumulating-  in  the  intestinal  tract. 

Eleventh. — Neuralgic  pains,  caused  by  absorption  of  the 
above  ptomaines. 

Tzvelfth. — Poor  circulation. 

Thirteenth. — Heart  disturbances. 

Fourteenth. — Catarrhal  diseases  of  different  mucous  sur- 
faces. 

Fifteenth. — Melancholy,  produced  by  the  obstruction  of 
the  nerve  wave  l3etween  the  solar  plexiis  and  the  brain.  This 
sometimes  produces  insanity. 

Sixteenth. — Weakness  of  the  walls  of  the  large  intestines, 
rendering  them  unable  to  respond  to  the  nerve  wa\'e,  thereby 
lessening  the  normal  secretions  that  further  the  expulsion 
of  the  feeal  matter. 

Sez'enteenth. — Poisonous  gases  caused  by  the  accumulation 
of  particles  of  fecal  matter  in  the  folds  of  the  intestines. 
Treatment  for  Treatment. — This   treatment   varies,   owing  to   numerous 

Constipation      causcs   that   may   produce   it  in   a   given  case.     Many  cases 
have  only  a  slight  lesion  along  the  spinal  nerves  that  requires 
simply  the  application  of  Xerve  Food,  and  one  or  two  general 
spinal  treatments  (par.  230)   to  relieve  it. 
Chronic  Constipation  of  long  standing  requires  a  careful  and  S3''S- 

constipation  tcuiatic  treatment,  not  only  of  the  bowels,  but  of  the  general 
system.  Apply  Nerve  Food  and  give  general  spinal  treat- 
ment (par.  230)  once  daily.  If  the  skin  is  sallow  and  loaded 
with  fetid  matter  absorbed  from  the  alimentar}'  canal,  take 
Siamene  Medicated  Sweat  Bath  No.  i  or  No.  2  every  other 
dav. 


DISKASKS:    'l"lli:iK   SYMl'TOMS    AND    lUl-LAT  M  I'.XT.  221 

Kci^iilation  nf  the  diet  i>  tif  i)iiinary  importance;  but  what      "••■■'■ 
can  be  said  of  diet   tliat   will   stand   the  lest?     The  diet   lh:it 
agrees    with    one,    cHsagrees    with    another.     This   branch    ot 
treatment,  though  important,   is  an  unknown  ([uantity. 

There  is  nu)re  constipation  caused  from  an  improper  man-      imi.rof.cr  Enthig 
ner  of  eating  than  from  the  kind  of  food  taken. 

Kat  with  an  alinicnllvr  ///c/zj:^///,  with  the  min<l  pleasantly      f^^t  uith 

,  ,  ,  •  r  1  r  1  Proper 

concentrated  on  the  ijood  vou  are  extractmg  trom  the  tood. 

\\'hile  eating  w  ith  this  alimentive  thought,  mentally  segre- 
gate the  different  llavors.  of  which  there  are  distinctixely  three.      Fir.v,,r 
a',  least,  in  every  article  of  food. 

In  order  to  segregate  and  detect  the  dift'erent  flaxors  of  Mastuation 
food,  it  must  lie  thoroughly  masticated.  Take  thirty-two 
distinct  "chews"  to  ever}-  mouthful  of  solid  food,  breaking 
all  globules  and  extracting  the  juice,  that  perfect  satisfaction 
m.av  be  afforded  the  faculty  of  alimentiveness,  thereby  better 
[)rei)aring  the  food  stuff's  for  digestion.  ^Mastication  is  not 
all  that  is  to  be  done,  but  the  conscious  al)straction  of  the 
uiices  and  fla\'ors  of  the  food  is  the  i)rime  object  of  mastica- 
tion. 

Drink  from  two  to  four  (|uarts  of  water  every  twenty-four      Drinking- ami 
hours:  take  plenty  of  exercise  in  the  open  air;  this,  together      t"-^'?'-"-*'"^' 
\\  ith   jiroper  eating,   will  cure  a  greater  number  of  cases  of 
constipation  than  any  other  treatment.      Drinking  water  freely 
immediately  after  rising  is  always  recommended. 

Do  not  eat  with   a  "fear  thought."     Fear  is  a  thief;  it      Fenr  Tii<„ij^iit 
robs  you  of  vour  defensi\'e  power.      Fear  in  the  chemical  lal)- 
oratory  of  the  mind  ])roduces  the  acids  of  the  system. 

Do  not  allow  yonr  anger  to  become  aroused  while  eating.      Angler 
Anger  creates  a  poison  in  the  blood  and  impairs  digestion;  it 
creates  the  caustic  alkali  of  the  system;  this  is  equally  as  ir- 
ritating to  the  alimentary  canal  as  is  an  excess  of  acid. 

An  excess  of  worrv  creates  an  abnormal  amount  of  acid  in      \\<>rry 

the  blood,  and  this  is  constipating  in  its  effects.      Worry  is  a 

depressor.      It  is  the  source  of  the  greater  part  of  all  trouble. 
15 


222 


SIAMEXE     HOME     TREATMENT. 


Bless  the  Foot! 

Vital  Prin  cip  Ic 
of  Good  Health 


Mechanicul 
yiaiiipula  tioiis 


Spinal 
Treatment 

liaising  the  Ribs 


Friction  Bath 


Warni- 

^vater 

Enema 


\\'orrv  depresses  the  vital  forces,  and  throws  the  body  out  of 
harmony  ^Yith  health  thoughts. 

Instead  of  fear  (while  eating),  create  a  defensive  and  self- 
reliant  thought,  and  you  will  neutralize  the  acid  condition 
thereby  created,  and  your  constipation  will  disappear. 

Bless  the  food  by  smiling  upon  it  with  your  inner  con- 
sciousness, as  you  think  how  good  it  is  and  how^  satisfying. 

Eat  and  drink  to  your  health.  However  paradoxical  this 
may  soimd,  it  is,  nevertheless,  the  vital  principle  of  good  diges- 
tion. 

By  following  the  above  rules  for  eating,  less  food  will  be 
required;  more  nutrition  will  be  obtained  from  the  food,  more 
strength  and  power  for  digestion,  and  there  will  be  less  ir- 
ritating, fermenting  substance  to  evacuate  from  the  alimentary 
canal. 

The  mechanical  manipulative  treatment  from  the  eighth 
dorsal  to  the  last  lumbar,  and,  specifically,  any  point  that  may 
be  contracted,  will  meet  all  causes  and  conditions  more  often 
than  all  other  remedies  combined. 

Give  a  general  spinal  treatment  (par.  230)  the  entire  length 
of  the  back-bone,  relaxing  all  the  muscles. 

Give  treatments  for  expanding  the  chest  and  raising  the 
ribs  (pars.  277  and  228). 

Friction  baths  (par.  316  or  317)  will  cure  a  large  number 
of  cases  where  there  is  too  much  heat  in  the  lower  bowels ;  but 
this  treatment  applies  to  plethoric  people  rather  than  cold, 
anemic  cases.  The  friction  bath  should  always  be  followed 
by  the  general  manipulative  treatment. 

Large,  warm-water  enemas,  100  degrees  to  105  degrees  F., 
under  good  pressure,  taken  about  three  times  a  week,  with 
the  use  of  Siamene  Antiseptic  Wash,  is  a  good  treatment 
when  the  constipated  condition  has  existed  long  enough  to 
produce  a  sallow  skin,  poor  circulation  of  the  blood,  sleepless 
nights,  neuralgic  pains,  etc. 

The  w^arm-water  enema  requires  a  fountain  syringe  (page 
244)  with  long  tubing,  eight  to  ten  feet ;  this  should  be  hung 


DISEASKS  :   Tlli:iR   S\'.M  I'lO.MS   A.ND  TREATMEXT.  223 

high  u[)t)n  tlie  wall.  The  height  will  increase  the  pressure. 
The  greater  the  pressure  the  l)etter  the  results.  From  one  to 
five  gallons  of  water  shi^ukl  he  used. 

Place  the  patient   up(^n   the  left  side,   and   fill   the  colon.      Pm^ition  of 
Turn  upon  the  hack;  retain  as  long  as  possihle  (from  five  to      I'.-uicnt 
ten  minutes)  ;  rotate  and  knead  the  ahdomen  before  evacuating 
the  bowels.     The  physical  and  breathing  exercises  for  the  liver 
and  bowels  should  not  be  neglected  (par.  304). 

It  often  becomes  necessary  to  resort  to  the  use  of  drugs.      Moiicni 
Invariably  treat  with  tonics  and  remedies  that  kill  germs.     All 
physic  remedies  produce  constipation. 

Siamene  Fruit  Laxative  is  a  tonic  to  the  nerves  of  the  j.-^„n  j^.,xnthc 
stomach,  liver  and  bowels,  and  also  a  germicide.  It  has  a  nnd  xcrve  Food 
strong  affinity  for  the  coli-communis,  the  germ  peculiar  to  the 
alimentary  canal.  \\'hen  taken  in  large  quantities  of  fresh, 
cold  water  on  an  empty  stomach,  in  connection  with  the  thor- 
ough application  of  Siamene  Nerve  Food  to  the  spinal  centers, 
it  will  never  fail  to  cure  the  most  obstinate  cases  of  constipa- 
tion. It  is  only  those  remedies  that  act  as  a  tonic  to  the  fine 
sensitive  nerves  of  the  alimentary  canal  and  germicides  that 
can  be  administered  with  good  results. 

PHILOSOPHY    OF    CONSTIPATION. 

Too  much  consideration  can  not  be  given  the  subject  of 
constipation,  nor  can  too  much  be  said  of  the  importance  of 
having  a  clear  understanding  of  the  part  constipation  plays 
in  the  role  of  health. 

There  is  an  underlying  principle  running  through  this  sub-      rv„/er/W/i^ 
ject,  which  must  be  clearly  comprehended.  principle 

Constipation  checks  the  fecal  matter  which  should  be  ex- 
creted from  the  alimentary  canal. 

Consequently,  noxious  gases  form  and  accumulate  in  large 
ciuantities  in  the  intestinal  tube,  producing  pressure  in  every 
direction  upon  the  walls  of  the  intestines,  compressing  the 
lacteal  vessels    (the  food-absorbing  vessels),  impairing"  their 


224  SI  AM  EXE     HOME     TREATMENT. 

function,  and  thereby  shutting  off  the  supply  of  nutritive  ele- 
ment to  the  blood. 

This  pressure  from  the  gases  also  i)re\'ents  the  intestinal 
\\alls  from  throwing  off  the  waste  material  of  the  system. 

These  noxious  gases,  being  under  high  pressure,  permeate 
the  tissues  and  blood,  and  unite  with  this  waste  material, 
thereby  increasing  the  fertility  of  this  foreign  substance,  and 
further  encumbering  tlie  system. 

This  waste  material  is  then  carried  by  the  circulatory  sys- 
tem into  all  parts  of  the  body,  thereby  furnishing  fruitful  soil 
for  the  propagation  of  foreign  germs. 

Taking  this  into  consideration,  we  may  clearly  see  that 
constipation  may  be  the  i)rime  source  of  many  diseases. 

DISEASE   OF    THE    INTESTINES. 

360.   Inflammation  of  the  l)owels. 
Treatment  Trcotuicui. — Scc     treatment     for     inflammation     of     the 

stomach  (par.  356).  Cleanse  the  canal  by  abstaining  from 
food  and  drinking  lar^^c  quantities  of  water  with  small 
amount  of  Siamene  Fruit  Laxative,  in  proi)ortion  of  one  tea- 
spoonful  to  a  quart.  Drink  one  pint  e\ery  hour  until  the 
liowels  are  thoroughly  flushed.  Commence  with  large,  warm- 
water  enema,  four  quarts.  I'his  treatment  will  applv  to  both 
the  upper  and  lower  bowel.  After  the  bowels  are  thoroughly 
cleansed,  give  a  mixture,  composed  of  one-fourth  grain  doses 
of  sulphate  of  berberine  and  a  teaspoonful  of  Siamene  Catarrh 
Cure,  in  a  wine-glass  of  water,  or  one  teaspoonful  of  peroxide 
of  hydrogen  every  three  hours.  These  remedies  kill  the  bac- 
teria and  tonic  the  bowels.  -Vpply  sweating  comi)ress  (see 
par.  313),  and  change  once  in  four  hours. 

APPENDUTTIS. 

Symptoms  361.  Syiuf^to]ns. — Inflammation    of   the   ap]:)endix    is   pre- 

eminently a  disease  attended  with  ])ain  and  tenderness  in  the 
fossa  of  the  right  hip.  The  appendix  lies  in  the  right  hip 
fossa,  but  is  Aariable  in  position.  To  locate  ap])roximatel_\". 
draw  a  line  from  the  highest  point  of  the  right  hip-bone  to 


DISKASKS:    'r!li:iK   SNM  ITOMS    AND    l"KI".A  T  M  i:  XT.  22^ 

a  ])(iint  dircctl}'  oxer  the  i)iil)ic  arch,  llicnce  tn  the  na\i'l.  and 
from  thence  to  tlie  startinj^-point.  t'orniini;"  a  triangle;  takiiii;'  a 
]  I. lilt  midway  l)et\\een  tlie  ixiint  of  the  hiplxuie  and  the  pnhic 
arch,  and  a  little  above  the  line  toward  the  navel,  is  nsnally 
round  the  appendix;  howe\er,  it  sometimes  radiates  in  ditfer- 
ent  directions,  from  one  to  two  inches. 

Apiiendicitis  is  essentialK'  a  disease  of  adults.  It  ])resents 
itself  in  different  forms, — acute  catarrhal  appendicitis,  ulcera- 
tive a])pendicitis.  chronic  recurring-  a])])endicitis,  and  ])erfora- 
ti\e  api)entlicitis.  In  this  cha])ter  we  will  refer  [jrimarily  to 
the  acute  and  recurrent  appendicitis. 

Causes. — .\cute  a])pendicitis  may  be  caused  from  exposure  cnuscs 
tc  cold  and  wet;  from  infectious  processes  due  to  constipation 
and  hard  fecal  masses,  favoring  an  extraordinary  accumula- 
tion of  l)acteria  in  that  part;  from  a  peculiar  form  of  bacteria 
supposed  to  be  from  intluenza  and  from  torpid  and  tired  nerves 
controlling-  the  circulation  of  blood  to  this  part. 

Recurrent  ap]iendicitis  always  h.as  an  acute  attack  first.  Recurrent 
following  this  one  of  two  conditions,  or  both  mav  exist;  AmjciuUcitia 
namely,  fecal  accunmlations  or  intlammator}-  products  in  the 
appendix,  or  an  impaired  condition  of  the  ner\e  centers  that 
control  the  circulation  thereto.  Wdiatever  the  immediate 
cause  may  be,  whether  a  (|uickly-acting  (tr  silentlv-working 
<-ne,  the  attack  itself  is  usuall}-  sudden,  and  announces  itself 
in  acute  abdominal  pain  and  tenderness  in  this  region,  some- 
times by  nausea  and  vomiting,  d  he  ])ain  is  sometimes  mis- 
leading, as  it  may  be  referred  to  the  lower  part  of  the  abdomen, 
sometimes  to  the  navel  region.  It  has  at  hrst  the  character 
ot  Colic.  It  is  soon  observed  to  be  associated  witli  tenderness, 
which  iranifests  itself  not  necessaril}-  o\er  the  pain,  but  o\'er 
the  seat  of  the  pain,  the  ap])endix.  'renderness  and  swelling, 
as  well  as  the  sha])e  of  the  ap])en(lix,  may  be  recognized  bv 
deep  pressure  over  the  a])pendix.  There  are  still  other  sviu])- 
toms  that  are  met  with  in  ap])endicitis. — moderate  fe\-er,  con- 
stipation and  diminution  in  (piantity  of  urine.  Appendicitis, 
when  caused. from  constipation,  mav  manifest  itself  l)v  a  very 


226  SIAMEXE     HOME     TREATMENT. 

slight  i)ain  occurrini^"  for  weeks  and  even  months  before  the 
attention  of  the  in(h\i(hial  is  specifically  called  to  it. 
Treatment  Treatment. — In  all  cases  of  appendicitis,  the  first  indica- 

tion in  the  treatment  is  to  remove  all  offending  causes ;  they 
are.  primarily,  in  the  alimentary  canal,  or,  secondarily,  in  th^ 
nerve  centers  controlling  the  circulation  in  the  part  affected; 
in  some  cases  th.is  order  is  reversed. 

First,  give  large,  warm-water  enemas,  three  to  five  gallons 
(page  244).  high  pressure,  ten  to  twenty  feet,  washing  the 
colon  out  thoroughly;  following  this,  give  an  enema  of  three 
or  four  quarts  with  Siamene  Antisei>tic  \\'ash,  as  used  in- 
ternally. This  douche,  followed  by  Antiseptic  Wash,  should 
be  repeated  every  four  to  six  hours,  until  the  acute  attack  has 
subsided. 

Give  general  spinal  treatment  to  relieve  all  tension  of 
nerve  centers  along  the  spine,  and  special  attention  to  all  con- 
tracted and  tender  muscles  in  the  lower  dorsal  and  lumbar 
regions,  freeing  the  circulation  (par.  112).  Turn  the  patient 
on  the  back;  give  general  and  careful  vibration  over  the  ap- 
pendix three  to  five  minutes,  avoiding  pain.  Pain  is  a  signal 
line.  Massage  the  colon,  commencing  at  the  upper  end.  which 
is  low  down  in  the  fossa  of  the  right  hip,  and  move  upward 
in  a  direct  line  to  a  point  near  the  ribs,  across  the  abdomen, 
above  the  navel  to  a  corresponding  point  on  the  opposite  side, 
and  down  the  left  fossa. 

The  patient  should  be  put  to  bed  and  be  confined  there 
until  the  pain  and  soreness  have  subsided.  Give  Siamene  Laxa- 
tive Lozenges  to  keep  the  upper  bowels  in  a  good  condition. 
Give  the  tablets  upon  retiring,  after  the  food  has  digested. 
The  diet  should  be  restricted  to  light,  nutritious,  predigested 
foods,  sparing  in  quantity,  thus  avoiding  accumulations  of 
fecal  matter  in  the  bowels.  If  the  case  is  of  a  chronic  re- 
current nature,  apply  Siamene  Rheumatic  Oil  over  the  ap- 
pendix every  day  for  two  or  three  weeks. 

If  this  treatment  is  persevered  in.  many  operations  will  be 
avoided  and  manv  lives  sa\'ed. 


diseases:  their  symptoms  axd  treatment.         227 

hemorrhoids. 

362.  lleinorrhoids  (piles), — a  varicose  or  enlarged  condi- 
tion of  the  veins  of  the  walls  of  the  rectum,  blind  or  bleeding, 
internal  or  external. 

Diagnosis — It    is    recognizeil    l)y    the    itching-,    irritation,      oLis^noi^iii 
mucous  and  bloody  discharges  and  the  presence  of  tumors. 

Treatment. — Give  general  spinal  treatment  (par.  230)  to  Trtntment 
free  the  circulation  to  all  the  internal  organs  that  may  be  in- 
volved, giving  special  attention  to  all  the  contracted  muscles 
from  the  eighth  dorsal  to  the  fifth  lumbar  and  all  the  sacral 
nerves.  Give  treatment  to  the  rectum  internally  (par.  236)  ; 
it  the  rectum  is  very  sensitive,  cleanse  the  hands,  anoint  the 
fingers  well  \\\\.\\  carbolized  vaseline,  with  four  per  cent  of 
cocaine,  before  giving  the  internal  treatment.  Introduce  one 
Siamene  Rectal  Suppository  each  night,  previously  taking  a 
^\■arm- water  enema.  If  there  is  much  heat  and  pain,  take 
Siamene  Friction  Bath  (par.  316  or  317)  ;  let  the  time  for 
taking  the  bath  vary  from  one  to  four  hours,  according  to 
the  case. 

bladder. 

363.  Cystitis, — inflammation  of  the  bladder. 

Syiuptonis. — Pain  above  and  behind  the  pubic  arch,  burn-     symptoms 
ing  sensation  of  the  neighboring  parts ;  usually  commences 
with  a  chill ;  frec^uent  desire  to  urinate. 

Treatment. — Copious  drinks  of  mucilaginous  w^ater,  such  Treatment 
as  slippery  elm,  flax-seed,  or  marsh-mallow  tea.  Give  Siamene 
Diuretic  Mixture.  Treat  the  lower  dorsals,  and  all  the  lum- 
bar and  sacral  nerves  to  free  the  circulation.  Give  Siamene 
Fruit  Laxative  to  open  the  bowels.  If  the  inflammation  be-  chronic  cystitis 
comes  chronic,  inject  into  the  bladder  daily  Siamene  Catarrh 
Cure,  mixed  with  warm,  soft  water.  For  the  latter,  attach 
a  soft  rubber  catheter  to  a  fountain  syringe,  introducing  the 
catheter  into  the  bladder.  Jn  thirty  years  of  active  experience, 
I  have  fDund  nothing  so  eft'ective  in  curing  inflammation  of 
the  bladder. 


228  SIAMEXE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

KIDNEYS. 

364.  Xephritis. — inflaniniation  of  the  kidneys,  acute  and 
chronic. 

Symptoms  Sxiiiptoms. — Dcep-scated   pain    over   kichieys.    aggravated 

bv  motion,  pressure  or  jar;  urine  scanty,  highly  colored  or 
mixed  with  blood  or  mucus;  sometimes  nausea  and  vomiting. 
If  in  the  acute  form,  fever  is  present. 

Treatment  Trcatiucut. — Givc   Siauicue  ]\Iedicated   Sweat  Bath    (par. 

307  or  309)  once  every  other  day,  followed  by  general  spinal 
treatment  (par.  -230).  giving  special  attention  to  the  lumbar 
nerves.  Keep  the  bowels  loose  with  Siamene  Fruit  Laxative, 
(live  Siamene  Diuretic  ^Mixture. 

URIC    ACID. 

365.  From  mal-assimilation.  non-aeration,  carbonace(JUS, 
food  or  malted  liquors,  uric  acid  accumulates  in  the  blood  and 
kidnevs,  where  it  gives  rise  to  the  most  excruciating  pain 
i'.nd  stiffening  of  the  muscles  of  the  loins,  small  of  the  back, 
joints,  lor'i-  muscles,  irritating  all  the  urinary,  and  sometimes 
I'eneratix'e,  org-ans ;  sometimes  the  eves  and  mouth,  and  c\'en 
the  stomach  and  alimentary  canal,  to  the  extent  of  inilamma- 
tion,  pnxlucing  rheumatic  pains. 

Treatment. — Remove  all  causes,  and  adopt  a  radical 
change  of  diet ;  abstain  from  carbonaceous  foods,  malted  and 
fermented  liquors  of  all  descriptions ;  free  the  circulation  of 
the  entire  body  by  giving  general  treatment  (Chapter  X), 
squeezing,  pinching,  rolling,  and  pulling  all  the  long  muscles 
gentlv.  firmly  and  deeply,  observing  specitically  the  contracted 
and  tender  spots  from  the  sixth  dorsal  to  the  fifth  lumbar. 
Give  Siamene  Fruit  Laxative  night  and  morning,  with  copious 
drinks  of  soft  or  distilled  water ;  to  neutralize  the  super- 
abundant uric  acid  crystals  in  the  body,  give  Siamene  Diuretic 
Mixture. 

DIABETES. 

366.  Causes. — Sugar  in  the  urine,  a  nervous  disease  affect- 
ing the  base  of  the  brain,  reflecting  upon  the  liver  and  kidneys. 


Treatment 


I)1Si:asi-:s  :  tiii:iu  snmitoms  and  ikk  atm  lixr.         2J9 

This  disease  is  iii\  ariahly  associated  with  a  neuritic  state,  in 
which  ner\e-tire,  (tverwork  or  worry  play  an  iinpurtant  i)art. 
It  is  essentiallv  a  conditiiin  dI"  l)rain  wreckage  and  nerve  col- 
k;pse.  When  a  ci)-(irdinatin_^-  chemical  center  in  tlie  l)rain  is 
damaged  and  the  liver  is  therehy  overstimulated.  grape  sugar 
is  elaborated  in  siii)eral)tmdant  (piantities. 

This  affected  brain  center  in  tlie  meantime  controls  the 
liing.  impairing  its  tmiction,  and,  in  consecpience,  the  ozone- 
torming  power  of  this  organ  is  impaired.  This  snper- 
abiuKkuit  (piantity  of  sugar  is  not  oxygenized  or  burned  u]). 
hence  the  abnormal  (piantity  of  this  agent  in  the  blood  and 
tissues  of  the  body.  This  gives  fruitful  soil  for  the  ])ropaga- 
tion  of  the  fungi  which  is  characteristic  of  the  disease. 

Diagnosis. — The  diagnosis  rests  chiefly  u])on  the  follow-  ninf/nosis 
ing  symptoms:  (loneness.  a  peculiar  nerve  exhaustion,  excess- 
ive appetite  for  food  and  drink,  sweetish  odor  to  the  breath, 
constipation,  specific  graxity  of  urine  hea\)'.  Its  fungi  or 
bacteria  are  capable  of  culture,  and  will  inoculate  other  ani- 
mals, when  injected  into  the  blood,  and  ])roduce  the  disease. 

Treat inoit. — Cieneral  spinal  treatment  daily  to  free  the  Trjntmcnt 
circulation  and  liberate  the  tension  from  all  the  spinal  centers; 
strict  dietetic  measiu'es,  abstaining  from  all  saccharine  foods, 
sweets  and  starches ;  mental  rest,  positive  abstinence  from  all 
worry  and  mental  labor;  outdoor  exercise  and  manual  labor; 
l)actericides  that  destroy  the  fimgi  only  are  benehcial  in  this 
disease ;  give  Siamene  Diabetic  Cure. 

Take  Siamene  physical  and  mental  culture  ( pars.  zy^^.  274 
and  z'j'^ )  to  increase  the  breathing  capacity  and  promote  the 
elimination  of  sugar  in  the  blood. 

KIIEI'MATIS.M     AND    COl'T. 

367.  Rheumatism  and  gout  are  essentially  diseases  of  the 
serous  membranes  of  the  body,  the  fascia  ( the  co\-ering  mem- 
brane of  muscular  fibers),  the  i)eriosteum  (  the  covering  mem- 
brane of  the  b;Mies),  the  pericardium  (the  covering  membrane 
of  the  heart),  with  other  membranes  and  the  joints.     They 


230  SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

are  dependent  upon  the  presence  in  the  blood,  of  a  form  of 
poisonous  material,  a  micro-organism,  which,  under  great  and 
persistent  cerebral  depression,  evolves  from  the  fermentation 
of  mal-digested  and  mal-assimilated  foods,  perhaps  from 
starchy  and  saccharine  elements.  This  micro-organism  has 
a  peculiar  affinity  for  the  fibrous  and  serous  tissues  of  the  body. 
These  diseases  are  divided  into  acute  and  chronic  forms. 
Diagnosis  Diaguosis. — Their  recognition  is  easy.     Gout  affects  the 

periosteum  of  the  extremities,  the  fingers  and  toes,  and  rheuma- 
tism the  serous  coverings  of  the  muscles,  joints  and  heart. 
There  is  a  profound  nerve  depression  and  an  acid  condition 
of  the  blood,  with  the  urine  literally  loaded  with  uric  acid 
crystals.  The  bacillus  or  germ  can  be  detected  in  all  the 
excretions  from  the  body. 

In  acute  cases,  there  is  both  acute  and  dull  pain  of  a  severe 
form  in  the  affected  parts,  heat  and  swelling,  elevation  of  the 
temperature  of  the  body,  profound  nervous  depression,  con- 
stipation, scanty  and  highly-colored  urine,  loss  of  appetite, 
etc.  There  is  visible  in  the  field  of  the  microscope  minute 
cylindrical  rods,  rounded  at  their  extremities,  usually  straight, 
and  united  in  chains  of  two  or  more  articulations.  They  are 
seen  reproducing  by  fusion,  and,  like  all  other  disease  germs, 
excrete  ptomaine  poisons. 
Acute  Treatment. — Raise  the  degree  of  the  vital  force  by  e\"ery 

Rheumatism  mcaus  possible,  so  as  to  prevent  fermentation  and  germ  evolu- 
tion; sterilize  and  completely  annihilate  the  germ.  To  effect 
this,  first  remove  the  pressure  from  all  of  the  ner\-e  centers, 
both  central  and  general,  by  giving  general  treatment 
(Chapter  X)  ;  to  relax  all  muscular  tension  bearing  upon  the 
nerve  centers,  giving  special  attention  to  the  centers  governing 
the  heart,  liver  and  kidneys,  give  Siamene  Sweat  No.  i  or  No. 
2,  preferably  No.  i,  when  practical.  These  sweats  should  be 
given  every  other  day.  for  they  open  one  of  the  main  avenues 
of  excretion  of  ptomaine  poison  and  stimulate  all  the  internal 
organs  to  renewed  action.  Give  Siamene  Fruit  Laxative  in 
large   quantities   of   water   e\'ery    hour   until   the   alimentary 


diseases:  their  symptoms  and  treatment.         231 

canal  is  ihon.ut^iily  cleansed.  .\l'ter  this  give  the  Sianiene 
Fruit  Laxative  once  a  day  in  large  ([nantities  of  water,  one 
hour  before  the  morning  meal,  (live  Siamene  ivhenmalic 
Germ  Killer  to  destroy  and  eradicate  from  the  system  the 
bacillus.  Apply  externally  to  the  affected  parts  Siamene 
fain  Liniment. 

For  chronic   articular   rheumatism,    where   the   joints   are      ciuonic 
enlarged  and  stiff,  give  general  spinal  treatment   (par.  230),     ArtuaLir 
Siamene  Sweats   (par.  307),  Siamene  Fruit  Laxative,  where     f<'"-'"'"»tisn, 
it  is  indicated,  and  apply  to  the  aft'ected  joints  Siamene  Rheu- 
matic Oil  once  in  twehe  hours. 

Gout  is  treated  in  the  same  general  way  as  rheumatism. 

Strictly  abstain  from  all  saccharine  and  starchy  foods,  to- 
gether with  malt  liquors  of  every  description.  Use  Siamene 
Unleavened  Bread,  fruits  and  meat  in  small  quantities.  Use 
olive  oil  as  a  substitute  for  butter,  and  especially  avoid  milk 
and  cheese. 

female  generative  organs — leucorrhea. 

368.  Sxinptoms. — Leucorrhea  or  whites.  An  acute  or  symptoms 
chronic  inflammation  of  the  lining  membrane  of  the  vaginal 
walls  and  uterus,  attended  with  burning  pain  and  itching; 
profuse  muco-purulent  or  milky-white  discharge;  if  chronic, 
sometimes  blood  and  mucus  accompany  this ;  general  las- 
situde, constipation,  loss  of  energy,  pains  in  the  back,  and 
a  general   "grunty"    feeling. 

Treatment. — Give  general  treatment  (Chapter  X)  every  Treatment 
other  day ;  on  the  alternating  day,  specific  manipulative  treat- 
ment to  the  lumbar  and  sacral  region,  giving  special  atten- 
tion to  anv  localized  tender  or  contracted  muscle ;  Siamene 
Movement  over  the  back,  radiating  from  the  si)ines  around 
the  loins,  and  over  the  abdomen  in  the  groins  above  the 
pubes;  Siamene  Medicated  Sweat  Bath  three  times  a  week, 
to  stimulate  the  vasomotor  nerves  of  the  entire  body;  Sia- 
mene L'terine  Sup])ositories  every  night  before  retiring,  fol- 
lowed bv  a  douche  of  Siamene  Lterine  Tablet  everv  morning. 


Symptoms 


Trcntmcnt 


232  SIAMKXH     IIOMK     TREATMENT. 

If  the  case  is  chronic   and   nljstinatc.   lake   SianiL-ne    I'riclion 
Batli    (par.  317)    four  to  six  times  a  day. 

Di  s  r  L  A  c  1-:  M  ]■:  n  t  < )  e  l-  t  e  k  l'  s  . 

369.  I'rolapsus  (falling),  anteversion  or  retrox'ersion 
(  wonil)  falling  forward  or  backward),  lateral  \ersion  (  w(jmb 
falling  to  right  or  left),  constitute  the  different  forms  of  dis- 
placement of  the  womb. 

Causes. — The  most  fre(|uent  are  general  debility,  weak 
heart,  ])oor  circulation,  impoverished  blood,  an  excess  of  labor, 
too  constantly  on  the  feet,  straining  in  lifting,  excessi\'e  in- 
dulgence in  sexual  act,  injiu'ies  ttj  the  back,  falls,  blows, 
strains,  etc. 

Svinf^loiiis. — Weight  and  dragging  sensation  in  the  loins, 
disordered  menstruation,  retention  of  urine,  constipation, 
leucorrhea,  painful  menstruation,  ])rolapsus  or  falling  of  the 
vagina. 

Trcaiuicnt. — Change  the  frame  of  mind,  improxe  the  gen- 
eral circulation  l)y  general  treatment  once  every  other  day. 
On  the  alternating  day  give  general  sjiinal  treatment,  with 
special  attention  to  all  the  uterine  centers  ( ])ar.  117).  Re- 
place the  uterus  by  standing  on  the  head  and  ha\ing  an  at- 
tendant ])etrassage  the  uterus  tln-ough  the  al)dominal  wall 
above  the  pubic  arch  every  night  before  retiring.  The  ])atient 
can  anoint  the  finger  with  SianuMie  \erve  Food,  and  intro- 
duce it  int(i  the  vagina,  drawing  it  around  on  all  sides  with 
a  full  sweep,  straightening  out  the  folds  of  the  ^■agina  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  stimulate  them;  it  ma}'  be  ad\isable  to 
have  an  attendant  do  this.  This  increases  the  ca])illary  cir- 
culation of  the  vagina  and  titertis,  gixing  tone  to  all  the 
nerves,  and  the  l)ettcr  preparing  the  absorbents  to  take  up 
the  tonic  and  food  pro])erties  of  the  Siamene  I  terine  .Sup- 
positories. Follow  this  b\-  the  introdnctimi  of  a  vSiamene 
Uterine  Stippository  well  up  against  the  uterus;  remain  in 
a    recumbent    position    all    night;    u])on    rising,    take   a    large 


1)1si:asi:s  :   riii:iR  snm  i' ro.MS  a.\i>  rRi-:.\  im  i:.\'1'.         j^^^ 

(louche  of  tepid  or  cold  water,  iisins^-  Sianieiie  I'terine    Tablets. 
Take  Siainene  I'rictioii   Uatli   from   tour  to  six  times  a  da}'. 

Take  abundant  rest;  see  to  it  that  the  ])atient  is  not  on  the 
feet,  if  it  can  be  axoided.  sufficiently  lony^  to  become  fatigued. 
Take  Siamene  bruit  Laxative  or  Siamene  Laxatixe  Lozenges 
in  large  (|uantities  of  water  immediately  after  rising;  Sia- 
iiiene   I'terine  Tonic  three  times  a  day. 

Cjc'slatiini. — When  there  is  local  congestion,  hardening  ccstntian 
and  enlargement  of  the  Ixxly  of  the  uterus,  in  addition  to  the 
foregoing  treatment,  apply  sweating  compress  (par.  313)  at 
night-time  in  the  last  six  to  eight  weeks  of  gestation.  it  is 
excellent  to  ;i])ph'  the  sweating  compress  without  the  gauze 
or  paper,  that  there  ma)-  be  a  free  radiation  of  the  local  heat, 
thereby  gi\-ing  tone  to  all  of  the  uterine  and  adjacent  tissues, 
and  better  ])reparing  the  mother  for  an  eas}-  and  health)'  ter- 
mination of  this  period.  For  the  treatment  of  labor  see 
par.   118. 

METRITES. 

370.  Metritis, — inflammation  of  the  lining  membrane  and 
neck  of  the  womb. 

Causes. — Cold,    rheumatism,    suppression    of    menses,    re-      c:iuses 
tention  of  placental  debris,  injuries  of  \arious  kinds,  gonor- 
rhea, abnormal  mating  and  sexual  intercoiu'se. 

Syiiif^loiiis. — Pain   in  the  back,   darting  to  the  pubes  and      symi>t,>m.< 
down  the  thighs,  frecpient  chills,  jiulse  ([uick,  feeble  or  slow, 
breast  tender  and  painful.  ])ain  in  the  sacral  region  when  the 
bowels   act,    nausea   and   \-omiting. 

I'rcalnicjil. — b'ree  the  circulation.  remo\e  all  ner\-ous  pres-  Treatment 
sure  by  general  s])inal  treatment.  gi\ing  special  attentii-n  to 
the  lumbar  and  sacral  nerves,  followed  by  Siamene  Mo\e- 
ment  over  the  lumbar  nerves,  loins,  sacrum  and  hij)s,  down 
the  inner  side  of  the  thighs.  Take  Siamene  Friction  liath 
I  ])ar.  317)  four  to  six  times  a  day.  (live  \aginal  and  rectal 
injection  of  Siamene  I'terine  Tablets,  three  to  four  (|uarts  of 
water  to  be  used  at  one  time,  once  in  fotn^  hours.      As  soon 


234  SIAMENE    HOME    TREATMENT. 

as  the  acute  stag-e  has  passed,  and  it  becomes  clironic,  use 
Siamene  Uterine  Suppositories  every  night. 

MASTITIS. 

371.  Mastitis, — inflamed  or  enlarged  breasts.  Acute  in- 
flammation of  the  breasts  of  mothers  often  occurs  in  the 
first  four  or  five  days  after  the  infant  is  born,  during  the 
early  period  of  lactation,  and  is  sometimes  exceeding  painful 
and  troublesome  to  rid  one's  self  of.  The  following  treat- 
ment will  never  fail  to  relieve  this  affection  if  properly  ap- 
plied, the  time  varying  in  different  cases  from  several  hours 
to  several  days. 

Symptoms  SyiJiptoiiis. — It  is  first  recognized  by  swelling,  heat,  pain- 

ful lumps  or  enlarged  glands. 

Treatment  Trcatiiiciit. — Frcc  the  circulation  of  all  the  dorsal  nerves 

on  the  side  which  is  affected;  expand  the  chest  (par.  227)  ; 
after  relaxing  all  contracted  muscles  along  the  spine  and  ex- 
panding the  chest,  and  the  patient  is  still  on  the  back,  bare 
the  breasts ;  cleanse  the  hands  with  warm  water  and  soap, 
anoint  with  Siamene  Nerve  Food  and  take  the  breast  in  the 
fingers  and  thumb,  gently  manipulating  and  squeezing  with  a 
very  gentle,  sensitive  touch,  in  the  meantime  having  the  pa- 
tient's eyes  closed,  all  the  muscles  of  the  body  relaxed,  and 
the  mind  concentrated  on  relief,  while  the  operator  drops  out 
of  the  active  state  and  throws  his  mind  into  that  of  love  of 
healing  (pars.  158  and  253),  when  there  will  be  a  unison  of 
the  mind  of  the  patient  and  operator.  Treatment  given  in  this 
condition,  success  is  sure  to  be  attained. 

AMENORRHEA. 

372.  An  absence  of  the  menses.  They  never  may  have 
appeared,  owing  to  congenital  mal-formation  or  debility;  there 
may  be  constitutional  defects  or  they  be  masked  or  vicarious; 
th.ey  may  have  appeared  and  become  suppressed  by  cold,  shock, 
poverty  of  nerve-force  or  uterine  or  ovarian  disease.     They 


DISEASKS:   THEIR   SYMPTOMS   AND  TREATMENT.  235 

may  be  irregular,   coniino-  too   far  apart,   or   from   the  nose, 
mouth,  lungs,  stomach,  or  any  other  i)art  of  the  body. 

Trcat))iciit. — In  all  cases  where  menstruation  is  irregular,  Treatment 
first  remove  the  pressure  from  the  nerve  centers  that  cause  the 
disturbance.  Give  general  spinal  treatment  once  every  other 
day  (par.  230),  giving  special  attention  to  the  heart  centers 
(par.  94)  ;  also  give  special  attention  to  all  the  ovarian  (par. 
119)  and  uterine  centers  (par.  117).  Vibrate  over  the  uterus 
and  ovaries  live  minutes  after  each  spinal  treatment.  Give 
Siamene  Tub  Sweat  (par.  310),  omitting  the  cold  site,  and 
retiring  as  in  Siamene  Sweat  Bath  No.  2  (par.  309),  every 
night,  commencing  from  three  to  five  days  before  the  time 
menstruation  should  appear.  Take  Siamene  Uterine  Tonic 
three  times  a  day  for  two  or  three  months.  If  there  is  uterine 
or  ovarian  trouble,  treat  that  according  to  the  rules  laid 
down  in  the  paragraphs  on  that  subject. 

Have  the  patient  take  light  exercise;  avoid  such  exercise 
as  long  walks,  lifting,  running,  dancing,  etc.  Take  nourish- 
ing food. 

MENORRHAGIA. 

373.  ]^Ienorrhagia. — excessive  menstruation.      Women  be-     Regular 
tween  the  ages  of  fifteen  and  forty-five,  on  an  average,  men-     ^lenstruation 
struate  once  in  twenty-eight  days;  that  is,  they  have  a  san- 
guineous  (bloody)   flow  from  the  uterus.     To  be  normal,  it 
should  take  place  without  pain,   and  should  not  exceed  six 
ounces  in  cjuantity;  if  more  than  this,  it  is  called  menorrhagia. 

Treatment. — Rest  is  essential.  Free  the  circulation  by  Treatment 
giving  spinal  treatment.  If  there  is  soreness  and  contraction 
of  muscles,  and  a  tired  feeling  all  over  the  body,  give  general 
treatment  (Chapter  X),  relaxing  all  the  long  muscles,  giving 
special  attention  to  the  entire  lumbar  region.  Give  Siamene 
Uterine  Tonic  to  tone  up  the  nerves  of  the  uterus  and  ovaries ; 
if  it  is  associated  with  leucorrhea  (whites),  and  relaxed  mus- 
cles of  the  uterus  and  vagina  (prolapsus),  and  a  feeling  of 
general   lassitude,   use   Siamene   Uterine    Suppositories   every 


236  SIAMKXK     IIO.MK     TRKAT.M  KXT. 

iiis4iit.      ("live   Sianicnc   Medicated   Sweat    Iiaths    (par.   307   or 
309)  once  a  week,  except  at  menstruation  peril xl. 

It  there  are  l)earing-down  pains  about  the  uterus  and 
ovaries,  pains  in  tlie  small  of  the  back,  leucorrhea  and  heat, 
give  Siamene  I""riction  Bath  (par.  317)  three  or  four  times 
daily.  For  too  fre(|uent  menstruation.  _gi\e  the  ])receding 
treatment. 

DV.SMEXORRIIEA. 

Trcntmcijt  374.   1)  ysmeuorrlica, — painful     menstruation.        The     flow 

may  be  scanty,  profuse  or  in  ordinary  (|uantit\',  but  always 
excessive  pain  and  general  disorder. 

Treatment. — First  give  general  spinal  treatment,  relax  all 
the  muscles  of  the  lumbar  region,  which  you  will  inxariably 
find  contracted  and  hard.  This  will  relax  the  circulator)- 
fibers  of  the  uterus  and  give  immediate  relief.  After  treat- 
ment, introduce  well  up  against  the  neck  of  the  uterus  a  Sia- 
n^'ene  Uterine  Suppository,  go  to  bed  and  keep  warm.  The 
suppository  will  keep  \.\\)  the  relief  and  tonic  the  nerves  of  the 
uterus.  After  the  Row  has  ceased,  gi\'e  Siamene  Medicated 
Sweat  Bath  twice  a  week.  Use  Siamene  Uterine  Supposito- 
ries ever}'  night  \\\Mm  retiring.  Gix'e  local  Petrassage  treat- 
ment to  lunibar  region  once  a  day.  If  there  is  a  general  de- 
bility, give  Siamene  Uterine  Tonic  three  times  daily.  Pursue 
the  treatment  with  full  faith,  a.nd  ])i)siti\'e  relief  will  be  ob- 
tained. 

MENOPAl'SE,    OR    CHANGE    OF    LIFE. 

375.  I')V  this  term  is  understood  that  period  in  a  woman's 
life  when  she  stops  menstruating.  The  menopause  includes 
a  varying  period  of  time  in  a  woman's  life.  It  may  be  very 
brief  and  abrupt,  or  ma}-  extend  o\er  a  long  ])erio(l  of  time. 
e\en  into  xears.  This  period  extends  from  the  time  of  com- 
mencing irregularit)'  to  the  comjjlete  cessation  of  the  men- 
strual flow.  During  this  period  there  is  a  constant  change 
going  on  in  the  constitution  of  the  woman.  This  change 
creates  the  chain  of  symptoms  peculiar  to  the  indix'idual ;  con- 


diseases:   TUKIR   SYMPTOMS   AND  TRKATMKXT.  _\^7 

sequentlv  different  symptoms  are  produced  in  different  women. 
These  symptoms  include  manifestations  of  peculiar  and  \aried 
nervous  svmptnms.  vertigo,  faintness.  llushes.  cold  hands  and 
feet,  change  of  temperament,  digestive  symptoms,  gastric  fer- 
mentive  dvspepsia,  constipation,  diarrhea,  palpitation,  syn- 
cope, sudden,  severe,  and  often  offensive  sweatings,  loss  of 
memory,  irritable  temper,  fear,  melancholy,  hysteria,  develop- 
ment oi  hair  on  the  chin  and  face,  flaccidity  of  breasts,  in- 
crease of  fat  on  the  abdomen,  a  sallmv.  plethoric  state,  leucor- 
rhea,  etc. 

It  must  be  remembered  that  all  of  these  symptoms  are  not 
to  be  found  in  every  case,  for,  as  previously  stated,  the  symp- 
toms are  governed  by  the  temperament  of  the  patient,  no  two 
having  the  same  temperament. 

Treatment. — The  treatment,  in  general,  is  governed  by  Treatment 
the  indications  present.  "As  the  mind  is,  so  is  the  body." 
There  is  no  mental  or  physical  disturbance  that  this  axiom 
is  more  applicable  to  than  this  disease.  It  is  an  inbred  thought 
tliat  women  must  suffer  during  this  period.  At  this  point 
begin  to  think  otherwise.  I  Avould  suggest  that  the  readers 
of  this  volume,  to  whom  this  subject  is  applicable,  change  the 
order  of  things,  by  thinking  and  continuously  repeating  the 
thought  that  they  will  pass  through  this  change  without  physi- 
cal disturbances.  "If  thoughts  are  things,  and  if  the  body  is 
built  by  things."  let  us  w^eave  into  the  fabric  of  our  own  con- 
stitution a  good  and  healthy  thought,  and  we  are  sure  to  build 
cells  likewise. 

By  a  continuous  line  of  healthy  thoughts,  we  build  a  vol- 
ume of  healthy  cells  and  create  a  desire  for  healthy  acts. 
Healthy  thoughts  and  acts  that  are  in  harmony  create  healthy 
results.  So.  if  the  woman  enters  the  approach  of  this  period 
in  life  with  healthy  thoughts  and  corresponding  healthy  acts, 
she  will  likewise  pass  through  the  "climacteric"  period  with- 
out physical  or  mental  disturbance.  Embodied  in  the  chap- 
ters on  "Mental  ^Medicine."  "Temperaments  and  Manipula- 
tions,"'  "Hydrotherap}'.""  and  "Relation  of  jMental  and  Physi- 
16 


Treatment 


238  SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

Cell  Culture."  are  found  the  thoughts  from  which  the  healthy 
acts  must  spring. 

In  addition  to  the  above,  the  patient  should  have  a  peace- 
ful mind,  take  a  great  deal  of  fresh  air,  mental  diversion,  and 
mental  and  physical  rest.  Give  direct  manipulations  to  the 
spinal  sympathetic  centers  to  keep  the  circulation  equalized 
to  all  parts  of  the  bod  v.  (See  '/General  Treatment."  Chapter 
X.) 

Siamene  ]Medicale(l  Sweat  Baths  should  be  given  at  least 
once  a  week.  If  there  is  any  disturbance  of  the  digestive  or 
circulatory  systems,  with  an  unecjualized  heat  over  the  surface 
of  the  body,  they  should  be  taken  two  or  three  times  a  week. 
Siamene  Uterine  Tonic  should  be  taken  w^hen  there  is  weak- 
ness of  any  character  in  the  ovaries  and  uterus.  The  Sia- 
mene Friction  Bath  should  be  taken  three  times  a  day  if  there 
is  ovarian  and  uterine  congestion,  attended  by  piles,  consti- 
pation or  an  abnormal  heat  about  the  lower  portion  of  the 
bowels. 

OVARITIS. 

376.  Ovaritis. — inflammation  of  the  ovaries. 

Causes. — Cold,  strains,  blows  and  falls,  but  usually  from 
some  uterine  irritation,  as  absorption  of  local  products  and 
the  approach  of  other  deadly  microbes  through  the  vaginal, 
uterine  and  fallopian  canals. 

Treatment. — Rest  in  a  recumbent  position,  free  the  cir- 
culation by  giving  general  spinal  treatment ;  local  spinal  treat- 
ment to  all  the  lumbar  and  lower  dorsals.  Apply  locally  over 
the  ovaries  Siamene  Rheumatic  Oil  once  in  twelve  hours. 
This  will  penetrate  the  skin  and  muscles,  bringing  away,  in 
tufn,  the  inflammatory  products.  Use  from  one  to  five  gal- 
lons of  hot  water,  as  vaginal  douche  (page  197),  once  a  day, 
followed  by  two  quarts  of  warm  water  with  Siamene  Uterine 
Tablets.  If  there  is  pain  of  a  cramping  nature,  introduce 
Siamene  Uterine  Suppositories  well  up  into  the  A-agina.  on  the 
side  next  to  the  affected  ovary.  If  the  case  is  obstinate  and 
protracted,  take  Siamene  Friction  Bath  (par.  317). 


diseases:  their  symttoms  and  tkkat.mkxt.         239 
goxorriika. 

377.  Gonorrhea. — a  specific  inflammation  of  the  nuicons 
surfaces  of  the  generative  organs,  male  and  female.  The 
germ  is  called  the  gono-coccns.  They  are  found  in  abundance 
in  the  discharge  of  the  mucous  surfaces  of  the  generative 
organs.  A  few  females  and  many  males  are  afflicted  with  this 
disease. 

This  germ  produces  serious  conditions  of  the  body  that     Eui-cts  of 
become  chronic,  obstinate  and  very  difficult  to  cure, —  such  as     oonorrUai 
chronic  joint  disease,  rheumatism,  neuralgia,  general  anemia 
and  breaking  down  of  the  constitution,  demoralizing  the  suf- 
ferer mentally  and  morally,  unfitting  him  for  society. 

Symptoiiis. — Varying  from  a  few  hours  to  a  few  days  sytnptamH 
after  exposure,  there  is  a  muco-purulent  discharge,  and  in 
two  to  five  days  there  is  pain  and  inflammation,  the  dis- 
charge increases  in  quantity,  becomes  thicker  and  darker  in 
color,  and  pain  increases ;  sometimes  urination  is  attended  by 
excruciating  pain. 

If  left  alone,  it  runs  into  the  chronic  form,  called  gleet. 
The  discharge  lessens  in  cjuantity,  pain  subsides,  except  along 
the  tract  of  the  urethra  of  the  male  and  vagina  in  the  female, 
where  inflamed  spots  exist.  The  discharge  will  become 
glairy  and  muco-purulent,  and  passes  off  in  drops  from  once 
an  hour  to  once  in  several  days. 

Treatment. — .\cute  form — commence  by  washing  the  ure-  Treattncnt 
thra  out  thoroughly  witli  Siamene  Gonorrhea  Specific,  using 
a  fountain  syringe  or  douche,  suspended  four  or  five  feet  high 
(good  pressure),  twice  daily,  followed  by  prolonged  Siamene 
Friction  Baths  (pars.  316  and  317).  After  this  treatment, 
cleanse  the  hands  thoroughly,  anoint  with  Siamene  Nerve 
Food,  and  roll,  pinch  and  pull  (if  a  male)  the  male  organ 
(penis)  all  the  way  back  to  the  prostate  gland,  to  excite  an 
increased  flow  of  blood  to  the  mucous  surfaces;  if  a  female, 
treat  the  internal  walls  of  the  vagina  1)y  introducing  the  finger 
and  giving  a  free  sweep  around  the  entire  surface  sufficiently 


240  SIAMEXE     HOME     TKEATMEXT. 

bard  to  press  out  all  folds  and  stimulate  the  entire  mucous 
surfaces.  See  to  it  that  all  contracted  muscles  along-  the  lum- 
bar and  sacral  region  are  kei)t  in  a  relaxed  condition,  that 
the  circulation  in  the  urethra,  vagina  and  bladder  may  be 
perfect.  Fear  not  the  results;  this  treatment  will  eradicate 
everv  germ  in  the  tract. 
Gleet  The  treatment  of  gleet  is  the  same  as  the  acute  form. 

ERUPTIVE  FEVERS SCARLET  FEVER. 

378.  Scarlet  fever  is  an  eruptive,  microbian  disease ;  has  a 
period  of  incubation  of  from  four  to  eight  days,  in  which 
the  germ  sprouts;  two  days  of  fever,  in  which  there  is  active 
evolution,  with  ptomaine  excretions ;  three  days  of  rash,  in 
wdiich  the  microbe  seeks  the  skin  or  cutaneous  surface  for  free 
oxygen,  and  localizes  itself  in  nests  or  colonies,  which  gives 
rise  to  the  peeling  of  the  skin.  In  this  peculiar  desquamative 
period,  the  germ  is  alive,  but  dormant,  awaiting  fresh  pasture 
fields  to  feed  upon.  These  little  scales  of  cuticle  are  highly 
contagious,  and  may  be  carried  from  place  to  place  by  the 
wind,  clothes,  letters  and  various  other  ways. 

Symptoms  S \'iii {^fo iiis. — General  lassitude,  slight  elevation  of  tempera- 

ture, tongue  red  (strawberry  appearance),  glands  of  the 
mouth  and  throat  congested  and  heavily  laden  with  germs, 
skin  hot  and  dry ;  eruption  usually  commences  in  the  mouth, 
en  the  forehead,  fore  ])arts  of  the  arms,  upper  chest,  gradually 
spreading  over  the  entire  surface  of  the  body ;  face  velvety, 
temperature  increases  and  throat  becomes  sore. 

Treatment  Trcaiiucnt. — Keep    the    patient    in    bed    until    the    febrile 

period  has  passed,  the  des(|uamative  (peeling  of  skin)  period 
completed,  soreness  of  throat  disappeared,  the  bowels  regu- 
lated and  the  urinary  organs  acting  well.  Not  until  this  is 
the  patient  safe.  The  danger  occurring  in  scarlet  fever  is  not 
so  much  in  the  active  stage  of  the  disease  as  in  the  convalescent 
stage;  for  the  disease  has  a  peculiar  effect  upon  the  vasomotors 
of  the  skin,  weakening  them  and  leaving  the  surface  of  the 
bodv   exposed,   conse(|ucntly   congesting  the   internal    organs. 


DISKASKS  :   Tlli:iK   SN'.M  I' lOMS   AND   TKKATM  i:.\T.  24  I 

.\n  exp»isnrc  of  the  surface  of  llic  Itndy  at  this  peril  id  is  hahle 
to  produce  a  depression  of  the  ki<hie}'  centers.  pro(hicing 
uremia,  coma  and  death. 

During  the  height  of  fever  and  desf|namation  i)criod.  tlie 
patient  slioiild  be  anointed  once  a  day  with  a  light  ap])lication 
of  Siamene  Nerve  Food.  Give  plenty  of  cold  water  or  lemon- 
ade. Use  Siamene  Catarrh  Cure,  repeated  at  fretinent  in- 
tervals, as  a  sprav  or  wash  for  the  nose  and  tln"oat.  Treat 
all  the  spinal  centers  (general  spinal  treatment,  par.  230) 
once  a  day  to  keep  the  circulation  ecjualized  and  internal 
organs  free  from  congestion.  Eat  sparingly,  taking  only 
light  and  easily-digested  food. 

MEASLES. 

379.  This  microbian  disease  originates  by  contagion  and 
infection.  Tliis  microbe  or  germ  of  contagion  is  given  off 
from  the  skin  and  lungs  to  paper,  books,  clothes,  etc. ;  hence  is 
spread  from  one  to  another. 

Diagnosis. — Its  period  of  incubation  is  from  seven  to  four-      /j,Vig-„os/s 
teen  days ;  languor,  lassitude,    debility,    hacking    cough    and 
fever,   followed  by  an  eruption  all  over  the  body,   sneezing, 
coated  tongue  with  a  white  fur  and  headache,  symptoms  be- 
coming more  aggravated  up  to  the  climax  of  the  fever. 

Treatment. — In  all  cases  the  ])atient  should  be  kept  in  Trentment 
bed  in  a  warm,  semi-dark  room,  with  the  atmosphere  kept  sat- 
urated with  some  volatilized  disinfectant,  such  as  carbolic 
acid,  oil  of  eucalyptus,  thymol  or  creoline.  Keep  the  room 
well  ventilated.  Give  plenty  of  drinks,  such  as  lemonade, 
Avarm  or  cold,  as  the  patient  likes.  Bathe  the  body  three 
times  daily  with  a  weak  solution  of  Siamene  Antiseptic  Wash, 
it  being  one  of  the  best  bactericides,  which  has  a  peculiar  de- 
structive tendency  to  this  micro-organism.  Twice  a  day  give 
general  spinal  treatment  ( |)ar.  230),  keeping  the  circulation 
in  all  internal  organs  free.  This  will  protect  the  lungs,  bowels 
and  other  internal  organs,  from  congestion  and  inflammation. 


242  SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMEXT. 

When  llic  fe\er  has  subsided  and  the  skin  desquamated, 
bathe  the  l^ody  all  over,  using  Siamene  Soap  freely;  then 
sponge  off  with  a  weak  solution  of  Siamene  Antiseptic  Wash, 
followed  by  anointing  the  entire  surface  with  Siamene  Nerve 
Food. 

TYPHOID    FEVER. 

380.  'J'yphoid  fever, — a  peculiar  form  of  enteric   (bowel) 
fe\er,  which  prevails  endemically  or  epidemically  among  those 
whose  nervous  system  is   shattered ;  caused  by  the  presence 
of  the  bacillus. 
Dm^nosis  Diaguosis. — It   is    recognized   by    intestinal    disturbances, 

white,  pallid  skin,  sharp  features,  deafness,  bleeding  from  the 
nose,  a  bufif-leather  coated  tongue,  sometimes  being  variable, 
patchy  elevated  pimples,  sores  and  scales  on  the  gums  and 
lips,  chilly  sensations,  fever,  frecjuent,  wiry  pulse,  high  tem- 
perature, diarrhea,  bloody  stools,  a  slight,  papular  eruption 
over  the  skin,  presence  of  the  germ. 

The  germs  are  found  in  the  blood,  on  the  gums,  in  the 
breath,  in  the  lungs,  urine  and  bowels  in  large  cjuantities; 
their  formation  depends  upon  the  strength  of  the  vital  forces 
of  the  patient. 

It  is  chieflv  during  the  growth  and  multiplication  of  the 
germ  in  the  intestines  that  the  ptomaines  are  excreted  and 
that  powerful  toxic  alkaloid,  typho-toxine,  is  formed. 

The  germ  is  communicated  by  contagion  and  infection,  by 
air,    food,   clothing,    water,   milk,    and   seats.     Stools   of  the 
germ-stricken  should  always  be  destroyed  by  fire,  as  they  live 
in  the  earth,  sewers,  drains  and  water. 
TrcRtmvnt  Treatment. — Recum])ent  posture;  two  rooms,  if  possible, 

so  arranged  that  the  bed  can  be  moved  on  casters  without  dis- 
turbing the  patient,  each  room  disinfected  alternately  with 
burning  sulphur;  if  the  patient  is  suffered  to  remain  in  the 
same  room,  wear  the  same  bed  linen,  he  is  at  all  times  suffer- 
ing reinoculation  from  the  microbes  on  the  walls,  floor  and 
clothing;  thrice  daily  sponge  or  bathe  entire  body  with  Sia- 


diseases:   Tlll.IK   SYMPTOMS   AND  TREATMEXT.  243 

niene  Antisci)lic  Wash  or  wann.  strained  lemon  juice  and 
water. 

The  germ  is  sterilized  and  completely  annihilated  by  Sia- 
niene  Bacteria  Killer.  All  clothing  should  be  exposed  to  a 
solution  of  chloride  of  lime,  carbolic  acid,  creoline,  iodol  or 
naphthalene  to  destroy  the  germs. 

The  room  should  be  well  ventilated  and  kept  disinfected 
by  using  any  of  the  above  bactericides,  by  having  cloths  dipped 
in  the  solution  and  suspended  in  the  room  without  wTinging. 
The  patient  should  have  his  lips,  gums,  mouth  and  face  bathed 
in  a  weak  solution  of  Siamene  Bacteria  Killer  or  boro- 
glyceride.  The  body  should  be  frequently  bathed  with  cold 
water  and  bicarbonate  of  soda,  a  level  teaspoonful  to  a  quart 
of  water. 

Give  spinal  treatment  (par.  230)  once  a  day.  after  having 
given  a  warm  soda-water  sponge  bath ;  then  give  large,  tepid 
or  cold  enemas,  with  a  teaspoonful  of  Siamene  Bacteria  Killer 
to  a  quart  of  w^ater,  thrice  daily.  To  reduce  the  temperature, 
give  Siamene  Cold  Bath  (par.  31T).  This  bath  can  be  relied 
upon  to  produce  good  results  in  cases  of  fever. 

If  the  patient  is  in  a  low  condition,  and  the  fever  is  high, 
he  should  invariably  keep  recumbent  position,  never  being  al- 
lowed to  exert  himself  by  getting  up.  Diet  should  be  sparing; 
solid  foods  must  be  strictly  forbidden;  beef  tea  is  one  of  the 
best  diets. 

ECZEMA. 

381.  Eczema  is  a  pustular  disease  of  the  skin,  with  intense 
itching  and  exudation.  When  affecting  the  hand,  it  is  called 
tetter,  a  disease  exceedingly  difficult  to  cure.  It  is  a  microbian 
disease,  having  a  germ  that  is  common  to  the  affection. 

Treatment. — Free  the  circulation  of  the  entire  body  by  gen- 
eral spinal  treatment  (par.  230),  with  special  attention  given 
to  the  nerve  centers  that  control  the  part  affected.  Open  the 
sewerage  system,  the  bowels,  by  Siamene  Fruit  Laxative  or 


Treatment 


244  SIAMEXE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

Sianiene  Laxative  Lozenges,  the  skin  by  Siamene  Medicated 
Sweat  Bath  No.  i,  every  day.  After  the  bath,  wash  the  entire 
body  with  Siamene  Soap.  This  stimulates  all  the  internal 
organs  to  renewed  action.  Bathe  the  parts  of  the  skin  af- 
fected, with  Siamene  Soap  daily ;  apply  old  linen  cloths  or 
surgical  linen,  saturated  with  Siamene  Antiseptic  Wash,  and 
Soft  keep  the  linen  wet. 
Eczema  382.  In  cascs  of  soft  eczema,  with  profuse  discharge  on  the 

face,  hands,  scalp  or  other  i^arts  of  the  body,  apply  linen,  and 
change  three  times  daily,  keeping  the  linen  saturated.  If  the 
constitution  is  run  down,  give  Siamene  Bacteria  Killer  three 
times  daily.  The  Wash  wall  destroy  the  eczema  germ ;  the 
wSiamene  Bacteria  Killer  will  tone  up  the  system  and  destroy 
the  p-erms  in  the  alimentarv  canal  and  blood. 


THE   ENEMA SIMPLE   ENEMA. 

The  simple  enema  is  a  small  quantity  of  water,  with 
or  without  soap,  introduced  into  the  colon  to  evacuate  its  con- 
tents. Simple  enemas  are  used  in  ordinary  cases,  one  or  two 
quarts  of  water  being  suf^cient.  In  more  severe  cases,  two  or 
three  quarts  are  needed.  In  chronic  constipation,  attended 
with  flatulency,  torpid  liver,  sallow  skin,  and  general  debility, 
large  (|uantities,  one- to  three  gallons,  are  used. 


GRADUATED  ENEMA. 

The  graduated  enema  consists  of  a  large  quantity  of  water, 
reducing  the  quantity  a  small  amount  each  succeeding  enema, 
until  a  half  i)int  or  less  is  used:  also  reducing  the  temperature 
a  degree  each  succeeding"  enema  until  60  degrees  are  reached. 
The  temperature  should  be  about  98  degrees,  or  blood  heat,  to 
begin  with.  This  is  to  be  used  where  the  patient  has  acquired 
the  habit  of  using  large  quantities  of  warm  water,  thereby 
weakenino-  the  bowels. 


diseases:   TllF.lR   SVMl'TOMS   AND  TREATMENT.  _'45 

The  water  is  intrcKliiced  l)y  the  aid  of  an  ordinary  syrinu^e; 
cr.  if  large  quantities  are  used,  prepare  a  fountain,  as  nn  paj^e 
197.     (See  douche.) 

The  temperature  must  be  adapted  to  the  use  for  which  it  rc//,pir.-uurf 
!•?  to  be  employed.  If  it  is  for  mechanical  use  only,  the  tem- 
perature should  range  from  98  to  75  degrees  F. ;  if  to  stimulate 
m  collapsed  and  weak  patients,  from  98  to  100  degrees  F. 
If  it  is  to  be  the  graduated,  the  temperature  sIk^uUI  be  gradu- 
ally reduced  from  98  to  70  degrees. 

To  take  an  enema,  lie  on  the  back,  with  tlie  knees  drawn      rosiuon 
tip  and  hips  elevated,  or  kneel  on  the  chest  and  knees. 

THE   COLD   EXEMA. 

Uses. — It  is  one  of  the  most  efficient  means  of  reducing  vses 
temperature,  and  one  of  the  simplest  to  apply.  This  enema 
is  indicated  in  all  cases  of  typhoid  fever  where  the  tempera- 
ti^re  is  obstinate  and  runs  high,  in  yellov.-  fever,  diphtheria, 
IMieumonia,  fevers  caused  from  inflammations  of  the  kidneys, 
liver,  womb,  ovaries,  and  the  peritoneum.  It  is  the  sheet- 
anchor  to  reduce  high  temperature  in  childbed  fever  (puer- 
peral fever)  and  inflammation  of  the  bowels,  wdiere  all  other 
means  have  failed. 

The  temperature  niay  range  from  60  to  80  degrees  F.,  and  Temperature 
in  obstinate  cases,  where  the  fever  runs  as  high  as  105  to 
106  degrees,  the  temperature  of  the  water  may  be  as  low  as 
50  degrees.  When  the  higher  temperature  of  the  water  is 
employed,  a  larger  quantity  is  used.  The  temperature  may 
be  started  at  98  degrees  and  gradually  lowered  to  60  degrees, 
or  even  lower,  by  adding  a  little  cold  water  at  a  tiine,  until 
the   60   degrees   is   reached.     Continue   at   this   temperature. 

Use  an  ordinary  syringe,  with  a  short  piece  of  rubber  tub- 
ing somewhat  larger  than  the  nozzle  of  the  syringe  slipped  over 
the  end  of  it.  After  oiling  the  tubing  with  vaseline  or  sweet 
oil,  introduce  it  well  up  into  the  rectum ;  slowly  force  the  water 
into  the  bowels,  and  let  it  remain  live  to  ten  minutes ;  discon- 


246  SIAMENE    HOME    TREATMENT. 

nect  tlie  syringe  from  the  tubing  and  let  the  water  escape, 
w  hen  a  fresh  amount  may  be  introduced.  Keep  this  proce- 
(hn-e  up  one,  two,  or  three  hours,  if  necessary,  to  reduce  the 
high  temperature.  The  lower  the  temperature  emj^loyed,  the 
greater  will  be  the  effect.  Where  the  cold  enema  is  taken  for 
constipation,  one-half  to  one  pint  of  water  is  sufficient.  Let 
it  follow  a  warm-water  enema  at  bedtime,  and  be  retained. 
Taken  thus,  it  is  absorbed  by  the  colon,  cooling  the  blood,  and 
stimulating  and  toning  the  kidneys  and  liver. 

The  leading  authorities  on  the  use  of  water  as  a  remedial 
agent  agree  pretty  well  that  cold  water  produces  a  mo\-ement 
of  the  fluids  toward  the  intestines  by  the  reaction  \vhich  fol- 
lows the  use  of  it  as  an  enema.  This  fact  renders  cold  water 
of  value  in  the  treatment  of  constipation  due  to  excessive  dry- 
ness of  the  fecal  matters,  inflammation  of  the  colon  and  bloody 
flux.  IJlicn  used  for  acute  iuHauimatiou,  as  in  dysentery,  the 
application  must  be  moderate,  prolonged  and  continuous. 


Chapter  XVII. 

DIETETICS  IX  A  XLTSHELL. 

383.  Classihcalion. — We   will   classify   the    food   stuffs   in      cinssi/ic.-uion 
six  divisions : — 

1.  The  carbonates — heat  producers. 

2.  The  nitrates — muscle  builders. 

3.  The  phosphates — nerve  and  bone  builders. 

4.  The  refrigerators — cooling-  foods. 

5.  The  eliminators — washers. 

6.  The  beautihers. 

384.  (  i)    The  carl)onates  are  suitable  for  the  lean  people,      cnrhonates 
those  of  the  motive  temperament.     They  should  be  used  much 

ir.  the  \vinter.  on  rainy  and  stormy  days,  when  you  need  fat, 
when  you  feel  cold,  etc.  They  protect  the  bones,  muscles 
and  nerves.  They  are :  Fats,  oils,  butter,  sugar,  cream,  pork, 
lard,  yellow  corn,  bacon,  chocolate,  dates,  pearl  barley,  prunes, 
rice,  suet,  wheat  food,  white  bread,  buckwheat,  rye,  etc. 

385.  (2)    The    nitrates    are    principally    muscle    builders,      xnrntes 
These  are  for  manual  laborers,  who  wish  to  build  up  their 
muscles,  to  become  staunch  and  strong,     ^^'hen  they  are  ta- 
ken in  large  quantities,  much  exercise  must  be  taken,  other- 
wise the  highest  degree  of  results  will  not  be  obtained.     They 

are :  Beef,  beans,  cheese,  white  corn,  eels,  yolk  of  egg,  halibut, 
ham,  herring,  lamb,  lentils,  liver,  mutton,  peas,  pigeon,  salmon, 
venison,  lean  fish,  lean  meat,  nuts,  oats,  etc. 

386.  (3)    The    phosphates    are    mainly    brain    and    nerve     phosphates 
foods.     They  should  be  used  when  exercising  the  brain  to  a 

great  extent,  when  nervous,  neuralgic,  mentally  tired,  or  to 
stimulate  the  nerves.  They  are :  Barley,  barley  soup,  barley 
lemonade,  whole-wheat  bread,  tigs,  lobster,  ham.  oats,  prunes, 

247 


248 


SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 


salmon,  smelt,  trout,  tm"1)ot,  cheese,  white  corn,  herrin<^-.  al- 
mond   nuts,   shell-fish,   meat    from   acti\'e   fish,   Ijirds,    mutton, 
\eal,  etc. 
Reirigerators  387.   (4)    The  refrigcrators  are  in  the  main  cooling  foods 

a.nd  drinks.  They  should  constitute  the  bulk  of  the  food  taken 
in  the  hot  summer  months.  They  are :  Vegetables,  fruits, 
acids,  li(|uids  in  general,  chicken,  codfish,  eggs,  fish  (as  a  rule), 
kidney,  lamb,  milk,  mutton.  ])igeon,  whey,  sweet  potatoes, 
nuts.  etc. 
Eliminators  388.    (-)    The  eliminators,  being  principally  washers,  are 

suitable  for  summer  months,  chronic  constii^ation.  chronic  dis- 
eases where  there  is  much  accimiulation  of  foreign  matter  in 
the  system,  and  sallow  skin. 

They  are :  Large  cjuantities  of  water  (the  first  drink  should 
be  three  or  four  glasses  inimediately  upon  rising,  followed 
by  exercise,  and  then,  in  small  (juantities.  repeated  c)ften 
through  the  day),  phosphoric  acid  drinks,  oranges,  lemon 
juice,  raisins,  grapes,  grape  juice,  bartlett  pears,  apples,  aspara- 
gus, carrots,  cauliflower,  cherries,  cucumbers,  currants,  eggs, 
milk,  fish,  mutton,  onions,  parsnips,  turnips,  beets,  potatoes, 
radishes,  green  gage,  haddock,  halibut,  horse-radish,  i)igeon, 
sole,  turbot,  and  soft,  juicy  foods. 
Beautifiers  389.    (6)    Beautificrs    are    apples,     blackberries,     oranges, 

grape  juice,  bananas,  fresh  air.  deep  breathing  (pars.  273, 
274,  275)  at  the  ratio  of  two.  three  and  one.  active  exercise, 
both  mental  and  physical,  peaceful  and  happy  frame  of  mind, 
salt  glow,  lots  of  affection,  say  your  prayers,  and  trust  in 
God. 

Eat  with  an  alimentive  thought,  and  masticate  the  food  un- 
til all  the  flavor  globules  are  broken  up. 

CULTIVATE  D10i:ST[\'E    POWDER. 


390.  Eat  slowly  and  drink  little  with  the  food.  LTse 
abundance  of  pmx  water,  frcji'n  two  to  tlu'ee  (|uarts  daily. 
Urink  from  two  hours  after  a  meal  until  an  hour  before  meals. 


DIETETUS    IX    A    X  I  TS 11  KI.L.  _'40 

Take  a  copious  drink  before  retiring'  and  iminediatel}'  upon 
rising'.  Eat  sparingly  of  an}-  and  all  kinds  of  food  if  a[)petite 
i?  not  good.  I-'at  wholesome,  nutritious,  easily-digested  food. 
If  appetite  is  ravenous,  there  is  something  wrong;  in  such 
cases  eat  sparingly.  Do  not  piecemeal,  but  masticate  and 
salivate  slowly  and  thoroughly.  Take  time;  be  cheerful,  con- 
tented and  happ}'  while  eating  and  drinking  and  during  the 
hours  of  digestion.  Never  cat  fast.  See  tliat  the  flavor  is 
ground  and  squeezed  out  of  the  food. 

A\-oid  e\erything  of  a  stimulating"  and  irritating  nature,      avoui 
fermented  and  alcoholic  drinks  and  tobacco  in  all  forms.      We     stimuiaius 
can  not  expect  to  cure  dyspepsia,  kidney  or  heart  trouble  while 
using-  tobacco. 

Take  very  sparingly,  if  any.  mustard,  pep]3er,  vinegar, 
rich  pastry  and  confectionery.  Use  butter,  fried  grease,  fat, 
[tork  and  meats  moderately.  Contine  the  diet  mostly  to  cereals 
and  the  milder  fruits  stewed.  Do  not  drink  while  eating. 
A\'oid  iced  drinks  of  all  kinds. 


Chapter   XVIII 


POISONS. 


J'rikno^vil 
Poisons 


To  Provoke 


391.  Immediately  upon  the  discovery  or  suspicion  of  poi- 
soning, a  ])liysician  should  be  summoned,  the  messenger  carry- 
ing, if  possible,  information  as  to  the  kind  of  poison  taken, 
that  valuable  time  may  be  saved.  ^leanwhile,  the  following 
steps  may  be  taken. 

392.  Vomiting  should  be  encouraged  if  it  has  commenced; 
if  not,  it  must  be  provoked,  in  order  to  free  the  stomach  of 
all  the  remaining  poison. 

The  most  simple  way  to  accomplish  this  is  to  give  large 
Vomiting  draughts  of  lukewarm  water,  tickling  the  throat  at  the  same 
time.  Either  of  the  following  may  be  stirred  into  the  water : 
A  teaspoonful  of  ground  mustard;  a  teaspoonful  of  powdered 
ipecac ;  a  teaspoonful  of  syrup  of  ipecac ;  or  a  small  amount  of 
salt.  Dish-water  or  soap-suds  will  answer.  The  fact  of  its 
being  dish-water  or  soap-suds  will  make  it  niore  repulsive  to 
the  patient,  and  therefore  it  will  act  more  quickly;  if  soap- 
suds are  used,  it  will  be  all  the  better,  as  soap  is  an  antidote 
for  many  poisons.  The  sufferer  must  be  urged  to  drink  a 
large  quantity  at  a  time,  and  be  made  to  vomit  freely. 

-\fter  vomiting,  olive  oil,  salad  oil,  sweet  milk  or  cream, 
law  eggs,  or  flour  and  water  should  be  given.  If  the  sufferer 
is  much  depressed,  the  hands  and  feet  cold,  the  lips  blue,  the 
face  pale  and  a  cold  perspiration  on  the  brow,  then  some  stim- 
ulant may  be  administered.  Strong  hot  tea.  without  milk,  is 
best ;  strong  coft'ee  is  next  in  value ;  add  brandy,  whisky  or 
alcohol  in  teaspoonful  (|uantities.  The  patient  must  be  kept 
warm  by  the  use  of  hot  blankets,  hot  bricks,  hot  water  in 
bottles,  or  blankets  rung  out  of  hot  water  and  covered  with 
a  dry  one. 
250 


After  Vomiting 


POISONS. 


251 


Treatment 


Oxalic  Acid 


393.  Xiiric.  muriatic  and  sulpluirio  acids  are  liea\_\-,  strong-      Adda 
and  deadly  i)ois()nons  acids,  and  will  l)urn   wmii,  metal   and 
llesh. 

\'omiting  should  not  be  provoked  in  poison  from  these 
acids.  Gk'c  an  alkali;  Siamene  Antiseptic  \\'ash  or  Siamene 
Catarrh  Remedy  are  very  valuable  to  neutralize  the  acids  and 
heal  acid  burns;  a  teaspoonful  of  hartshorn,  mixed  with  half 
a  pint  of  water,  mav  be  "iven ;  a  large  quantity  of  baking  or 
washing  soda,  magnesia,  potash,  whitewash  or  plaster  from 
the  wall,  chalk,  tooth-powder,  or  strong  soap  or  wood  ashes 
stirred  up  in  water. 

After  using  the  alkaline  antidote,  use  bland  liquids  ( par. 
430),  such  as  tlaxseed  tea,  slippery-elm  bark  or  marshmallow 
root  tea.     Secure  rest.     Stimulate  if  necessary. 

394.  Oxalic  acid  comes  in  small,  bright  crystals.  Anti- 
dote :  Lime  water,  whitewash,  tooth-powder,  chalk,  whiting, 
])1  aster  from  the  wall.  \\'hatever  is  used  should  be  pulverized 
fine   and   dissolved   in   water. 

395.  Prussic  acid  is  a  dangerous  poison,  and  usually  results     Pmsaic  Add 
in  immediate  death.     Cyanide  of  potash  and  oil  of  bitter  al- 
monds are  poisonous  on  account  of  this  acid  they  contain.     In 

case  of  poisoning  from  any  one  of  these,  vomiting  must  be 
immediately  induced,  followed  by  bland  liquids  and  stimulants. 
Hartshorn  may  be  inhaled,  fresh  air  given,  and  artificial 
respiration  produced  (par.  435). 

396.  Carbolic  acid  and  creosote  are  usually  in  sohuion  as 
a  thick,  clear  or  pinkish-brown  fluid.  When  taken  into  the 
mouth,  thev  cause  intense  burning,  numl)ness  and  whitening  of 
the  flesh.  There  is  nausea,  weakness,  depression  and  collapse. 
These  are  very  dangerous  poisons,  for  they  act  as  caustics, 
producing  intense  pain ;  they  also  benumb  the  stomach  so  that 
it  is  difiicult  to  provoke  vomiting. 

Antidote. — The  best  antidote  is  Epsom  salts,  given  in 
tablespoonful  doses  dissolved  in  water.  Next  in  value  is  bak- 
ing soda,  given  in  two  or  three  teaspoonful  doses,  dissolved 


Carbolic  Add 
and  Creosote 


SIAMEXE     HOME    TREATMENT. 


Alkaline 
Poisons 


Trcntnient 


Sugar  of  Keaci 


Corrosive 
Sublimate 


in  water.  Follow  either  of  these  with  larg'e  draughts  of  olive 
oil.  white  of  eg'i^",  milk  or  carbonate  of  mag'nesia  dissoh'ed 
in  water. 

397.  Strong-  alkalies  are  ammonia  or  hartshorn,  which 
have  an  unmistakable  od(3r.  potash  in  stick  for  caustic  or  in 
form  of  concentrated  l}-e ;  liniments  containing  large  quanti- 
ties of  ammonia  are  sometimes  swallowed  through  mistake. 

Ti'cafniriif. — Alkalies  l)urn  intensely.  Thev  must  be  com- 
bated with  acids.  \  inegar  is  the  most  ready ;  there  is  noth- 
ing better,  and  it  should  be  given  undiluted  in  doses  of  one 
to  three  teaspoonfuls ;  lemon  juice  or  the  acid  juices  from  any 
sour  fruits.  Vomiting  should  not  be  i^rovoked  unless  it  is 
immediately  after  the  alkali  has  been  swallowed.  If  vomit- 
ing is  provoked,  it  should  be  immediately  preceded  by  large 
draughts  of  warm  water.  Bland  oil  or  mucilaginous  drink 
may  follow. 

398.  Arsenic  is  a  white,  sweetish  powder,  and  resembles 
in  appearance  the  common  remedy,  calomel.  It  is  put  up  in 
various  forms — in  fly-i)aper,  bedbug  powder,  paris  green, 
''rough  on  rats,"  Fowler's  solution,  etc.  It  is  also  found  in 
some  forms  of  paints  and  in  various  wall-paper.  It  causes 
vomiting  and  pain  in  the  stomach. 

All  fid  of  c\ — Milk,  white  of  egg,  flour  and  water,  oil  may  l)e 
given ;  vomit  freely ;  give  dialyzed  iron  as  a  chemical  antidote, 
in  tablespoonful  doses,  followed  by  a  teaspoonful  of  salt 
dissolved  in  a  teacup  of  warm  water.  Green  vitriol  (sulphate 
of  iron)  and  baking  soda  may  l)e  dissoh-ed  in  separate  cups 
of  hot  water,  mixed  and  drank  immediately.  After  drinking 
the  mixture,  vomiting  must  be  provoked.  The  treatment  is 
the  same  in  all  the  different  forms  in  which  arsenic  is  found. 

399.  hi  cases  of  poison  from  sugar  of  lead,  cause  vomit- 
ing, followed  by  Epsom  c)r  (llauber  salts,  eggs,  milk  or  castor- 
oil. 

400.  Corrosive  sublimate  ci^mes  in  small  colorless  crvstals, 
or  in  a  clear  solution. 


POISONS. 


253 


AiitidiUc. — rroNoke  voiiiitiiio-.  followed  by  some  form  of     AuHiiote 
tannic  acid,  stroni;'  tea  Uein.^-  the  most  convenient  article  that 
contains  this  acid,      (live   it    in   lar^e  ([nantities.    followed  hy 
raw  eggs,  milk,  or  ilonr  and  water. 

401.  PJiosl'honis  is   found  in  matches  and  some  rat  poi-      piwspiionn^ 
sons.     It  is  slow  in  its  action.     Give  five  or  six  grain  doses 

of  suli)hate  of  copper,  dissolved  in  water,  to  provoke  vomit- 
ing. After  vomiting,  give  a  large  dose  of  carbonate  of 
magnesia. 

402.  Crofon   oil  is   sometimes  contained   in   liniment.     It      croton  on 
produces  great  pain  in  the  stomach,  with  griping,  purging  and 
depression.     It  should  be  treated  with  an  emetic,  followed  by 

bland  liquid   (par.  430). 

403.  In  cases  of  poison  from  lunar  caustic,  cause  vomiting     Lunar  cai/.s 
by  giving  strong  solution  of  salt  and  water,   followed  by  a 

dose  of  castor-oil  or  Epsom  salts  dissolved  in  water,  in  table- 
spoonful   doses. 

404.  In  iodine  poison,   give  starch   and  water,   plenty  of     iodine 
milk,    or    flour    and    water.     When   the    skin    is   burnt    from 
iodine,   apply  oil   and   starch   until   the   starch   will   not   turn 

blue;  then  apply  Siamene  Antiseptic  Wash. 

405.  Opium   and    its    preparations — morphine,    laudanum,      opium  unci 
paragoric,  black  drops,  chlorodine,  some  liniments  and  many      Morphine 
nostrums    sold    as    pain    destroyers.      Opium   produces    deep 

sleep,  with  a  contraction  of  the  pupil  of  the  eye,  which  will 
not  enlarge  in  the  dark. 

Antidote. — Cause  vomiting,  followed  by  large  quantities 
of  coffee.  As  long  as  the  breathing  does  not  fall  below  teii 
to  the  minute,  the  danger  line  has  not  been  reached.  Keep 
the  patient  awake  l)y  slapping,  rubbing,  etc.,  cold  alternating 
with  heat  applied  to  the  extremities  and  back.  The  best  mus- 
cular exercise  is  the  application  of  electricity,  the  faradic  cur- 
rent applied  to  all  parts  of  the  body.  Keep  up  breathing  b}- 
applying  electricity  to  the  muscles  of  the  chest.  Belladonna 
is  the  phvsiological  antidote  for  opium,  the  dose  being  regu- 


Antidote 


17 


^54 


SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 


Aconite  and 
Veratriim    Viride 


lated  by  the  amount  of  opium  taken,  it  requiring  an  equal 
amount  of  belladonna  or  its  preparations  to  counteract  a  given 
amount  of  opium  or  its  preparations.  The  average  dose  of 
belladonna  is  about  the  size  of  that  of  opium  in  any  of  its 
l)reparations. 
strychnine  406.  Strychnine  is  an  intensely  bitter,  white  powder.     It 

jiroduces  stiffness  of  muscles,  a  rigid  stiffness  of  the  jav^,  and 
spasms.  Treat  first  by  vomiting,  then  purge,  followed  by 
twenty  or  thirty-grain  doses  each  of  bromide  of  potash  and  hy- 
ch'ate  of  chloral  for  an  adult,  and  from  one-fourth  to  one-half  as 
much  for  children,  given  every  hour  if  necessary,  to  control  the 
spasms  of  muscles.  This  treatment  applies  equally  as  w'ell  to 
domestic  animals,  dogs,  cats,  etc.  These  animals  often  be- 
come poisoned  from  eating  meat  and  other  food  charged  with 
strychnine. 

407.  Aconite  and  veratrum  viride,  sometimes  contained 
i'l  liniments,  are  often  swallowed  by  mistake.  Symptoms  are 
a  peculiar  numbness  and  tingling  of  the  muscles  of  the  tongue 
and  mouth.  Give  an  emetic,  rest,  warmth  to  the  extremities, 
large  quantities  of  strong,  hot  coffee,  wine,  whisky  or  brandy. 

408.  Deadly  nightshade.  Jamestown  weed,  toadstools, 
tobacco,  poison  sumac  and  other  plants  are  sometimes  eaten 
and  cause  poisonous  effects.  All  must  be  treated  by  provok- 
ing vomiting,  followed  by  stimulants,  as  in  treatment  for 
belladonna  poisoning,  with  strong  coffee,  whisky  or  brandy. 

409.  Ptomaine  poison  from  decayed  meats  and  vegetables. 
Excite  vomiting  until  the  stomach  is  empty,  then  drink  water 
until  the  stomach  is  absolutely  full,  a  gallon  if  it  will  hold 
it;  then  provoke  vomiting  by  tickling  the  fauces;  follow  this 
by  a  dose  of  castor-oil  and  one  or  two  teaspoonfuls  of  pow- 
dered charcoal  or  Siamene  Dyspepsia  Tablets. 

Recapitulation  410.  In  the  foregoiug  pages  we  have  mentioned  the  prin- 

cipal and  most  common  poisons,  and  given  some  of  the  best, 
most  available  and  practical  methods  of  combating  them.  In 
innclusion.   let  it  ht  remembered  that   when  there  is  a  case 


Toadstools, 
Deadly  Sight- 
shade,  James- 
town Weed,  etc. 


Ptomaines  from 
J\Icats  and 
Vesretables 


POISONS. 


255 


of  poisoning,  sonic  one,  at  least,  should  keep  cool;  for,  bear 
in  mind,  cahnness  is  power  in  such  emergencies.  As  soon  as 
possilile.  despatch  for  a  physician.  sencHng  him  word,  if  pos- 
sil)le.  what  poison  has  been  taken,  and,  until  his  arrival,  the 
course  indicated  in  the  foregoing  pages  sliould  he  followed. 
Another  thing  which  should  be  remembered  is  that  cases  of 
accidental  poisoning  rarely  prove  fatal ;  therefore,  in  occur- 
rance  of  poisoning,  the  treatment  here  suggested  will  be 
found  successful. 

The  following  table  of  poisons  and  their  antidotes  will  be 
found  useful  for  reference  in  emergencies.  The  reader  should 
bear  in  mind  that  all  the  poisons  are  found  in  the  preceding- 
part  of  this  chapter. 


POISON. 


Unknown 


Acids 

Sulphuric 

Nitric 

Muriatic 


Oxalic  acid 


ANTIDOTE. 


Carbolic  acid 


Prussic  acid 

Oil  bitter  almonds 

Cyanide  potash 


411. 


412. 


413. 


414. 


415. 


Emetic 
Bland  liquids 
Stimulants 


An  alkali 
Bland  liquids 
Rest 

Stimulants 


Emetic 

Chalk 

Bland  liquids 


Emetic 

Epsom  salts  or  baking  soda 

Bland  liquids 

Rest 

Stimulants 


Emetic 
Bland  liquids 
Stimulants 


256  SIAMEXE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

POISON. 


416. 


Alkalies 

Hartshorn  (ammonia) 

Soda 

Potash 

Lye 


Arsenic 

Paris  green 
Fowler's  solution 
"Rou.s^h  on  rats" 
Fh'-papcr 


Suear  of  lead 


Corrosive  sublimate 
Tartar  emetic 


Phosi)horus 


417. 


418. 


419. 


420. 


ANTIDOTE. 

An  acid  ( ^ineg^ar) 
liland  li(|uids 
Rest 
Stimulants 


Emetic 

Dialvzed  iron  and  salt 

Castor-oil 

Rest 

Stimulants 


Emetic 
Epsom   salts 
Bland  liquids 
Castor-oil 


Emetic 
Strong  tea 
Raw  eggs 
Milk 

Castor-oil 
Stimulants 


Emetic 

Sulphate  of  copper 

Turpentine 

Magnesia 

Never  give  oil 


421. 


Lunar  caustic 
(Nitrate  silver) 


Iodine 


422. 


Salt  and  water 
Castor-oil 
Epsom  salts 
Bland  liquids 
Emetic 


Emetic 

Starch  and  water 

Bland  liquids 


POISONS. 


257 


POISON. 

Opium 
Morphine 
Laudanum 
Pareg;oric.  etc. 
Chlorodine 


Strvclmine 


Aconite 
A'eratrum  \iride 


Jamestown  weed 

Hemlock 

Deadly  nig-htshade 

Toadstools 

Tobacco,  etc. 


Alcohol 


423. 


424. 


425. 


426. 


427. 


ANTTI10TI-:. 


l^metic 
Strong  coffee 
Keep  up  breathing: 


Emetic 
Purgfing; 
Absolute  quiet 
Chloral 
P)rf)mide  potash 


Emetic 
Stimulation 
TIead  low 


Emetic 
Stimulation 


Emetic 

Cold  and  heat  alternately  ap- 
plied to  the  spine 
Hartshorn  and  water 


Decayed  meat 
Decayed  yesretables 


428. 


Tvmetic 
Purging; 
Powdered  charcoal 


429.  The  following-  means  are  good  to  produce  yomiting: 
Lukewarm  water  in  large  quantities,  a  tablespoonful  of  mus- 
tard dissolved  in  a  i)int  of  warm  water,  a  teaspoonful  of 
ipecac,  or  a  tablespoonful  of  salt  dissolyed  in  a  pint  of  warm 
water;  any  one  of  the  aboye  may  be  taken  in  large  quantities, 
as  much  as  the  stomach  will  contain.     If  yomiting  does  not 


\  oniiting 


258  SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

take  place,  insert  the  linfrer  into  tlie  throat.  It  is  advisable 
to  give  the  warm  water  in  large  quantities,  a  pint  at  a  time, 
repeating  often. 

liiund  Liquids  430.  Bland  liciuids  are  milk,  raw  eggs,  some  sort  of  light 

oil,  gruel,  barley  water,  flaxseed  water,  flour  and  water,  etc. 

431.  Stimulants  are  tea.  coffee,  water  at  iio  degrees  to 
115  degrees  F..  whisky,  wine,  or  ammonia  (hartshorn,  a  half 
teaspoonful  in  a  teacup  of  water  at  one  dose).  In  giving  tea, 
coffee,  etc.,  do  not  take  time  to  strain  out  the  sediments;  give 
all  of  it. 

432.  Alk.'dine  poisons  require  acid  antidotes. 

433.  Acid  poisons  recjuire  alkaline  antidotes. 


stimulants 


Chapter  XIX. 


EMERGENCIES. 

434.  Proiciiiir^. — Remove  the  person  from  the  water,  free  Drowning. 
the  ])0(lv  from  all  clothing-  that  may  hind  the  neck,  chest  or 
^\"aist ;  turn  him  on  the  face,  hotly  in  an  inclined  position,  the 
head  down  and  the  lower  portion  of  the  hody  raised ;  thrust  a 
finger  into  the  mouth,  giving  a  sweep  to  free  it  from  any 
foreign  substance  that  may  be  there.  A\'hile  in  this  position, 
draw  the  arms  above  the  head,  then  place  the  open  hand  on 
different  points  of  the  back,  making  quick,  medium-hard  pres- 
sure to  force  out  the  water  that  may  have  gone  into  the  lungs. 
Then  turn  him  on  one  side,  letting  the  arm  extend  forward 
until  it  is  at  a  right  angle  with  the  shoulder,  the  head  hanging 
over  it ;  make  quick  pressures  upon  the  side  of  the  chest  to  free 
the  lungs  from  water.  Then  turn  the  patient  on  the  other 
side  and  treat  in  like  manner ;  alternate  from  one  side  to  the 
other  and  to  the  back.  These  pressures  must  be  made  with  a 
jarring,  quick  motion,  guarding  against  making  them  hard 
enough  to  injure  the  chest. 

After  the  lungs  are  emptied  of  the  water,  an  attempt  must 
be  made  to  restore  the  breathing  if  it  is  suspended  or  very 
weak;  administer  artificial  respiration   (par.  435). 

Remove  all  wet  clothing  and  substitute  dry  ones ;  the  latter, 
if  necessary,  may  be  secured  from  bystanders;  this,  howe\'er, 
should  not  interfere  with  the  artificial  respiration. 

Warmth  is  to  be  secured  by  any  means  that  may  be  at 
hand;  hot  bottles,  hot,  dry  blankets,  hot  bricks,  etc. 

Stimulate  the  heart  and  lungs  ( see  Reference  Column, 
heart  and  lung  centers).     As  soon  as  the  patient  is  able  to 


swallow,  give  some  form  of  light  stimulant. 


259 


26o  SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

Artificial  435.  Artificial    rcs])irali()n   is   conducted   as    follows:    The 

A'esp;mrjo,i  ] .odv  IS  stretclicd  out  flat  on  the  ground,  back  down,  with 
something  under  the  shoulders  to  elevate  them — a  folded 
blanket,  coat,  shawl,  a  pile  of  dirt  or  anything  that  will  elevate 
and  support  them — causing  the  neck  to  be  stretched,  throwing 
the  chin  far  from  the  chest.  Draw  the  tongue  well  forward 
out  of  the  mouth,  and  secure  it  with  an  elastic  ])and,  a  i)iece 
of  string  or  a  strip  of  cloth  torn  from  a  garment,  by  passing 
it  over  the  tongue  and  under  the  lower  jaw,  or  have  an  as- 
sistant hold  the  tongue  with  a  handkerchief.  Handle  the 
tongue  with  care,  not  to  injure  it. 

Kneel  at  the  head  of  the  patient,  grasp  the  arms  midway 
between  wrists  and  elbows,  sweep  them  around  horizontally, 
away  from  the  body  and  over  the  head,  where  a  good,  strong 
pull  is  made  upon  them,  and  they  are  held  for  a  few  seconds.  If 
there  is  an  assistant  present,  have  him  stand  over  the  patient 
and  place  his  hands  on  both  sides  of  the  chest,  making  pressure 
at  the  rate  of  sixteen  pressures  to  the  minute  as  the  arms 
are  being  raised  in  the  sweep  above  the  head ;  this  tills  the 
lungs  with  air.  The  pressure  upon  the  lungs  drives  out 
the  impure  air  and  forms  a  suction  for  fresh  air  to  enter 
them.  The  next  step  is  to  return  the  arms  to  the  side,  ready 
for  another  extension;  this  gives  an  alternating,  relaxing  and 
contracting  of  the  muscles  and  nerves  governing  the  lungs. 
]\Iake  about  sixteen  of  these  movements  and  pressures  to  the 
minute.  Do  not  abandon  them  until  a  competent  person  has 
said  that  the  heart  has  entirely  ceased  to  act  or  until  the  per- 
son is  breathing  normally. 
Suffocation  436.  SuffocGtion  with  Noxious  Gases,  J^apors  or  Smoke. — 

Immediately  remove  the  sufferer  to  the  fresh  air,  and  give 
artificial  respiration  (par.  435).  Victims  in  wells,  mines, 
sewers,  etc..  are  sometimes  hard  to  reach  on  account  of  the 
gases.  First,  remove  the  gas  by  dashing  in  a  few  buckets 
of  water,  or  an  open  umbrella,  with  toj)  down,  may  be  lowered 
by  a  cord  or  rope,  and  rapidly  drawn  up  and  down  a  few 
times  before  the  rescuer  ventures  to  descend. 


E.MKRi;i:.\c"ii:s.  261 

TrCiitniriit. — It  the  sufferer  is  in  a  room  and  can  not  l)o  Tretumcnt 
removed.  o\K'n  all  the  \vin(l(^\vs  and  doors  so  as  to  admit 
fresh  air ;  all  clothing  abont  the  neck,  chest  or  waist  must  he 
removed  or  loosened;  if  the  patient  is  unconscious,  dash  cold 
Avater  on  the  face  and  chest;  if  breathing  has  ceased  or  is 
very  shallow,  artificial  respiration  (par.  435).  must  be  ad- 
ministered (7/  ojicc,  and  a  physician  despatched  for.  As  soon 
as  consciousness  and  normal  breathing  is  sufficiently  restored, 
cautiously  permit  the  patient  to  inhale  ammonia  or  the  vapor 
of  warm  water. 

437.  Fainting  is  a  state  of  unconsciousness  due  to  tempo-     yainting 
rary  failure  of  the  heart.     This  may  be  brought  about  by  a 

simple  nervous  influence,  or  by  a  sudden  shock,  loss  of  or  the 
sight  of  blood.  The  symptoms  are  loss  of  consciousness,  ac- 
companied by  paleness  of  lips  and  face,  coldness  of  extremities 
and  the  appearance  of  perspiration. 

Trcatiiicnf. — Loosen  all  clothing  from  the  waist  and  chest,  Treatment 
lower  the  head  and  Hush  the  brain  (par.  92),  or  this  may  be 
done  by  grasping  the  patient  around  the  limbs  above  the 
knees,  elevating  them,  thereby  lowering  the  head  and  permit- 
ting the  blood  to  flow  to  the  brain.  Permit  the  patient  to 
inhale  ammonia;  let  him  rest  and  be  ([uiet. 

Unconsciousness  sometimes  arises  from  serious  brain  dis- 
orders, poisons  and  intoxicating  drinks.  It  .should  be  treated 
in  the  same  general  way.  then  referred  to  a  physician. 

438.  Shock  may  be  caused  by  fright,  bv  profound  mental      siioek 
impressions  of  grief,   disappointment,   or  even  joy.     It  may 

be  caused  by  a  blow  or  by  a  sudden  and  severe  pain.  It  is 
common  after  gunshot  wounds,  railroad  or  machine  accidents. 

The  symptoms  are :  Paleness,  a  cold,  clamni)-  skin,  a  feeble 
pulse,  weak  breathing,  dull  eyes,  dilated  pupils,  etc. 

Cases  of  severe  shock  may  result  in  death  very  soon ;  there- 
fore they  require  prompt,  energetic  and  persevering  treatment 
on  the  part  of  those  attending.  Heat  must  be  applied  to  the 
entire  body,  especially  to  the  region  of  the  heart,  and  over 


262  SIAMEXE     HOME     TREATMENT. 

the  pit  of  the  stomach  (  sohir  i)lexus).  Use  hot  bottles,  bricks, 
Ijlankets,  baths,  etc.,  hot  (h'inks  of  brandy,  whisky  or  am- 
monia (hartshorn);  if.  the  kitter.  use  one-half  teaspoonful 
to  a  teacup  of  water.  Hot  drinks  should  not  be  taken  in 
large  (juantities,  l)ut  sipped  in  teaspoon fuls  every  few  minutes. 
Hemorrhage  439.  There  is  uo  accidcut  more  common  and  more  alarm- 

ing than  hemorrhage,  and  none  that  re(|uires  more  self-posses- 
sion to  treat ;  nor  is  there  any  in  which  a  little  specific  knowl- 
edge can  be  of  more  value. 

To  understand  the  control  of  hemorrhage,  one  must  have 
some  general  idea  of  the  anatomy  of  the  blood-vessels. 

Hemorrhage,  as  a  rule,  comes  from  the  arteries  and  not 
the  veins.  The  blood  flows  from  the  heart  to  the  extremities 
through  the  arteries,  and  from  the  extremities  back  to  the 
heart  through  the  veins.  Blood  as  it  comes  from  the  arteries 
is  red,  and  when  uninterrupted  by  pressure,  flows  in  jerks 
or  pulsations  corresponding  to  the  beat  of  the  heart.  Blood, 
as  it  comes  from  the  veins,  is  dark  blue,  and  flows  in  a  slow, 
steady  stream.  Blood,  as  it  comes  from  the  capillaries,  is 
red,  and  oozes  from  the  surface. 

Hemorrhage  in  any  of  the  extremities  must  be  combated 
by  making  pressure  on  the  bleeding  vessels  between  the  bleed- 
ing point  and  the  heart ;  always  make  the  pressure  as  near  to 
the  wound  as  is  practicable. 

How  io  Make  Pressure. — The  thumb  or  finger  is  pressed 
on  the  limb  immediately  above  the  wound;  if  the  first  point 
of  pressure  does  not  stop  the  flow  of  blood,  move  to  another 
point,  and  so  on  until  the  pressure  will  check  the  flow.  When 
this  point  is  found,  make  a  compress  of  tightly-folded  cloth ; 
tliis  may  l)e  secured  from  a  handkerchief,  garment  or  any- 
thing convenient;  and  place  it  (ner  the  bl(X)d-vessel  to  stop  the 
flow  of  blood,  as  previously  found,  and  confine  by  a  bandage 
until  further  aid  is  secured. 

To  apply  a  bandage  over  the  compress,  take  a  strip  of 
cloth    iwnw   one   to   three   inches   wide   and    long   enough   to 


EMERGEXCIES.  263 

reach  around  the  hiiil)  two  or  three  times.  Wrap  it  around 
the  linil).  and  place  a  stick  under  the  last  fold,  and  twist  it 
until  the  pressure  is  sufficient  to  check  the  hemorrhage. 

Hemorrhage  from  the  head,  neck,  under  the  arm,  or  in 
the  groins,  must  be  checked  l)y  direct  pressure  with  the  fingers, 
tile  presstu'e  being  made  close  to  the  wotmd,  and  between  it 
and  the  heart.  Hemorrhage  from  the  skin,  capillar)-  circtila- 
tion,  may  be  checked  by  pressure  or  by  the  a])plication  of  cold 
to  the  parts  affected. 

Hemorrhage  from  the  nose  is  often  beneticial,  as  it  is  one 
of  nature's  means  of  disposing  of  the  suri)]us  blood ;  but  it 
may  be  so  profuse  as  to  re([uire- attention  and  e\'en  threaten 
life. 

Treatment. — The  patient  should  be  placed  in  a  recum-  Treatment 
l^ent  position,  with  cold  metal  or  cold  wet  cloth  applied  to 
the  back  of  the  neck.  A  cloth  wrung  from  cold  water  and 
appHed  to  the  external  genitals — if  a  man.  to  the  scrotum — and 
by  reflex  action  it  will  control  most  cases.  Siamene  Friction 
Bath  (pars.  316-317)  will  often  control  it  also.  Snuff  a  solu- 
tion of  alum  or  salt  water  up  the  nose  in  proportion  to  a  tea- 
spoonful  to  a  teacup  of  water,  or  insert  a  plug  of  cotton  or 
cloth  saturated  in  the  same  solution. 

440.  A  bleeding  tooth  is  best  stopped  by  pressing  a  plug      j-ieedins  Tooth 
of  cotton  saturated  in  oil  of  cloves  firmly  into  the  cavity  of 

the  tooth. 

441.  Slight  burns  are  best  ti'eated  by  the  application  of     sn^ht  Bums 
Siamene   Antiseptic    Wash,    or  baking   soda   moistened   with 

water. 

In  cases  of  severe  burns,  remove  all  clothing.  Saturate  severe  Bums 
soft  linen  or  cotton  cloths  with  Siamene  Antiseptic  Wash,  and 
apply  them  in  such  a  manner  as  to  exclude  the  air.  Keep  the 
cloths  wet  with  the  Wash.  In  the  absence  of  Siamene  Anti- 
septic Wash,  use  a  tablespoonful  of  tannic  acid  to  a  small 
teacupful  of  raw  linseed  oil.     Apply  to  soft  linen,  and  cover 


264 


SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 


Scalds 

Snake  and 

Insect  Bites 


the  Inini  in  such  a  manner  as  to  effectually  exclude  the  air; 
change  this  compress  three  or   four  times  daily. 

Scalds  should  be  treated  in  the  same  way  as  burns. 

442.  Venomous  snake  and  insect  bites  and  stings  recjuire 
prompt  and  energetic  treatment.  In  snake  bites  there  should 
be  a  free  incision  made  in  the  wound.  This  may  be  done 
with  any  sharp  instrument  that  may  be  at  hand ;  a  pocket 
knife  or  razor  will  do.  It  is  best  to  remove  the  part  bitten, 
and  cauterize  with  a  red-hot  iron  or  ammonia  (hartshorn)  in 
full  strength  applied.  In  the  absence  of  ammonia  use  bak- 
ing soda.  Alkali  dirt  is  good.  Give  the  patient  ammonia 
internally,  one  teaspoonful  to  a  teacupful  of  water,  or  give 
enough  whisky  or  brandy  to  keep  the  patient  in  an  intoxicated 
state  until  medical  aid  arrives. 

As  soon  as  can  be  arranged,  give  a  Siamene  ^Medicated 
Sweat  Bath  No.  i,  and  repeat  e\-ery  three  or  four  hours  in 
cases  of  severe  poison.  After  each  bath  apply  an  alkali  mud 
poultice,  the  soil  being  mixed  with  cold  water.  Use  suffi- 
cient mud  to  cover  the  entire  limb. 

443.  Dog  and  cat  bites   are  treated  by  washing  out  the 
Cat  Bites      wouud   with    Siameue    Soap   and   making   an    application   of 

hartshorn.  In  the  absence  of  hartshorn,  use  baking  soda. 
After  it  has  been  applied  for  a  few  minutes,  dress  the  wound 
v>ith   Siamene  Antiseptic  Wash. 


Dog  and 


Chapter  XX. 

CARIXG  FUR  Till-:  SICK-ROUAI 

444.  The  comfort  and  well-beins^"  of  the  sick  depend  to  so      The  Room 
great  an  extent  ui)on  their  snrroimchngs  that  there  should  be 

in  every  weh-arranged  home  an  apartment  chosen  and  espe- 
cially fitted  for  the  use  of  the  sick.  It  is  important  to  have  a 
clear  idea  of  what  a  sick-room  ought  to  be,  in  order  to  choose 
the  least  among  unavoidable  circumstances,  and  how  to  utilize 
such  as  you  may  have.  A  sick-room  should  be  spacious,  light, 
airy,  clean  and  in  every  way  cheerful.  The  larger  the  room 
the  easier  to  keep  it  clean  and  ventilated,  therefore  more  favor- 
able for  the  recovery  of  the  patient.  Space  is  therefore  an 
important  consideration  from  a  hygienic  point  of  view. 

445.  The  room  for  the  sick  should  be  located  on  the  sunny  Location 
side  of  the  house,  with  south  or  west  windows  if  possible.  °f  Room 
Sunlight  is  a  healthful  stimulus,   as  all  the  tonic  properties 

given  to  both  animals  and  plants  proceed  from  the  sun ;  it 
not  only  provides  stimulating  and  tonic  properties,  but  it  im- 
parts cheerfulness  to  the  sick-room.  The  sick-room  should  be 
as  far  removed  from  noise  and  confusion  and  as  free  from 
odors  from  the  kitchen  as  is  practicable. 

The  walls  should  be  thick  enough  to  deaden  the  sounds 
from  without,  and  the  floor  substantial  enough  not  to  vibrate 
with  every  tread.  Ha\-e  the  room  as  high  in  the  building 
as  is  practicable,  with  as  many  windows  as  possible,  at  least 
two,  to  afford  fresh  air  and  sunlight ;  they  should  be  kept 
lowered  from  the  top,  not  raised  from  the  bottom,  with  but 
rare  exceptions. 

The  sick-room  should  be  kept  quiet  and  cheerful.  Remove 
basins  of  standing  water,    foods,   medicine  bottles,   clothing. 

2G5 


266 


SIAMENE     HOME    TREATMENT. 


The  Walls 


The  Floor 


Furniture 


Confusion 


beddini;'  and  all  things  that  may  be  unpleasant  or  disagreeable 
to  the  patient. 

Growing  plants  and  cut  llowers  add  considerable  to  the 
cheerfulness  of  the  room. 

446.  The  walls  and  ceiling  should  be  clean,  free  from  cob- 
webs and  all  articles  that  collect  the  dirt.  They  should  be  of 
some  soft,  neutral  tint,  as  French  grey,  pale  green  or  lemon. 
Paint  or  hard-finished  surface  is  better  than  paper,  for  it  can 
be  washed.  The  monotony  of  the  walls  may  be  relieved  by  a 
few  well-chosen  pictures.  The  woodwork  should  be  plain 
and  simple.  The  room  should  be  free  from  woolen  curtains, 
portieres  or  drapery  of  any  kind.  All  woolen  goods  easily  be- 
come infected  and  are  difficult  to  disinfect.  Curtains  should 
be  of  light,  washable  goods. 

447.  The  floor  should  be  painted.  Small  rugs  that  can  be 
taken  out  and  dusted  daily  should  take  the  place  of  carpets. 
If  there  is  a  carpet,  it  should  be  cleansed  daily  with  a  cloth 
wrung  from  a  solution  of  chloride  of  lime  and  water  or  some 
other  efficient  disinfectant. 

448.  The  essential  furnishings  of  the  sick-room  are  a  bed — 
preferably  an  iron  bed — a  bed-side  table,  an  easy  chair,  a  lounge 
w^ith  a  washable  spread  over  it,  a  large  movable  screen — this 
may  be  improvised  by  using  a  shawl  thrown  over  a  clothes 
rack — a  bed-rest,  a  commode  and  similar  conveniences  that 
may  be  desirable,  but  the  fewer  superfluous  articles  the  1:)etter. 
All  furniture  should  be  plain. 

Tact  and  judgment  must  be  exercised  in  caring  for  the 
sick.  Small  points  of  detail  should  l)e  observed.  Ill-fitting 
l«hnds,  rattling  windows  and  creaking  doors  are  nuisances 
which  demand  speedy  remedy.  Many  slight  and  apparently 
unimportant  noises,  which  are  nevertheless  annoying  to  the 
sensitive  nerves  of  the  sick,  may  be  easily  avoided.  Do  not 
wear  rustling  clothes  or  squeaking  shoes. 

449.  If  you  are  Ijurning  coal,  wrap  it  in  paper  before  bring- 
ing it  into  the  room,  and  lay  it  on  the  fire  without  confusion. 


CARINC.    FOR     1111-:    SICK-ROOM.  267 

Intermittent  noises  arc  more  distressing  and  hurtful  than 
continuous  noises;  sudden,  sharp  and  jarring  sounds  are  espe- 
cially distressing.  In  short,  all  unnecessary  noises  and  con- 
fusions should  be  carefully  avoided.  All  thoughts  that  may 
produce  a  ruffled  countenance  and  disagreeal)le  expressions 
should  be  carefully  guarded  against. 

450.  When  called  upon  to  speak  to  the  patient,  do  so  in      conversation 
confident,  pleasant  ionts ;  do  not  whisper  in  the  room  or  out- 
side of  it  where  you  may  be  heard.     A  low  and  distinct  tone 

when  conversing  will  seldom  annoy;  w'hispering  and  sounds 
that  strain  the  attention  create  annoyance.  As  a  rule,  avoid 
conversation  with  sensitive  sick  people,  and  by  no  means 
annoy  them  with  such  ([uestions  as,  "How  do  you  feel?" 
Avoid  conversing  with  the  patient  in  any  way  concerning  his 
condition,  unless  it  is  absolutely  essential  for  the  patient's  own 
welfare. 

The  room  should  be  kept  comfortably  warm  and  well 
ventilated.  There  should  always  be  a  draft  through  the  room, 
but  see  to  it  that  the  draft  does  not  pass  over  the  patient. 

The  room  should  be  kept  clean  and  disinfected  and  cheer- 
ful in  every  way  possible. 

451.  There  is  nothing  more  refreshing  to  a  well  person      The  Bed 
than  a  clean,  nicely-arranged  and  easy-lying  bed. 

The  invalid,  whose  confinement  is  more  or  less  compulsory 
and  whose  sensitiveness  is  exaggerated  by  disease,  finds  few 
things  affecting  him  more  than  the  bed. 

To  understand  how  to  prepare  and  keep  the  bed  in  order 
is  a  matter  of  no  small  consideration. 

The  bed  of  the  invalid  should  be  firm  and  level,  free  from 
lumps,  with  a  soft  surface  and  a  clean,  fresh  odor. 

The  covers  should  be  light,  but  warm  and  soft,  and  kept 
smooth  and  tidy.  The  bed  should  be  put  in  order  every  morn- 
ing and  evening;  the  sheets  should  be  changed  as  often  as  is 
necessary  to  keep  them  sweet  and  clean.  If  the  condition  of 
the  patient  is  such   as  to  create  unpleasant  odors  from  ex- 


268  SI  AM  EXE     HOME    TREATMENT. 

cessive  perspiration,  abminnal  Ijody  temperature,  wounds, 
])oultices,  etc.,  the  changes  should  ])C  made  daily. 

In  caring  for  the  patient,  the  little  things  that  contribute  to 
his  comfort  should  be  observed.  It  is  the  observation  of  these 
details  that  constitute  good  nursing. 

Care  of  452.  The  patient  should  have  the  face,   neck,  hands  and 

Patient  amis  bathed  regularly  three  times  a  day,  and  the  body  sponged 
off  once  a  day,  preferably  in  the  morning.  In  washing  the 
body,  the  water  should  l)e  at  a  temperature  most  agreeable  to 
the  patient,  usually  lukewarm.  If  a  little  pulverized  borax 
i.5  added  to  this,  it  cleanses  the  surface  and  leaves  the  skin 
soft  and  velvety,  and  renders  it  antiseptic.  After  bathing  the 
body,  it  should  be  thoroughly  dried  with  a  towel,  and  gentle 
Efflurage  movement   (par.  175)  applied  to  the  entire  surface. 

Manipulative  treatment,  local  applications,  dressing  of 
wounds,  etc.,  should  be  done  at  this  time. 

After  these  details  are  attended  to,  the  patient's  clothing 
should  be  changed  if  necessary.  The  room  should  be  venti- 
lated, all  confusion  quieted  and  the  patient  assured,  in  a  con- 
fidential manner,  that  he  will  be  better  for  what  has  been  done, 
then  left  alone  to  rest. 

At  this  time,  the  temperature  and  pulse  should  be  taken; 
also  at  the  same  time  in  the  evening,  and  as  often  in  the  in- 
terval as  is  required.     This  applies  only  in  cases  of  fever. 

Diet  453.  With  reference  to  the  diet  and  the  various  kinds  of 

food,  in  all  cases  of  sickness  where  the  digestion  is  impaired, 
it  is  advisable  to  sterilize  the  alimentary  canal  and  keep  it 
aseptic.  This  is  best  done  by  giving  large,  hot-water  enemas, 
temperature  no  degrees,  at  least  once  a  day,  with  Siamene 
Antiseptic  Wash  added,  and  fasting  from  twenty-four  to 
thirty-six  hours.  \\'hile  fasting,  drink  large  ((uantities  of  hot 
or  cold  water.  W'hen  the  fast  is  over,  an  exclusixe  fruit  diet 
is  the  best  to  take  until  there  is  a  freshness  and  vigor  of  the 
appetite  that  is  exhilarating. 


CARING    FOR    THE    SRK-ROOM.  269 

Fruits  consist  chieHy  of  water,  with  a  small  amount  of 
thoroughlv-tlig-ested  starch  in  the  forms  of  fruit-sut;ar.  levulose 
and  various  acid  tiavors.  They  contain  almost  nothini;-  which 
requires  the  action  of  the  digesting  fluids.  It  is  important 
that  the  fruit  should  enter  the  stomach  in  the  form  oi  smooth 
pulp.  Fruit  swallowed  in  the  form  of  a  hard  mass  is  very 
hard  to  digest;  therefore  all  fruit  skins  and  seeds  should  be 
separated  from  the  pulp.  The  fruit  should  be  ripe,  but  not 
in  a  decaving  condition.  When  the  dietary  consists  wholly  of 
fruit,  it  may  be  taken  four  times  a  day.  and  the  patient  be 
allowed  to  take  as  much  as  he  desires.  Intestinal  asepsis  may 
also  be  promoted  by  an  exclusive  dietary  of  acid  buttermilk  or 
kumiss.  The  patient  should  take  three  or  four  glasses  several 
times  daily,  say  at  7  and  11  o'clock  a.  m.,  and  at  3  and  7 
o'clock  p.  M.  The  exclusive  diet  of  buttermilk  or  kumiss  is 
especially  beneficial  for  that  class  of  patients  that  are  fleshy. 
As  soon  as  the  patient's  digestive  powers  have  become  strong- 
enough,  the  predigested  cereal  foods  may  be  added. 

Antiseptic  dietary  is  the  best  for  all  of  those  who  are  sick, 
and  especially  in  typhoid  fever  and  other  fevers  arising  from 
disturbances  of  the  alimentary  canal ;  also  in  rheumatic  or  uric 
acid  diathesis,  in  obesity,  in  indigestion  and  altered  states  of 
tlie  stomach,  such  as  dilatation,  prolapsus  of  the  stomach,  and 
in  all  forms  of  liver  complaint.  Observe  antiseptic  dietary  in 
all  forms  of  bacterial  infection  of  the  stomach  or  intestines, 
in  jaundice,  diseases  of  the  kidneys,  malaria  and  in  pulmonary 
tuberculosis.  It  should  be  observed  in  eczema  and  in  all  other 
forms  of  skin  diseases,  anemia  and  acute  inflammatory  dis- 
orders. It  should  be  practiced  in  all  forms  of  nervous  diseases, 
such  as  epilepsy,  insanity,  hysteria,  insomnia  and  diseases  of 
children  in  all  forms.  Especially  should  antiseptic  dietary  be 
l)racticed  before  and  after  all  surgical  operations,  and  after 
injuries  and  shocks:  also  in  the  treatment  of  alcohol,  mor- 
phine, cocaine  and  tobacco  habits.  For  other  dietetic  measures, 
see  pars.  384  and  389. 

18 


270  SIAMEXE     HOME     TREATMENT. 

Judge,  as  far  as  possible,  from  the  known  tastes  of  the 
patient,  what  he  may  best  relish,  and  prepare  food  accordingly. 
Xcvcr  ask  the  patient  ivJiat  he  zi'oiild  like  to  eat.  The  thought 
of  food  before  it  is  pre])ared  often  takes  away  tlie  patient's  ap- 
l-ietite.  His  food,  if  it  is  i)ossil)le.  slionld  never  be  prepared 
in  his  presence,  nor  where  the  odors  from  the  cooking  will 
reach  him.  There  should  never  be  large  quantities  placed  upon 
the  plate ;  it  is  better  for  the  patient  to  ask  for  his  plate  to 
be  helped  the  second  time.  All  food  should  be  prepared  in  a 
neat  and  tasteful  manner,  and  be  inviting  to  the  patient.  If 
you  are  serving  the  patient  with  hot  drinks,  serve  them  hot, 
not  warm;  if  you  are  serving  cold  drinks,  serve  them  cold. 
Hot  and  cold  drinks  are  stimulating  tonics,  and  warm  drinks 
are  relaxing. 

Highly-seasoned  food  is  never  advisable,  especially  for  the 
sick,  but  everything  should  be  agreeably  flavored  and  of  the 
most  nutritious  quality.  All  idiosyncrasies  in  the  patient  must 
be  observed ;  and  it  must  be  seen  to  that  he  abstains  from  that 
which  is  known  to  disagree  with  him. 

The  patient  should  be  advised  to  eat  slowly  and  masticate 
the  food  thoroughly,  that  all  the  flavor  may  be  extracted. 

When  digestion  is  weak,  and  constipation  is  present,  coarse, 
light  foods  should  be  eaten,  such  as  Siamene  Unleavened 
Bread  (par.  336),  figs  and  other  fruits  that  agree  with  the 
patient.  In  such  cases,  large  quantities  of  water  should  be 
drunk  an  hour  before  each  meal. 

In  cases  where  there  is  fever,  milk,  in  any  form,  and  Ijutter 
sliould  l)e  abstained  from ;  give  Siamene  Unleavened  Bread, 
light  fruits — if  they  agree — broths,  teas,  etc. 


Glossary. 


Abnormal.     Not  natural;   unusual. 
Acute.        Active;      energetic;      quick; 

short. 
Adhesion.     Joining  of  surfaces;   act  or 

state  of  sticking. 
Adolescence.     Youth. 
Alkaloid.      Similar    to    alkali;    an    or- 
ganic   basic    substance. 
Amenorrhea.     Irregular  menstruation. 
Anatomical.     Belonging  to  anatomy  or 

dissection. 
Anemia.     Lack  of  blood  and  decreased 

amount  of  red  corpuscles. 
Anus.     Rectal  extremity. 
Anodyne.       Medicine     which     relieves 

l)ain. 
Aorta.     The  main  arterial  trunk. 
Artery.      Tubular    canal    conveying 

blood   from   the  heart. 
Aura.     Sensation,  as  a  soft  blowing  of 

air,    usually    preceding   an    epileptic 

fit. 

B 

Back-bone.  (1)  The  spine.  (2)  Moral 
principle. 

Back  Bones.     The  vertebral  column. 

Bacteria.     Micro-organisms;   germs. 

Bactericides.  Remedies  that  destroy 
l)acteria. 

Bladder.  The  membranous  sac  re- 
ceiving urine;    an  internal  organ. 

Bland.  Of  a  mild  nature;  not  irrita- 
ting. 

C 

Capillary.     A  hair-like  blood-vessel. 

Carbonaceous.     Pertaining  to  carbon. 

Cauterize.  To  burn  or  sear  with  caus- 
tic medicine  or  a  hot  iron,  as  mor- 
bid flesh. 

Cellular.  Having  cells  or  relating  to 
cells. 


Center.     A  middle  point. 

Clitoris.     Erectile  organ  in  the  female. 

Coalescing.     Growing  together. 

Cohesion.    Act  of  sticking  together. 

Coma.  Deep  stupor  or  sleep;  uncon- 
sciousness;   lethargy. 

Congenital.  Term  applied  to  malfor- 
mations or  peculiarities  which  are 
present  at  birth. 

Contracted  Muscle.  A  muscle  that 
has  been  irritated  and  become  tight 
and  hard. 

D 

Devitalize.     The  act  of  destroying  life. 
Disintegration.     Reduction  to  integral 

parts. 
Dropsical.     Pertaining  to  dropsy. 
Dysmenorrhea.       Painful     or     difficult 

menstruation. 


Enema.  Injection,  per  rectum,  of 
liquid  nourishment  or  medicine. 

Emaciation.     Becoming  lean. 

Erythrocytes.     Red   blood   corpuscles. 

Eustachian  Tube.  Passage  connect- 
ing pharynx  and  middle  ear. 

Excretion.  The  process  of  expelling 
waste  matter  from  the  human  body; 
also   the    ejected    matter. 


Fallopian  Tubes.  Canal,  by  means  of 
which  the  ova  leaves  the  ovary. 

Fauces.  Canal  connecting  pharynx 
and  mouth. 

Fecal.  Pertaining  to  the  excrement 
discharge  of  the   bowels. 

Fetid.     Foul,    offensive   odor. 

Filament.    A  thread  or  fiber. 

Flatulency.    Intestinal  wind  or  gas. 

Flex.     To  bend. 

Fossa.     A  channel;   cavity;  hollow. 


271 


-/- 


GLOSSARY. 


Friction  Movements.  Movements  that 
produce  Iriction. 

G 

Ganglion.     A  small  nerve  center. 
Genital.     Pertaining  to  the  organs  of 

generation. 
Gestation.    The  condition  of  bearing  a 

fetus;   act  of  carrying  young  in  the 

womb. 
Groin.    Angular  curve  above  the  thigh. 

H 

Hydrotherapy.  The  science  of  treat- 
ing diseases  with  water. 

Hypnotic.  Any  agent  that  produces 
sleep. 

I 

Idiosyncrasy.  A  peculiar  tempera- 
ment, in  which  some  mediums  and 
foods  act  in  the  contrary   way. 

Incision.  Cutting  into,  as  abdominal 
incision. 

infectious.  Communicable  by  respira- 
tion or  touch;  contagious. 

Inherent.  Existing  in  something,  so 
as  to  be  inseparable  from  it;  nat- 
ural. 

Inoculate.  To  communicate,  as  a  dis- 
ease, by  inserting  infectious  matter 
in  the  skin. 

Intercostal.    Between  the  ribs. 


Lactation.  Pertaining  to  secretions  of 
milk,  or  period  during  which  an  in- 
fant nurses. 

Lacteal  Vessels.  Vessels  that  perme- 
ate the  walls  of  the  intestines,  suck 
up  the  nutritious  element  of  the 
food. 

Larynx.  TTpper  part  of  trachea  or 
windpipe;    organ  producing  voice. 

Lesion.     Morbid  change  of  tissues. 

Leucocytes.     White  blood  corpuscles. 

Leucorrhea.  Vaginal  discharge"  of  a 
white  color. 

Lobe.  Round  part  of  an  organ,  as 
lobule  of  ear. 

Loins.     Lumbar  portion  of  the  back. 


M 

Malassimilation.  Imperfect  assimila- 
tion of  nutritive  element  of  food. 

Manipulation.  Handling;  manual  op- 
eration, as  massage. 

Mastitis.     Inflammation  of  the  breasts. 

Menopause.  Cessation  of  menses  or 
change  of  life. 

Menorrhagia.  Abnormal  flow  of  men- 
ses. 

Menses.  Normal  monthly  flow  of 
l)lood  from  uterus. 

Menstruation.  Monthly  disturbance 
in  the  female,  in  which  there  is  a 
bloody  uterine  flux. 

Menstruum.      A   dissolving   fluid. 

Mo!ecule.  Smallest  subdivision  of  a 
mass  possessing  individual  exist- 
ence. 

Muscle.  Fibrous  bundles  of  flesh,  by 
which  movements  of  the  body  are 
accomijlished. 

O 

Objective  Mind.  The  mortal  mind; 
reasoning  power;  the  sensitive  plate 
receiving  and  contributing  all  im- 
pressions from  the  conscious  world 
to  the  unconscious  mind. 

Ovary.  Female  organ  of  generation, 
secreting  the  ovules  before  fecun- 
dation. 

Ozone.  A  valuable  antiseptic;  potent 
oxidizing  agent. 

P 

Paroxysmal.  Pertaining  to  a  sudden 
attack:  pertaining  to  the  crisis  of 
disease. 

Pharynx.  Musculo-membranous  canal 
through  which  food  passes  in  its 
way  to  the  stomach. 

Placental.  Pertaining  to  the  after- 
birth. 

Plethoric.  Pertaining  to  the  disten- 
sion of  blood-vessels,  due  to  abnor- 
mal amount  of  blood. 

Prostate  Gland.  Gland  about  urethra 
at  neck  of  bladder. 

Ptomaines.  Product  of  animal  putre- 
faction. 


GLOSSARY. 


273 


Pubes.     Prominence  covered  with  hair 

just  over  genitalia. 
Pubic.     Pertaining  to  the  i)iibes. 


Reciprocity.  .Mutual  action  and  re- 
action; reciprocal  advantages,  obli- 
gations  or   rights. 

Rectum.  That  portion  of  intestines 
from  colon  to  anus. 

Reflex  Action.  Action  performed  by 
any  part  of  the  body  through  both 
the  conscious  and  unconscious 
mind,  through  the  afferent  and  effer- 
ent nerves. 

Renal.     Pertaining  to  the  kidneys. 

Revulsive.  Agent  forcing  morbid 
fluids  away  from  a  diseased  part. 


Saccharine.     Like  sugar. 

Scrotum.  A  sac  or  covering  over 
testicles. 

Sensations.     Knowledge  of  feeling. 

Serous.  Pertaining  to  a  yellowish 
fluid   portion  of  the  blood. 

Sheath.     An  enveloping  substance. 

Spermatic  Cord.     Cord  about  testes. 

Spermatorrhea.  Morbid  oozing  or 
wasting  away  of  semen;  very  weak- 
ening. 

Sphincter  Ani.  Ring-like  muscle  of 
anus  controlling  passage  of  feces. 

Spinal  Column.  The  back-bone  com- 
posed of  vertebrae. 

Spine.     Bony  eminence  of  vertebra. 

Splanchnic.     Pertaining  to  the  viscera. 

Spleen.  A  glandular  organ  to  the  left 
of  the  stomach. 

Subconscious.  Pertaining  to  the  crea- 
tive power  of  mind. 

Subliminal  Mind.  The  unconscious 
mind;  the  first  great  cause  of  the 
dual  self. 


Syncope.  Fainting;  a  sudden  loss  of 
consciousness. 

T 

Testicles.  Two  glandular  bodies  in 
the  scrotum,  whose  function  is  the 
secretion  of  semen. 

Therapeutical.  Pertaining  to  the  heal- 
ing art;  curative. 

Tonsils.  Two  corresponding  glands  on 
each  side  of  the  upper  part  of  the 
throat;  they  secrete  a  mucus  that 
assists  in  the  swallowing  of  food. 

Toxic.     Of  a  poisonous  nature. 

Trachea.  The  windpipe;  canal  trans- 
mitting air. 

Tremor.     Trembling;   quivering. 

Typho-toxine.  Ptomaine  poison  from 
typhoid   fever  patient. 

U 

Uremia.  Urea  in  the  blood,  causing 
l)lood  poisoning. 

Uremic.  Pertaining  to,  or  having, 
uremia. 

Urethra.  Passage  through  which  urine 
is  discharged  from  bladder. 

Uterus.  Womb;  female  organ  in 
which  product  of  conception  is  de- 
veloped. 

V 

Vasomotor.  Dilators;  nerves  that  di- 
late the  blood-vessels. 

Vein.  One  of  many  vessels  through 
which  blood  is  carried  to  the  heart. 

Vertebrae.  The  small,  flat,  round 
bones  of  spinal  column. 

Vesicle.     A  small  blister. 

Vicarious.  Applied  to  secretions  of 
one  organ  abnormally  discharged 
from   another. 

Viscera.     Plural  of  viscus. 

Viscus.  One  of  the  internal  organs  of 
the  body. 


Index. 


Paragraph.  Page. 

Acid    (poison)    433  258 

Carbolic     396,  414  255 

Muriatic     393,412  251,255 

Nitric    393,  412  251,  255 

Oxalic     394,  413  251,  255 

Prussic     395,415  251,255 

Sulphuric     393,  412  251  255 

Aconite    (poison)    407,'  425  254,'  257 

Active    Movements    268,  282  137,  149 

Liver,  spleen  and  bowels  304  '  182 

Active  Resisting  Movements   268,  281,  283, 

302     '        '  137,  149,  174 

Standing  position   303  177 

Active  Rotation  Movements 285  149 

Body  on  hips  294  161 

Body  on  thigh-joints    293  158 

Elbows     298  169 

Feet  in  sitting  position   289  150 

Feet  in  standing  position   290  153 

Hands    297  166 

Head   on   neck    301  174 

Knees     291  154 

Near  middle  of  back   295  162 

Neck  on  shoulders    300  173 

Shoulder-blade     296  165- 

Thigh     292  157 

Whole    arm    299  170 

Acute   Cases    206  75 

Alcohol,  habit  of   215,  258  87,  132 

Poison    427  257 

Alkaline   Poisons    397,  432  252,  258 

Ammonia    (hartshorn)    397,  416  252,  256 

Lye     416  256 

Potash     397,  416  252,  256 

Almond  Oil.  bitter   ; 415  255 

Amativeness    266  136 

Amenorrhea  (suppressed  menstruation)    372  234 

Ammonia  Poison   (hartshorn)    397,  416  252,  256 

Aorta,   arch    73  28 

Descending     70  27 

Appendicitis     112,  361  39,  224 

Arsenic    398,  417  252,  256 

Artificial  Respiration    435  260 

Asthma    .' 225,  227,  240  100, 104, 124 

Attribute   (see  "Faculties")    261.  262  134, 135 

Auto-suggestion     247  127 

274 


INDEX. 


^7:> 


Paragraph.  Page. 

Back    Bones 33  19 

Bandage     439  262 

Bed  Wetting    235  116 

Bites,  dog   443  264 

Insect,    snake    442  264 

Black-drops    (poison)    405  253 

Bladder    109,  242,  363  38, 12G,  227 

Bland  Liquids    430  258 

Blotches  on  Forehead 216  87 

Bowels     28  15 

Lower     Ill,  317  38, 196 

Physical  exercises  for   304  182 

Upper     110  38 

Brachial    Plexus    40,  66,  124  20,  27,  46 

Brain,  inflammation  of 342  207 

Breasts,    enlarged    371  234 

Breathing  Exercises,  classification  of 272  139 

Lower   chest    274  139 

Method   of    271  138 

Method  of  practicing 276  139 

Rhythmical     275  139 

Upper    chest    273  139 

Bronchial    Tubes    231  111 

Bronchitis     348  211 

Burns     441  263 

Bust,   development   of    227,  275  104, 139 


Cancers    313  193 

Carbolic  Acid    396,  414  251,  255 

Catarrh,  of  head    89  33 

Of  nose   85,  218,  219, 

339  32,91,92,205 

Of  throat    85  32 

Post-nasal' 233  115 

Caution,  a  faculty    8,22  11,14 

Cervical    Region,  Vertebrae 35,  39  20 

Nerves     , 40,  47,  61,  66  20,  21,  26,  27 

Change  of  Life  375  236 

Chest,  expansion  of 227  •           104 

Expansion  of  upper    229  108 

Chills     106  37 

Chlorodine    (poison)    405,  423  253,  257 

Chronic  Cases,  treatment  of 207  75 

Circulation     84,  104,  237  32,  36,  120 

Cerebral    92  34 

Eye     221  95 

General    87,  224,  230  32,  99,  111 

Internal    organs    314  194 

Lachrymal  sac    (tear  duct)    220  92 

Neck     210-213  76,  79,  80,  83 

Nose     221  95 

Clavicle,  raising  of   225  100 

Cold  Compress    314  •    194 

Cold  in  Chest   230  111 

Cholera  Morbus    313  193 


276 


INDEX. 


Paragraph.  Page. 

Combativeness     22  14 

Concentration    181,  261,  267  67, 134, 136 

Congestion,    brain    87,  212  32,  80 

Internal     91  34 

Liver    106  37 

Spinal    212  80 

Corrosive  Sublimate   400,  419  252,  256 

Constipation     104, 121,  359  '  36,  41,  218 

Consumption    (see   "Tuberculosis") 

Continuity     268  137 

Convulsions    341  206 

Coughing    79,229  31,108 

Croton  Oil    402  253 

Croup     354  216 

Cyanide   Potash    415  255 

Cystitis    363  227 


Diabetes    366  228 

Diabetic  Cure    329  201 

Diarrhea    238,  313  123, 193 

Dietetics,  beautifiers   389  248 

Carbonates     384  247 

Classification  of   383  247 

Eliminators     388  248 

Nitrates     385  247 

Phosphates 386  247 

Refrigerators     387  248 

Digestive  Power,  cultivate   390  248 

Diphtheria    90, 140,  233,         33.  54, 115, 

353  214 

Distant  Treatment    257  132 

Dog  Bites   443  264 

Dorsal  Region,  nerves   42,  48,  61,  6*7  20,  21,  26,  27 

Vertebrae 36,  42  20 

Douche     197 

Drowning    434  259 

Dry  Cupping   335  202 

Dysmenorrhea  (painful  menstruation)    374  236 

Dyspepsia,  nervous    104  3& 


Ear    83,  137,  338  32,  53,  204 

Dullness  of  hearing 85,  214  32,  84 

Internal  troubles  of   82,  214  31,  84 

Earache     338  204 

Eczema    381  243 

Soft     382  244 

Efflurage    171, 175  65,  66 

After  general  spinal  treatment  230  111 

Application  of  176  66 

Egress,  avenues  of  26-31  15 

Emergencies    434  259 

Enema    244-246 

Epilepsy    313,  344  193,  208 

Erythrocytes    9  12 


INDEX.  2"]^ 

Paragraph.  Page. 

Examination  of  Back    13.3  52 

Method  of  mailing  126-130  49-51 

Neck 137,139  53,54 

Position  for  130  51 

Pulse    138  53 

Ribs    1 35,  138  52,  53 

Spine    130,  132, 134,  136  51,  52 

Eye     82,  137,  337  31,  53,  204 

Circulation  of  blood  in  221  95 

Impaired   vision    93,  215.  217  34,  87,  88 

Inflammation  of    93,  215  34,  87 

Muscles  of   93  34 

Neuralgia  of    217  88 

Strain     217  88 

Weak    93  34 


Faculties   (attributes)    261,  262  134.135 

DefRnition     250  128 

Depressors    244  127 

Governing  mental  temperament   152  59 

Governing  motive  temperament   151  58 

Governing  vital  temperament   153  59 

Primary     250  128 

Secondarv     251  129 

Tonic     245,  264,  265,  266  127,  136 

Twofold  nature  of   249,  250,  251  128, 129 

Fainting     437  261 

Fallopian  Tubes   119  40 

Fauces     85  32 

Fever     79,  88,  311,  31,  33, 190, 

314  194 

Scarlet     378  240 

Typhoid     380  242 

Of  upper  portion  of  body  224  99 

Firmness     264  136 

Flux    238  123 

Fly-paper    (poison)    398,  417  252,  256 

Fomentations     315  194 

Fowler's  Solution  (poison)    398,  417  252,  256 


Gastritis    356  217 

General  Treatment    190  71 

Effect  of   203  73 

Hands,  arms  and.  shoulders   197,  201  72,  73 

Legs     198  73 

Lungs,  stomach,  liver  and  bowels  199  73 

Neck     200,  210.  211,         73,  76,  79, 

212,213  80,83 

Spine    196,  230  72,  111 

Generative  Organs,  male  and  female   116,241  40,126 

Female    368  231 

Germs     12,13,14,15  12 

Glossarv    271-273 

Gonorrhea     317,  377  195,  239 

Gout     367  229 


2/8  i.\i)i:x. 

H 

Paragraph.  Page. 

Habit     258,  259  132,  133 

Hair,   falling    85,  89  32,33 

Headache    85,  86,  218  32,  91 

Health     2,  18,  27.  31.       11,13,15, 

128.248,  50,127, 

251.  260,  129,  134, 

375  236 

Heart,  beat  of    96,  138  35,  53 

Centers    94  35 

Disease   of    227,  355  104,  216 

Neuralgia  of    346  209 

Palpitation  of    95  35 

Weak     229,  237  108, 120 

Heat     106  37 

Hemlock     426  257 

Hemorrhage     439  262 

Hemorrhoids    (piles)     236,362  119,227 

Hydrotherapy    306  186 

I 

Incontinence  of  Urine 235  116 

Ingress,  avenues  of 21-25  14, 15 

Inhibit     148  57 

Insect  Bites,  Stings,  etc 442  264 

Intestines,  disease  of   360  224 

Iodine 404,  422  253,  256 


Jamestown   Weed    408,  426  254,  257 


Kidneys     30,  79, 108,  234     15,  31.  38. 116 

Disease  of    364  228 


Labor     118  40 

Larynx     82  31 

Laudanum    (poison)    405,  423  253,  257 

Leucocytes     . . , 9  12 

Leucorrhea     368  231 

Liver    107.  183.  227.       38,  68, 104," 

228  107 

Disease  of 357  217 

Physical  exercise  for  304  182 

Raising  the  ribs  off 228  107 

Lumbar  Region,  nerves    43,  49.  61.  68  21,  26,  27 

Vertebrae 37,  43  20,  21 

Lunar  Caustic   403,  421  253,  256 

Lungs     31, 105,  183, 

229  15.37,68,108 
Lye     416  256 


i.\i)i:x.  279 

Paragraph.  Page. 
M 

Manipulations,  classification  oL'    167  64 

Of  hips    166  63 

Mechanical     141.  143,  157. 

158  55,  56, 60, 61 

Of  spinal  muscles   165  63 

Mastitis  (enlarged  breasts)    .'571  234 

Measles     379  241 

Meat,   ptomaine   poison   from    409,  428  254,  257 

Medulla   Oblongata    81  31 

Mental   Derangements    80,  92  31,34 

Medicine    243  127 

Conditions  for  administering  253  130 

Its  object    249  128 

Laws  governing    252  129 

Menorrhagia  (excessive  menstruation)    373  235 

Menstruation,   excessive    373  235 

Painful     374  236 

Suppressed     •. 372  234 

Metritis     370  233 

Mind     141.  158  55,  61 

Morphine     ., 405.  423  253,  257 

Mouth     , 23.  137  14,  53 

Muriatic  Acid    393,  412  251,  255 

Mumps     339  205 

Muscles     46.  159  21,  61 

Abnormal    147  57 

Healthy 146  57 

Influence  of  faculties  over   150                   '  58 

Language  of    145  57 

Levator  ani    121  41 

Normal   condition   of    142, 146  55,  57 

Sphincter    121  41 


Neck,  back  muscles  of   223  99 

General  treatment  of   210,  211,  212, 

213  76,79,80,83 

Soreness  and  stiffness   212  80 

Nephritis  (inflammation  of  the  kidneys)    364  228 

Nerves     53,  65.  142  25,  27,  55 

Action  of    10.  1 1  12 

Connecting  links    162  62 

Control     9.  76,  127,  160         12.  28.  50,  62 

Cranial     57  25 

Influence  of   75  28 

Sciatic     115,  125  39.  46 

Treatment   of    239  124 

Spinal     58  26 

Spinal  sympathetic   60  26 

Centers    61  26 

External  branch   64  26 

Functions  of    62,  63  26 

Internal  branch    64  26 

Superficial     41,64  20,  26 

Superorbital.  treatment  of   221  95 

Sympathetic     59  26 

Nervous   System    54  25 


280  INDEX. 

Paragraph.  Page. 

Central     55                        '  25 

Controllins;  power  (see  "Nerves")    65  27 

General     5G  25 

Neuralgia     212,  346  80,  209 

Of  eyes    217  88 

Of  heart    346  209 

Of  temples  216  87 

Superorbital     216  87 

Neurasthenia     343  207 

Nightshade,    deadly     408,  426  254,  257 

Nitric  Acid   393.  412  251,  255 

Nose     24,  137,  222, 

339  14,  53,  96.  205 

Catarrh   of    85,  218,  219, 

222  32,91,92,96 

Circulation  of   221  95 

Inflammation  ot    219,  220  92 

Treatment    of    218,  219  91,  92 

Nostrils,  spreading  and  stimulating 222  96 


Opium    (poison)    405,  423  253,  257 

Ovaries    119. 183,  241,  40,  68, 126, 

317  195 

Ovaritis    376  238 

Oxalic  Acid    394,  413  251,  255 


Pain  Killers (  poisons)    405  253 

Paregoric    (poison)    405,  423  253,  257 

Paralysis     237,  340  120,  205 

Paris  Green  (poison)    398,  417  252,  256 

Passive   Movements    282,  305  244, 185 

Passive  Resisting  Movements  283  251 

Passive  Rotary  Movements 286  251 

Passivity     158,  252,  253,  61, 129, 

263  130,136 

Patient,  care  of    452.  453  265,  268 

Pelvic  Organs   114  39 

Plexus    74  28 

Petrassage    168-172  64,  65 

Application    of 169, 170  64 

Methods  of  application    170  64 

Of  temples  and  forehead  217  88 

Pharyngitis     233  115 

Pharynx     82  31 

Phosphorus     401,  420  253,  256 

Physical  and  Mental  Culture  Combined    287,265-305,  149,136, 

260  185, 134 

Physiological  Experiments    163  62 

Piles     120,  236,  362  41, 119,  227 

Pleurisy     351  213 

Pneumogastric    Nerve    57,  71, 104  25,  28,  36 

Pneiimonia    350  212 

Poison    391  250 

Alkaline     397,  432  252,  258 

Unknown     392,  411  250,  255 


IXDF.X.  281 

Para^iaph.  Page. 

Position,  standins    177,  178,  184 

I'otash    :Ut7.  41  ()  252,  256 

Pregnancy     2(iit.  :!17.  :;0;t  75,  195,  2:52 

Pressure,  duration  of 2ii2  73 

T.aw    of    14:'..  150  56,  60 

Remove    1  Gl  62 

Rhythm  of   1 48,  171  57,  65 

Prussic   Acid    ;:95.  415  251,  255 

Ptomaines,  poisons  from  decayed  meats 4o;),  428  254,  257 

Vegetables    4()i).  428  254,  257 


Quinsy    233  115 


Rectum    120  41 

Internal    treatment    236  119 

Reference    Column    51  16,  22 

Resisting  Movements   282  149 

Respiration 84  32 

Rheumatic  Germ  Killer  367  231 

Rheumatism     212,  367                            80,  229 

Ribs,  abnormal  condition  135  52 

Adjustment    of    232  .                                   112 

Normal  condition   135  52 

Raising  of 228  107 

Rotary   Movements    268.  284,  288  137,  149,  150 

"Rough  on  Rats"  (poison)    417  256 


Sacral  Region,  nerves  of    44,  50.  69  21,  27 

Vertebrae    38,  44  20,  21 

Salivation    79  31 

Salt  Glow    312  192 

Scalds     441  263 

Scarlet   Fever    378  240 

Sciatica    115.  239.  328  39, 124,  200 

Self  Esteem   265  136 

Shock   438  261 

Shoulder,  muscles  of    227  104 

Rotation    of    226  103 

Siamene  Antiseptic  Wash   327  200 

Bacteria  Killer    326  200 

Bath  Powder   330  201 

Douche     197 

Catarrh  Cure   319  198 

Cold  Bath   311  190 

Diuretic    Mixture    334  202 

Dyspepsia  Tablets    332  199 

Friction  Bath,  male  316  195 

Female     317  195 

Its    Philosophy    317  195 

Fruit   Laxative    320  198 

Gonorrhea   Specific    325  199 

Laxative   Lozenges    321  199 


2^2  INDEX. 

Paragraph.  Page. 

Medicated  Sweat  Bath  No.  1  307  187 

Medicated  Sweat  Bath  No.  2 309  188 

Medicated  Tub  Sweat  310  189 

Movement     184  68 

Application    of    185         '  68 

To  temples   and   forehead    216  87 

Nerve  Food    318  198 

Application  to  abdomen  187  69 

Application  to  back  186  69 

Effect  of   189  69 

Pain  Liniment   329  201 

Rectal  Suppositories   333  202 

Rheumatic   Germ   Killer    329  200 

Rheumatic    Oil    328                           '  200 

Soap    331  201 

Treating  Chart  No.  I.     Its  design   32  19 

Treating  Chart  No.  II.     Its  design 52  25 

Unleavened  Bread    336  203 

Uterine  Tablets    324  199 

Tonic    323  199 

Suppositories    322  199 

Sick-room    444  265 

Sitz   Bath    308  187 

Skin    25.29  15 

Snake    Bites    242  126 

Sneezing    79  31 

Solar  Plexus    72, 104  28,  36 

Speech,  defective   215  87 

Spermatic   Cord    119,  241  40, 126 

Spinal   Column    33  19 

Cord,   inflammation  of    342  207 

Treatment  of  vertebrae  of   237  120 

Spine,  anemia  of 237  120 

Soreness  of    104  36 

Spleen     107,  232,  358  75,  112,  218 

Physical  exercises   304  182 

Raising  ribs  off 228  107 

Stimulants    431  258 

Stomach    97, 103,  227,         35,  36, 104, 

232,314  112,194 

Disease   of    356  217 

General  treatment  of   102,  199  36,  73 

Lower  end    101  36 

Raising  ribs  off    228  107 

Upper  end    98  36 

Strychnine     406,  424  254,  257 

Suffocation    436  260 

Sugar  of  Lead    399,  418  252,  256 

Suggestion    246  127 

Distant     257  132 

Mental    255  131 

Oral     254  131 

Physical     256  131 

Sulphuric  Acid    393,  412  251,  255 

Sumac    408  254 

Sweating  Compress  313  193 

T 

Tapotment    173  65 

Methods  of  application    174  65 


ixni:x.  283 

Paragraph.  Page. 

Tartar   Emetic    419  256 

Tetanus     345  209 

Temperament,  leading   144  56 

Mental 152  59 

Mixed     155  60 

Motive    151  58 

Vital    153  59 

Tendons     4«  21 

Testicles    119.241,317  40,126,195 

Tetter     381  243 

Thoughts     1-8,  10,  11,  18,        11,  12, 13, 

14,261  15,134 

Throat     85,  90,  137  32,  33.  53 

Treatment   of    233,  339  115,  205 

Toadstools     408,  426  254,  257 

Tobacco   Habit    215,  258  87, 132 

Poison    408,  426  254,  257 

Tongue     85  32 

Toothache 218  91 

Tooth,   bleeding   of    440  263 

Tonsillitis    352  214 

Tonsils     82,  85,  233,  31,  32,  115, 

339  205 

Trachea     73  28 

Treatment  of  Back  Bones  237  120 

Of  abdomen   113  39 

For  bed  wetting  235  116 

Of  bridge  of  nose    219  92 

Of  children  and  feeble  people  204  74 

Of  diarrhea  and  flux  238  123 

Distant 257  132 

For  ear    214  84 

General  (see  "General  Treatment") 

Of  hips    166  63 

Of  kidneys   234  116 

For  lachrymal  sac  (tear  duct)    220  92 

Local    205,  230  74,  111 

Of  lower   spinal   muscles    165  63 

Method    of    165,  194  65,  71 

For  mental  temperament    152  59 

For  motive  temperament  151  58 

For  vital  temperament  153  59 

Neck,  back  muscles  of  223  99 

Of  nose 218,  219  91,  92 

Bridge   of    219  92 

Sides  of  218  91 

For  nostrils,  spreading  and  stimulating 222  96 

Position    for     164,  195  63,  71 

Preparation  of  patient  for  192  71 

Of  rectum   236  119 

Response    to    149  57 

Silent     154  60 

For  spinal  muscles   165  63 

Of  superorbital  nerve  221  95 

Table   for    191  71 

Petrassage  of  temple  and  forehead 217  88 

Siamene  Movement  of  temple  and  forehead.  .  .  .210  87 

Vibration  of  temple  and  forehead 215  87 

Of  throat    233  115 

Of  upper  spinal  muscles   165  63 


284  INDEX. 

Paragraph.  Page. 

Of  vasomotor  centers  224  99 

Tuberculosis     349  211 

Pulmonary    227.  230.  349  104,  111.  211 

Early  stages    225  100 

Typhoid   Fever    380  242 

U 

Uric  Acid    . . . ; 365  228 

Uterus     117, 183,  214,       40,  G8,  126, 

317  195 

Displacements  of    369  232 

V 

Veratrum  Viride  (poison)    407,  425  254,  257 

Vegetables,  ptomaine  poison  fj-om   409,  428  254,  257 

Vena    Cava    170  64 

Vibrate     148  57 

Vibration    (circular)    177-183  66,  68 

Finger    180  67 

Rapid    178  66 

Slow    179  67 

Of  temple  and  forehead  215  87 

Viscera,  abdominal    113  83 

Vitativeness     26G  136 

Vomiting     79,  99,  429  31,  36,  257 

W 

Whooping-cough     347  210 

Wni     141,  182,  253,       55.  68,  130. 

250  128 

Wounds  in  General   382  244 

Wrinkles     216  87 


1  15  7  0  6. 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below, 
or  on  the  date  to  which  renewed.  Renewals  only: 

Tel.  No.  642-3405 
Renewals  may  be  made  4  days  prior  to  date  due. 
Renewed  books  are  subjea  to  immediate  recall. 


BEC'PLP   FFR  ^^ '"7C -10  AM  7 


T  r%r.i  A    crt     o  .m  General  Library 

/ P^^mc'^n^d^K  •  1^9  University  of  California 

(P2001sl0)47b — A-32  Berkeley 


YU  03^14 


